Yec1236 SDG SRS 1V01 Draft

SDG/SRS/TP01/1.
01
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS SPECIFICATION

FOR
CHECKOUT EQUIPMENT
Software Requirements Specification for Checkout

DOCUMENT TITLE
Equipment
DOCUMENT REFERENCE YEC1236/SDG/SRS/1V01/DRAFT
VERSION NUMBER 1V01
VERSION DATE March 4, 2011
Name: Mr.Sathishkumar K, Mr. Suresh V S,

Mr. Kandasamy K
PREPARED BY
Sign:
Name: Mr. Suresh V S
DOCUMENT REVIEW BY
Sign:
Name: Mr.A.Kaleel Ahmed, Mr. Suresh V S
TECHNICAL REVIEW BY
Sign:
Name: Mr. Suresh V S
PROCESS REVIEW BY
Sign:
Name: Mr.A.Kaleel Ahmed
APPROVED BY
Sign:
Copyright (2011) by Data Patterns

All right reserved. These materials are confidential and proprietary to Data
Patterns and no part of these materials should be reproduced, published in any
form by any means, electronic or mechanical including photocopy or any
information storage or retrieval system nor should the materials be disclosed to
third parties without the written authorization of Data Patterns.
Issue 1.00 Confidential January 19, 2010

YEC1236/SDG/SRS/1V01/DRAFT
REVISION HISTORY
S. VER. SECTION (S) DESCRIPTION
VER. DATE CHANGED BY
NO. NO. CHANGED OF CHANGE
Initial version,
Panel Computer
August 2, 2010 Sathishkumar K NA
and SEP3
1 0.01 requirements
August 23, SEP2(OBCS)
Suresh V S 4.4
2010 requirements
August 23, SEP1(EO)
Kandasamy K 4.3
2010 requirements
Review comments
updated (Ref :
September 23,
2 0.02 Suresh V S 1,2,3 YEC1236/SDG/DR
2010
P(SRS)/0V02/2909
10)
Review committee
comment updated
Suresh V S,
October 8, (Ref :
3 0.03 Sathishkumar K, All
2010 YEC1236/SDG/DR
Kandasamy K
P(SRS)/0V05/0912
10)
Suresh V S,
December 10,
4 1.00 Sathishkumar K, All Released version.
2010
Kandasamy K
Customer
comments updated
Kandasamy K, in section 3.1.2,
5 1.01 March 4, 2011 All
Chitra C review of
document, final
formatting.
Software Requirements Specification March 04, 2010

Confidential
Version 1.01
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 INTRODUCTION................................................................................................................1
1.1 PURPOSE..................................................................................................................1
1.2 SCOPE.......................................................................................................................1
1.3 ACRONYMS...............................................................................................................1
1.4 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS...................................................................................2
1.5 DOCUMENT OVERVIEW...........................................................................................3
2 OVERALL DESCRIPTION.................................................................................................4
2.1 PRODUCT PERSPECTIVE........................................................................................4
2.1.1 PANEL COMPUTER............................................................................................5
2.1.2 SEP1 (ON - BOARD ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT)..............................................5
2.1.3 SEP2 (ON-BOARD CONTROL SYSTEM)...........................................................5
2.2 OPERATING ENVIRONMENT...................................................................................6
2.3 PRODUCT FUNCTIONS............................................................................................7
2.4 USER CLASSES AND CHARACTERISTICS.............................................................8
2.5 APPORTIONING OF REQUIREMENTS.....................................................................9
2.6 ASSUMPTIONS AND DEPENDENCIES..................................................................11
3 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS...........................................................................................12
3.1 FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS.............................................................................12
3.1.1 PANEL COMPUTER REQUIREMENTS............................................................12
3.1.1.1 SOFTWARE AUTHENTICATION................................................................13
3.1.1.2 SYSTEM CURRENT STATUS....................................................................14
3.1.1.3 POWER SUPPLY STATUS.........................................................................14
3.1.1.4 TEMPERATURE STATUS..........................................................................15
3.1.1.5 ENTRY INTO SYSTEM...............................................................................15
3.1.1.6 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION PROVIDED.................................................16
3.1.1.6.1 BOOKMARK SEQUENCE FOR SELF CHECK....................................19
3.1.1.6.2 BOOKMARK SEQUENCE FOR TYPE A.............................................19
3.1.1.6.3 BOOKMARK SEQUENCE FOR TYPE B.............................................20
3.1.1.7 OPERATIONAL TYPE SELECTION...........................................................20
3.1.1.7.1 SELF CHECK WITH EXTERNAL LOOP BACK...................................21
3.1.1.7.2 TYPE A (RUSSIAN ARTICLE).............................................................22
3.1.1.7.3 TYPE B (INDIAN ARTICLE).................................................................22
3.1.1.7.3.1 CONTROL.....................................................................................22
3.1.1.7.3.2 STAND OF THE PLANT CONTROL CK311 (СЗК СК311)............25
3.1.1.7.3.3 INWARD INSPECTION STAND (СВК/IGI STAND).......................26

Confidential
Version 1.01
3.1.1.7.3.4 LOADING OF PROGRAMS...........................................................26
3.1.1.7.3.5 LOADING OF THE PASSPORT DATA INTO THE ARTICLE........28
3.1.1.8 MODE SELECTION....................................................................................29
3.1.1.8.1 AUTOMATIC MODE.............................................................................29
3.1.1.8.2 SELECTIVE MODE..............................................................................30
3.1.1.8.3 STEP MODE........................................................................................30
3.1.1.9 TEST EXECUTION.....................................................................................31
3.1.1.10 REPORT MANAGEMENT.........................................................................32
3.1.1.10.1 LOGGING REPORTS.........................................................................32
3.1.1.10.2 PRINTING REPORTS........................................................................33
3.1.2 SEP1 REQUIREMENTS....................................................................................34
3.1.2.1 MONITORING DANGEROUS SIGNALS.....................................................37
3.1.2.2 PROCESSING REMOTE REQUESTS........................................................40
3.1.2.3 WARHEAD SIMULATOR............................................................................41
3.1.2.4 STARTUP TEST FOR SEP1 (301)..............................................................41
3.1.2.5 CHECKING POTENTIAL MONITORING CIRCUIT (304)............................45
3.1.2.6 CHECKING THE CORRECTNESS OF MEASUREMENT BRIDGE (306). .46
3.1.2.7 CHECKING THE FUNCTIONALITY OF DANGEROUS POTENTIAL
MONITOR (307).......................................................................................................47
3.1.2.8 CHECKING THE FUNCTIONALITY OF 40 KΩ MEASUREMENT BRIDGE
(308).........................................................................................................................47
3.1.2.9 CHECKING THE FUNCTIONALITY OF 1.5 KΩ MEASUREMENT BRIDGE
(309).........................................................................................................................61
3.1.2.10 CHECKING THE CONTROL CIRCUITS OF SEP1 (320)..........................62
3.1.2.11 CHECKING THE CORRECTNESS OF WARHEAD SIMULATOR (323)...65
3.1.2.12 CHECKING THE INSULATION RESISTANCE AND SUPPLY CIRCUITS
(1004).......................................................................................................................66
3.1.2.13 CHECKING THE PYRO SOURCES ON COMMANDS OF СK341-43
(1030).......................................................................................................................70
3.1.2.14 CHECKING THE PYRO SOURCES ON COMMANDS OF PTD-5М (1032)
.................................................................................................................................73
3.1.2.15 CHECKING THE PYRO SOURCES ON COMMANDS OF COE СК351.1
(1034).......................................................................................................................84
3.1.2.16 CHECKING BZP ON COMMANDS К310-61МЭ (1035).........................106
3.1.2.17 CHECKING OF ON-BOARD AUTOMATION BLOCK (CHECK 1036).....112
3.1.2.18 CHECKING OF PRESSURE RESTORATION SIGNALING DEVICE (1037)
...............................................................................................................................115
3.1.2.19 CHECKING THE CIRCUITS OF WARHEAD (BS) (1050).......................117

Confidential
Version 1.01
3.1.2.20 CHECK OF INCLINED LAUNCH(КПМРК2) (1052).................................118
3.1.2.21 CHECKING OF КПНС1 (1054)...............................................................121
3.1.2.22 CHECK OF КПМРК1 (1060)...................................................................128
3.1.2.23 CHECKING OF КПНС2 (1062)...............................................................137
3.1.2.24 CHECKING THE CONNECTION OF AMB TO SEP1 BUS (1064)..........142
3.1.2.25 CHECKING LAUNCH CIRCUITS ON COMMAND РС (1066).................143
3.1.2.26 CHECKING THE INSULATION RESISTANCE, INITIAL CONDITION OF
SWITCHING ELEMENTS AND CIRCUITS OF ARTICLE (1072)..........................144
3.1.2.27 CHECKING THE INSULATION RESISTANCE AND SUPPLY CIRCUITS
(4)...........................................................................................................................190
3.1.2.28 CHECKING THE PYRO SOURCES ON COMMANDS OF СК341-43 (30)
...............................................................................................................................191
...............................................................................................................................191
3.1.2.30 CHECKING THE PYRO SOURCES ON COMMANDS OF КPA СК351.1
(34).........................................................................................................................191
3.1.2.31 CHECKING BZP ON COMMANDS К310-61МЭ (35)..............................191
3.1.2.32 CHECKING OF ON-BOARD AUTOMATION BLOCK (36)......................191
3.1.2.33 CHECK PRESSURE RESTORATION SIGNALING DEVICE (37)..........191
3.1.2.34 CHECK OF CIRCUITS OF WARHEAD (50)............................................191
3.1.2.35 CHECK OF INCLINED LAUNCH( КПМРК2) (52)....................................192
3.1.2.36 CHECKING OF КПНС1 (54)...................................................................192
3.1.2.37 CHECK OF КПМРК1 (60)........................................................................192
3.1.2.38 CHECKING OF КПНС2 (62)...................................................................192
3.1.2.39 CHECKING THE CONNECTION OF AMB TO SEP1 BUS(64)...............192
3.1.2.40 CHECKING OF LAUNCH CIRCUITS ON COMMAND РС (66)...............192
SWITCHING ELEMENTS AND CIRCUITS OF ARTICLE (72)..............................192
3.1.3 SEP2 REQUIREMENTS..................................................................................193
3.1.3.1 PROCESSING REMOTE REQUESTS......................................................196
3.1.3.2 CHECKING TEMPERATURE IN INSTRUMENTAL BAY .........................197
3.1.3.3 STARTING TEST OF SEP2 (CHECK 302)...............................................199
3.1.3.4 1553B SELF CHECK (CHECK 315)..........................................................202
3.1.3.5 TESTING OF FIN SIMULATOR BLOCK (CHECK 316)............................202
3.1.3.6 CHECK THE FUNCTIONALITY OF TEMPERATURE MONITORING
CIRCUIT(CHECK 322)...........................................................................................203
3.1.3.7 CHECKING THE DEVICE RF SEEKER TESTING COMPLEX (ИК1), ИК1С
(CHECK 324)..........................................................................................................204

Confidential
Version 1.01
3.1.3.8 DISCRETE I/O LOOP BACK CHECK.......................................................206
3.1.3.9 CHECKING EXTERNAL COMMANDS OF DEVICE MIU(СК314-43)(CHECK
1010)......................................................................................................................206
3.1.3.10 CHECKING “OBC FAULTY” COMMAND ISSUED BY MIU (СК314-43)
(CHECK 1011)....................................................................................................208
3.1.3.11 CHECK THE INTEGRITY OF ACTUATOR CIRCUITS(CHECK 1012)....209
3.1.3.12 CHECKING ACTUATOR DEFLECTION AS PER MIU SIGNALS(CHECK
1014)......................................................................................................................210
3.1.3.13 CHECKING RGP SENSOR DEVICE(CHECK 1016)..............................212
3.1.3.14 CHECKING RADIO ALTIMETER DEVICE(CHECK 1019).....................214
3.1.3.15 CHECKING RUSSIAN TELEMETRY DEVICE(CHECK 1020)................215
3.1.3.16 CHECKING OF DEVICE АСОНД-Ц THROUGH M1 AND M3
BUSES(CHECK 1022)...........................................................................................216
3.1.3.17 INS INTEGRATED CHECK(CHECK 1024).............................................216
3.1.3.18 CHECKING INS (CHECK 1025).............................................................217
3.1.3.19 CHECKING OBC(CHECK 1026).............................................................218
3.1.3.20 CHECKING GPS(K323)(CHECK 1027)..................................................218
3.1.3.21 CHECKING COMMAND RECEIVING UNIT OF MIU(CHECK 1046)......219
3.1.3.22 CHECKING PLP MODE(CHECK 1202).................................................219
3.1.3.23 LOADING PROGRAM IN TO OBC(CHECK 1500) .................................220
3.1.3.24 READING AND CHECK SUMMING OF THE EXECUTABLE PROGRAMS
IN OBC(CK315-1)(CHECK 1505)...........................................................................225
3.1.3.25 LOADING PASSPORT DATA OF “TYPE B” ARTICLE IN TO OBC(СК315-
1)(CHECK 1503)....................................................................................................228
3.1.3.26 READING THE PASSPORT DATA OF THE “TYPE B” ARTICLE FROM
OBC (CHECK 1504)...............................................................................................231
3.1.3.27 PROGRAM LOADING IN TO THE DEVICES К312-10В(CHECK 1501) 233
3.1.3.28 PROGRAM LOADING IN TO THE DEVICES К312-10A(CHECK 1502) 235
3.1.3.29 PROGRAM FOR COUNTING AND CHECK SUMMING OF THE
EXECUTABLE PROGRAM IN K312-10B(CHECK 1506).......................................237
3.1.3.30 PROGRAM FOR COUNTING AND CHECK SUMMING OF THE
EXECUTABLE PROGRAM IN K312-10A(CHECK 1507).......................................238
3.1.3.31 WRITING DATA AND PROGRAM IN TO THE DEVICE CK314-1
(CHECK1508).........................................................................................................239
3.1.3.32 LOADING OF PROGRAM OR ALMANAC IN TO THE DEVICE K323-1
(CHECK 1509 OR AP1510)...................................................................................240
3.1.3.33 CHECK OF ANTENNA DEVICE K312 (CHECK 1100)..........................240
3.1.3.34 CHECK RECEIVING CHANNEL OF K312 (CHECK 1102).....................243

Confidential
Version 1.01
3.1.3.35 CHECK SUPPORT SIGNALS, ISSUED BY SYSTEM К312 (CHECK
1110)......................................................................................................................248
3.1.3.36 CHECK OF TRANSMITTING DEVICE K312 (CHECK 1112)..................249
3.1.3.37 CHECK OF MODES «О», «З» AND «С» OF SYSTEM К312 (CHECK
1150)......................................................................................................................253
3.1.3.38 CHECK TELEMETRY SIGNALS OF SYSTEM К312 (CHECK 1160)....254
3.1.3.39 CHECKING EXTERNAL COMMAND OF DEVICE MIU(K314-43)(CHECK
10)..........................................................................................................................257
3.1.3.40 CHECK THE INTEGRITY OF ACTUATOR CIRCUITS(CHECK 12)........257
3.1.3.41 CHECKING ACTUATOR DEFLECTION AS PER MIU SIGNALS(CHECK
14)..........................................................................................................................257
3.1.3.42 CHECKING RGP SENSOR DEVICE(CHECK 16).................................257
3.1.3.43 CHECKING RADIO ALTIMETER DEVICE(CHECK 19)..........................258
3.1.3.44 CHECKING RUSSIAN TELEMETRY DEVICE(CHECK 20)....................258
3.1.3.45 INS INTEGRATED CHECK(CHECK 24).................................................258
3.1.3.46 CHECKING COMMAND RECEIVING UNIT OF MIU(CHECK 46)..........258
3.1.3.47 CHECKING PLP MODE(CHECK 202)....................................................259
3.1.3.48 LOADING “TYPE A” ARTICLE PASSPORT DATA IN TO OBC(K315-1)
(CHECK 503)..........................................................................................................260
3.1.3.49 READING “TYPE A” ARTICLE PASSPORT DATA FROM OBC(K315-1)
(CHECK 504)..........................................................................................................261
3.1.3.50 LOADING PROGRAM IN TO OBC(CHECK 500)....................................262
3.1.3.51 LOADING PROGRAM IN TO DEVICE SEEKER(K312-10B)(CHECK 501)
...............................................................................................................................263
3.1.3.52 LOADING PROGRAM IN TO DEVICE SEEKER(K312-10A)(CHECK 502)
...............................................................................................................................265
3.1.3.53 EXECUTABLE PROGRAM CHECKSUM VERIFICATION IN OBC(CHECK
505)........................................................................................................................266
3.1.3.54 EXECUTABLE PROGRAM CHECKSUM VERIFICATION IN SEEKER
(K312-10B)(CHECK 506).......................................................................................267
3.1.3.55 EXECUTABLE PROGRAM CHECKSUM VERIFICATION IN
SEEKER(K312-10A)(CHECK 507).........................................................................267
3.1.4 SEP3 REQUIREMENTS..................................................................................268
3.1.4.1 SWITCH ON/OFF OF POWER SUPPLIES...............................................268
3.1.4.2 REMOTE REQUEST SERVICES..............................................................294
3.1.4.3 STARTING TEST SEP SC (AP 300).........................................................295
3.1.4.4 SELF CHECK SEP SC (AP 303)...............................................................300
3.1.4.5 CHECKING THE INDICATING DISPLAY IN CONTROL PANEL..............304

Confidential
Version 1.01
3.1.4.6 1553B LOOP BACK CHECK.....................................................................305
3.1.4.7 DISCRETE I/O LOOP BACK CHECK.......................................................305
3.1.4.8 DUT POWER BACK CHECK....................................................................306
3.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS......................................................................307
3.3 DESIGN CONSTRAINTS.......................................................................................307
3.4 SOFTWARE SYSTEM ATTRIBUTES.....................................................................308
3.4.1 RELIABILITY....................................................................................................308
3.4.2 AVAILABILITY..................................................................................................308
3.4.3 SECURITY.......................................................................................................308
3.4.4 MAINTAINABILITY...........................................................................................308
3.4.5 PORTABILITY..................................................................................................308
3.5 EXTERNAL INTERFACE REQUIREMENTS.........................................................309
3.5.1 User Interfaces.................................................................................................309
3.5.2 HARDWARE INTERFACES.............................................................................309
3.5.3 SOFTWARE INTERFACES.............................................................................310
3.5.4 COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACES................................................................311
3.5.4.1 ETHERNET COMMUNICATION...............................................................311
3.5.4.2 1553B COMMUNICATION........................................................................312
3.6 NON FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS..................................................................313
3.6.1 SITE DEPENDENCY........................................................................................313
3.6.2 GENERAL DEVELOPMENT REQUIREMENTS..............................................313
3.6.3 PERSONNEL RELATED REQUIREMENTS....................................................313
3.6.4 TRAINING RELATED REQUIREMENTS.........................................................313
3.6.5 LOGISTICS RELATED REQUIREMENTS.......................................................313
3.6.6 PACKAGING REQUIREMENTS......................................................................313
4 REQUIREMENTS TRACEABILITY...............................................................................314
APPENDIX A: LIST OF CHECKS AND DESCRIPTION...................................................323
APPENDIX B: INSTRUCTION FOR EXECUTING CHECKS IN SELF-CHECK WITH LOOP-
BACK MODE ..............................................................................................................329
APPENDIX C: INSTRUCTION FOR EXECUTING TYPE B CHECKS IN AUTOMATIC
MODE...........................................................................................................................330

Confidential
Version 1.01
1 INTRODUCTION
1.1 PURPOSE
This Software Requirements Specification (SRS) provides the detailed description of all the
functions used in Check-Out Equipment (COE) application and its requirements. It provides
a complete description of all the software requirements of COE application.
The expected audience of this document are review team, internal quality verification team,
and BrahMos team.
1.2 SCOPE
The Scope of this document is to provide the COE Application software requirements. The
requirements provided in this document includes,
• Functional Requirements of the four sub systems (Panel Computer - PC, On-Board
Electrical - SEP1, On-Board Control System - SEP2 and Self Control)
• Performance Requirements
• Design Constraint Requirements
• Software System Attribute Requirements
• External Interface Requirements
• Non Functional Requirements
1.3 ACRONYMS
The acronyms used in this document are listed in Table 1.1.
Table 1.1: ACRONYMS
ACRONYM DESCRIPTION
AMB Ampule Battery
COE Checkout Equipment
DUT Device Under Test
GPS Ground Power Supply
GUI Graphical User Interface
INS Inertial Navigation System
OBC On-Board Computer
OBCS On-Board Control System
OBE On-Board Electrical
PDU Power Distribution Unit
PLP Pre-Launch Phase
RGP Rate Gyro Package
SEP Special Execution Processor
SP Signal Power
TM Telemetry
WS Warhead Simulator
1.4 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS

The documents referred to prepare this SRS are given in Table 1.2.
Confidential
Version 1.01 Page 1 of 330
Table 1.2: REFERENCD DOCUMENTS
S.NO DOCUMENT REFERENCE DESCRIPTION
1. DP-YEC1236-HDD-SyRS-1V00- System Requirement Specification
SA1-00
2. IEEE Std 12207.0-1996 Standard for Information Technology -
Software life cycle processes
3. BM/ECC/CSAD/Ver 1.0 Control Software Architecture Document For
Checkout Equipment
4. T589.6378.00310-01 13 01-1 Algorithm for Control Software
5. T589.6378.00310-01 12 01 Panel Computer Source Code Document
6. T589.6378.00310-01 12 02-1 SEP1,2,3 Source Code Document
7. T589.6378.00310-01 12 02-4 SEP2 – DUT Source Code
8. T589.6378.00310-01 12 02-3 SEP1 – DUT Source Code
9. T589.6378.00310-01 12 02-2 Self Check – DUT Source Code 1
10. T589.6378.00310-01.13.02-1 Self Check – DUT Source Code 2
11. T589.6378.00310-01 13 03-1 SEP2 - DUT Algorithm
12. T589.6378.00310-01 13 04-1 SEP1 - DUT Algorithm
13. T589.6378.00310-01 13 05-1 Seeker - DUT Algorithm
14. T589.6378.00310-01 13 02-1 Self Check - DUT Algorithm
15. TIVLC_461271_004_I_L3-87 Instruction for loading software
16. TIVLC_461271_004_I2_L3-L180 Instruction for Self check
17. TIVLC_461271_004_I1-2_L3- Instruction for Type B Check
224
18. TIVLC_461271_004_I1-3_L3- Instruction for Type A Check
219
19. BM/ECC/CDD/Ver1.0 Conceptual Design Document
20. BM/ECC/TSD/Ver.1.0) Technical Specification Document
21. DP-MKT-TP-BRAHMOS-RRM- Technical Proposal
1034A & Date: 09-03-2010
1.5 DOCUMENT OVERVIEW

This document consists of the following major sections as described below.
Confidential
Section 1
This section deals with Introduction, purpose of the document, scope of the document,
acronyms used in this document, referenced documents and document overview.
Section 2
This section gives the overall description about the system including product perspective,
operating environment, product functions, user classes and characteristics, apportioning of
requirements, assumptions and dependencies.
Section 3
This section gives brief description of Specific Requirements including functional
requirements, SEP 1 requirements, SEP 2 requirements, SEP3 requirements, performance
requirements, design constraints, software system attributes, external interface
requirements and non functional requirements.
Section 4
This section gives the requirement traceability matrix along with list of checks and
description, Instruction for executing checks in self-check with loop-back mode , Instruction
for executing Type B checks in automatic mode.

Confidential
2 OVERALL DESCRIPTION
2.1 PRODUCT PERSPECTIVE
The Check-Out Equipment has four sub-systems namely Panel Computer, Special
Execution Processors (SEP) 1, Special Execution Processors 2 and Special Execution
Processors 3 with its own processor and I/O cards. Each system runs in QNX Neutrino 6.x
real time OS. The four sub-systems communicates via Ethernet.
Figure 2.1: COE BLOCK DIAGRAM

Confidential
2.1.1 PANEL COMPUTER
The Panel computer provides operator interface using Photon Micro GUI. It includes
display, keyboard, joystick and floppy. The panel computer is used as a user interface. The
panel computer will be used for,
1. Configuration of the test
2. Execution of test
3. Scheduling task for SEP's (SEP1, SEP2 and SC) to carryout the test
4. Collecting and displaying status of the test from SEP's to the user
5. Printing test results using the printer
6. Logging the test results
2.1.2 SEP1 (ON - BOARD ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT)
SEP1 will perform tests related to On-Board Electrical(OBE) equipments. The SEP1 will,
1. Monitor the dangerous signals periodically in 10ms interval. In case of emergency, it
will issue emergency shutdown of power supplies and “Termination” command to
stop execution in other subsystems.
2. Execute the tests related to SEP1 based on the request from Panel Computer.
3. Interface with Warhead Simulator, monitor the status of missile warhead signals and
simulate the warhead signal in simulation mode.
2.1.3 SEP2 (ON-BOARD CONTROL SYSTEM)
SEP2 will perform tests related to On-board Control System (OBCS). The SEP2 will,
1. Monitor the temperature in Instrument Bay (IB) periodically(10 ms) interval. In case
of emergency, it will issue “Termination” command to stop execution in other
subsystems.
2. Execute the tests related to SEP2 based on the request from Panel Computer.
3. Interface with Fin Simulator to simulate fin movement for validating the function of
SEP2 in absence of hydraulics input to missile actuator system.

Confidential
2.2 OPERATING ENVIRONMENT

The operating environment of the software is give in Table 2.1 in detail.
Table 2.1: OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
S. No NAME DESCRIPTION
1 Operating System QNX 6.x
2 Processor Intel core i7 processor at 2.53 GHz, on-chip 4MB L2 cache
3 Bus Architecture VME
4 RAM Up to 8 GB DDR3 SDRAM
5 Video On-Board VGA up to 2048 X 1536 resolution
6 Joystick USB based
7 Keyboard USB based
8 Hard disk 8 GB solid state disk, IDE compact flash interface

Confidential
2.3 PRODUCT FUNCTIONS

The functionalities of COE are,
• Check health and functionality of Missile subsystems
• Carry out Control System Checks
• Validate the missile integration process at various stages
• Carry out Health check of integrated missile at Technical Positions
• Inward Good Inspection (IGI) of Seeker
• Software loading into SEP2, Inertial Navigation System (INS), Seeker and Ground
Power Supply (GPS) via 1553B interface
• Dangerous potential monitoring
• Temperature monitoring

Confidential
2.4 USER CLASSES AND CHARACTERISTICS

The users who can access the COE application are,
1. Root
2. Experts
3. Operators
The characteristics of users are specified in Table 2.2.
Table 2.2: CHARACTERISTICS OF USERS
FUNCTIONS ROOT EXPERTS OPERATORS

Login to software Yes Yes Yes
Entry into system Yes Yes Yes
Test Execution (COE Self check, Type A
Yes Yes Yes
and Type B)
Loading of programs to Article Yes Yes No
Loading of passport data to article Yes Yes No
Update/Change COE application Yes No No
Photon login to enter into OS (optional) Yes No No

Confidential
2.5 APPORTIONING OF REQUIREMENTS

The requirements related to Russian article(Type A) will not be implemented in checkout
equipment and considered for future use. The sections related to Russian article described
in this document are listed in Table 2.3.
Table 2.3: APPORTIONING REQUIREMENTS
S. NO. SECTIONS REFERENCE
1 Section 3.1.1.6.2 BOOKMARK SEQUENCE FOR TYPE A
2 Section 3.1.1.7.2 TYPE A (RUSSIAN ARTICLE)
3 Section 3.1.3.22 CHECKING PLP MODE(CHECK 1202)
4 Section 3.1.3.33 CHECK OF ANTENNA DEVICE K312
(CHECK 1100)
5 Section 3.1.3.39 CHECKING EXTERNAL COMMAND OF
DEVICE MIU(K314-43)(CHECK 10)
6 Section 3.1.3.40 CHECKING INTEGRITY OF ACTUATOR
CIRCUITS(CHECK 12)
7 Section 3.1.3.41 CHECKING ACTUATOR DEFLECTION AS
PER MIU SIGNALS(CHECK 14)
8 Section 3.1.3.42 CHECKING RGP SENSOR DEVICE(CHECK
16)
9 Section 3.1.3.43 CHECKING RADIO ALTIMETER
DEVICE(CHECK 19)
10 Section 3.1.3.44 CHECKING RUSSIAN TELEMETRY
DEVICE(CHECK 20)
11 Section 3.1.3.45 INS INTEGRATED CHECK(CHECK 24)
12 Section 3.1.3.46 CHECKING COMMAND RECEIVING UNIT OF
MIU (CHECK 46)
13 Section 3.1.3.47 CHECKING PLP MODE(CHECK 202)
14 Section 3.1.3.48 LOADING “TYPE A” ARTICLE PASSPORT
DATA IN TO OBC (K315-1) (CHECK 503)
15 Section 3.1.3.49 READING “TYPE A” ARTICLE PASSPORT
DATA FROM OBC (K315-1) (CHECK 504)
16 Section 3.1.3.50 LOADING PROGRAM IN TO OBC(CHECK
500)
17 Section 3.1.3.51 LOADING PROGRAM INTO DEVICE
SEEKER(K312-10B)(CHECK 501)
18 Section 3.1.3.52 LOADING PROGRAM IN TO DEVICE
SEEKER (K312-10A) (CHECK 502)
19 Section 3.1.3.53 EXECUTABLE PROGRAM CHECKSUM

Confidential
S. NO. SECTIONS REFERENCE

VERIFICATION IN SEEKER (K312-10B)
(CHECK 506)
VERIFICATION IN SEEKER(K312-10A)
(CHECK 507)

Confidential
2.6 ASSUMPTIONS AND DEPENDENCIES

The following are the assumption obtained from the requirements,
1. The Monitoring of dangerous signals will be done at 10 ms time period.
2. The Monitoring of temperature in instrument bay will be done at 50 ms time period.
The following are the interlocks identified as dependencies,

1. The SEP's (SEP1, SEP2 and SEP3) depends on Panel Computer for initiating the
test.
2. Power Supply switch ON/OFF sequence. (Refer Section 3.1.4.1)
3. The presence of feed back status to be assured before proceeding further execution
of test.
4. Some input attributes and status of their actual presence are considered as interlock
for the execution of test.
5. Presence of type of Device Under Test (DUT) is considered as interlock for
executing the test (eg: Checking whether Type B is connected to COE, etc)

Confidential
3 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS
3.1 FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS
This section gives the application specific requirements of COE application (Refer
Table 3.1).
Table 3.1: FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS
S. NO IDENTIFICATION NUMBER REQUIREMENT
1 DP_COE_PC_REQ Panel Computer Operations
2 DP_COE_SEP1_REQ SEP1 Operations
3.1.1 PANEL COMPUTER REQUIREMENTS

Requirement ID: DP_COE_PC_REQ
The panel computer will provide the user interface to control the COE operations, displays,
log the test result and option for printing test result. Based on the user input, it will send the
commands to other three sub-systems through Ethernet. The functional requirements are
listed in Table 3.2.
Table 3.2: PANEL COMPUTER REQUIREMENTS
1 DP_COE_PC_REQ_01 User authentication to access the software
2 DP_COE_PC_REQ_02 To display the system initialization & current
configuration status
3 DP_COE_PC_REQ_03 To display the power supply status
4 DP_COE_PC_REQ_04 To display the temperature status
5 DP_COE_PC_REQ_05 Enter into the system to perform startup test.
Select the article type and changing system
time.
6 DP_COE_PC_REQ_06 To give additional information
7 DP_COE_PC_REQ_07 To select operation type
7.1 DP_COE_PC_REQ_07_01 To perform Self Check
7.2 DP_COE_PC_REQ_07_02 To perform Type A Check
7.3 DP_COE_PC_REQ_07_03 To perform Type B Check
7.3.1 DP_COE_PC_REQ_07_03_0 Control Operations
1
7.3.2 DP_COE_PC_REQ_07_03_0 Stand of the plant control CK311
2
7.3.3 DP_COE_PC_REQ_07_03_0 Inward Inspection stand (CBK/IGI Stand)
3
7.3.4 DP_COE_PC_REQ_07_03_0 Loading of programs

Confidential

4
7.3.1 DP_COE_PC_REQ_07_03_0 Loading passport data into the article
5
8 DP_COE_PC_REQ_08 To select the test execution mode
8.1 DP_COE_PC_REQ_08_01 To test the system in automatic mode
8.2 DP_COE_PC_REQ_08_02 To test the system in selective mode
8.3 DP_COE_PC_REQ_08_03 To test the system in step mode
9 DP_COE_PC_REQ_09 To execute all the tests
10 DP_COE_PC_REQ_10 To manage the reports
10.1 DP_COE_PC_REQ_10_01 To log the reports
10.2 DP_COE_PC_REQ_10_02 To print the reports
3.1.1.1 SOFTWARE AUTHENTICATION
Requirement ID: DP_COE_PC_REQ_01

Description
This requirement is used to verify the software authentication. The application verifies the
current operating system user and allows to access the system only if the user name and
password is valid.
Inputs
NA
Processing
The steps performed in user authentication are,
1. Get the current OS login user name.
2. If the current user name is other than root, experts or operators, an error message
will appear and block the user to access the software.
3. If the user name is valid for root/experts/operators, the access rights will be defined
as per User Classes and Characteristics as in Table 2.2.
Outputs
The application gives access to the valid user and shows warning message for the invalid
user.

Confidential
3.1.1.2 SYSTEM CURRENT STATUS
Description
If the authentication is valid, the application main window will appear and display the
systems current status (initially the system status will be EMPTY).
Inputs
NA
Processing
1. The main window will display the type of article selected in “Enter into system” (refer
Section 3.1.1.5).
2. The current system time will be read and displayed
3. The current operation mode will be read and updated by the user.
Outputs
Current system status will be displayed.
1. Test Type - Self check or Type A or Type B).
2. Date and time - user input time or Current system time.
3. Mode of operation.
4. Alive status of SEP's (Self Check, SEP1 and SEP2) – Alive or Not Alive.
3.1.1.3 POWER SUPPLY STATUS

Description
After successful authentication, the application main window will appear. It will display the
DUT power supply status (initially these status will be OFF).
Inputs
NA
Processing
1. After entering in to the application, it will receive the power status of Signal Power
(SP) bus, Ground Power Supply (GPS) bus, OBE bus and OBCS System from Self
Control Sub System and display to the user.
2. The status will be updated whenever there is change in power supply.
Outputs
The current Power supply status of SP, GPS, OBE and OBCS (ON/OFF) will be updated in
main window.
3.1.1.4 TEMPERATURE STATUS


Confidential
Description
After successful authentication, the application main window will appear and display the
temperature status (initially these status shall be EMPTY).
Inputs
NA
Processing
1. After entering in to the application, it will receive the temperature of instrument bay
of SEP2 Sub System and display to the user.
2. The temperature in Celsius will be updated in main window.
3. If the temperature status is fail (i.e If it is not in the range of 15ºC to 45ºC), the
status will be displayed in red color.
Outputs
The current status of Temperature in instrument bay (in Celsius) will be updated in main
window.
3.1.1.5 ENTRY INTO SYSTEM

Description
This requirement will give the start-up check of all the SEP's and select the article to be
tested. Based on the article selection, the operation types (Type A or Type B or COE Self
Check operation) will be provided (Refer Section 3.1.1.7). The article type can be changed
before starting the test. Once the test is started, the article selection can be changed only
after restarting the ATE system.
Inputs
• Article Type (СK310 – Type B, СК310.0А – Type A, COE/CK351.1 - COE Self
Check or COE COTS Self Check)
• Day (1 to 31)
• Month (1 to 12)
• Year (2010 to 2099)
• Hours (0 to 23)
• Minutes (0 to 59)

Confidential
Processing
1. After selecting the type of article in “Entry to system” it will perform the startup test
a) Starting test of SEP3 (AP 300) – Refer Section 3.1.4.3
b) Starting test of SEP1 (AP 301) – Refer Section 3.1.4.4
c) Starting test of SEP2 (AP 302) – Refer Section 3.1.3.3
2. After successful completion of the start-up test, it will ask for the Article type. If
startup test fails it will not allow further test in DUT to be carried out.
3. After reading the article type, the date and time can be modified by the user (except
“operators”)
Outputs
• The startup test result will be displayed in the panel and logged in to the report file.
• The Article type will be displayed in main window (Refer Section 3.1.4).
• The system time changes according to the given date and time (Refer
Section 3.1.4).
3.1.1.6 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION PROVIDED

Description
The attributes will be identified as additional informations to carryout the tests. These
attributes will be grouped as bookmarks based on the purpose it serves.
Input
The additional information provided are listed in Table 3.3.
Table 3.3: ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
BOOKMARK
/ATTRIBUTE BOOKMARK/ATTRIBUTE CONTENTS REMARKS
NO.
1 Factory serial number of the Article Alphanumeric
No. of alphanumeric displayed : 5
eg) ХХХХХ
2 Rocket Production Plant (RPP), Dangerous (Multiple attributes can
current line control, TDR (technological article) be selected)
3 Tunning of PLP checking mode Selection
4 IK1 (Test stand of seeker), Hydro system (Multiple attributes can
X2 not connected (It is selected only if tested be selected)
with X1 connector)
5 Control program for BS Numeric value
No. of Characters Displayed : 1
eg) Х
6 Simulation of following systems : If Type of operation is

Confidential
BOOKMARK
NO.
SD (Pressure Sensors) "Control"
SD1 (Pressure Sensors)
KSSRS (Booster) (Multiple attributes can
Ish DRR (FIN Sensors) be selected)
6 Execution of self check К312 If Type of operation is
Presence of TSU (Telemetry) "СВК"
(Multiple attributes can
be selected)
7 Engine Related Parameter Numeric
T1 AMD (msec) : 0 to 999
T2 AMD (msec) : 0 to 999
T3 DCL (Sec) – (Response time) : 0 to 99
8 Attributes for INS testing Numeric
Enter INS Time code (sec) : 0 to 9999
(default value : 72)
Time T of warming (Sec) : 0 to 9999
(default value : 40)
Enter attributes of CK43 : 0 to 9999
(default value : 1)
9 Latitude deg.min.sec
eg) XXX.XX.XX (Range : ±90º)
10 Presence of sub-systems: (Multiple attributes can
Antenna AT-59 available (External antenna) be selected)
K312 is available (Seeker)
TM is available (Telemetry)
Presence of K323P (APSN - GPS)
11 Frequency Number Code: Numeric
No. of digits displayed : 4
Eg) XXXX
12 Inaccuracy of Leveling: Numeric
Alpha X (Code), Alpha Z(Code)
No. of digits displayed : 6
Eg) XXXXXX
13 Voltage Priming Selection
14 The azimuth of installation deg.min.sec

Confidential
BOOKMARK
NO.
±XXX.XX.XX - previous value should be
retained (Range : 0 ºC to 360 ºC)
15 Use the corrections from AI Selection
16 Updating PZ1 (FM1), PZ2 (FM2), KNK Numeric
(MINS), PZ3 (wave point data)
Word number (Max:143) : XXX
Value (6 digit) XXXXXX
17 Mode of recertification : Single Selection
1. RP
2. Recording of ADP of device К314-44
18 Enter the longitude deg.min.sec
eg) XXX.XX.XX
Enter the Altitude above the sea level (m)
and press the button NEXT
±XXXX.XXX
19 Display of parameters on screen in normal Selection
condition
20 Gravitational acceleration (m2/sec) Float value
eg) X.XXXXX
Processing
1. Depending on the Type of operation and attributes, the sequence of bookmark input
will be changed
2. The previous values of some additional inputs will be restored in next execution.
3. The additional information will be sent to all the three SEP's after configuring all
information.
4. For degree to radian conversion, the following convention factor will be used.
For negative value,
Radian value = (Degree value * 0.017453292519943) + (Minute value *
0.000290888208666) + (Second value * 0.000004848136811)
For positive value,
Radian value = (Degree value * 0.017453292519943) - (Minute value *
0.000290888208666) - (Second value * 0.000004848136811)
Output
The additional information will be displayed.
3.1.1.6.1 BOOKMARK SEQUENCE FOR SELF CHECK

Confidential
The sequence of bookmark for the self check is given in Table 3.4.
Table 3.4: BOOKMARK SEQUENCE FOR SELF CHECK
TYPE OF VALUES OF CHECKING SEQUENCE OF
S. NO.
OPERATION ATTRIBUTES BOOKMARKS
1 Self Check with - 1, 4, 19
external connection
3.1.1.6.2 BOOKMARK SEQUENCE FOR TYPE A

The sequence of bookmark for article Type A is given in Table 3.5.
Table 3.5: BOOKMARK SEQUENCE FOR TYPE A
TYPE OF VALUES OF CHECKING
S. NO. SEQUENCE OF BOOKMARKS
OPERATION ATTRIBUTES
1. Control Attribute " presence 1, 2, 3, 15*, 16*, 4, 5, 6, 7, 10, 9,
of К312" = 0 18, 14, 12, 13, 19
2. Control Attribute " presence 1, 2, 3, 15*, 16*, 4, 5, 6, 7, 10,
of К312" = 1 11, 9, 18, 14, 12, 13, 19
3. СЗК К311 Attribute " presence 1, 3, 15*, 16*, 4, 5, 7, 10, 9, 18,
of К312" = 0 14, 12, 13, 19
4. СЗК К311 Attribute " presence 1, 2, 3, 15*, 16*, 4, 5, 7, 10, 11,
of К312" = 1 9, 14, 12, 13, 18, 19
5. СВК - 1, 4, 5, 6, 11, 19
6. Loading of - Dialogue Execution of Check in
program mode "Selective"
7. Loading of - Dialogue Execution of Check in
Passport data mode "Selective"
8. Determination of - 1, 4, 5, 10, 9, 14, 12, 18, 19
corrections
9. Routine checks of - Execution of Check 200 in mode
device К314-44 "Selective"
Note : *- bookmarks 15 and 16 will be opened while selecting the attribute "tuning of PLP
checking mode" = 1 in book mark 3. Refer Table 3.3.

Confidential
3.1.1.6.3 BOOKMARK SEQUENCE FOR TYPE B
Table 3.6: BOOKMARK SEQUENCE FOR TYPE B
TYPE OF VALUES OF CHECKING SEQUENCE OF BOOKMARKS
S. NO.
OPERATION ATTRIBUTES (PANEL SHALL BE OPENED)
1. Control Attribute "presence 1, 2, 3, 16*, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 10, 9, 18,
of К312 (Seeker)" = 0 14, 13, 19
2. Control Attribute "presence 1, 2, 3, 16*, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 10, 11, 9,
of К312 (Seeker)" = 1 18, 14, 13, 19
3. СЗК СК311 Attribute "presence 1, 3, 16*, 4, 5, 7, 8, 10, 9, 18, 14, 13,
of К312" = 0 19
4. СЗК СК311 Attribute "presence 1, 3, 16*, 4, 5, 7, 8, 10, 11, 9, 18, 14,
of К312" = 1 13, 19
5. СВК / IGI - 1, 4, 5, 6, 11, 19
stand
Note : * bookmark 16 will be opened only while entering the Attribute “Tuning of PLP
checking mode” = 1 in bookmark 3. Refer Table 3.3.
3.1.1.7 OPERATIONAL TYPE SELECTION

Description
Based on the article selection in “Enter into system” (refer Section 3.1.1.5), the software
will provide option to the user for operational type selection. According to this, the tests will
be executed in SEP's. The operational type requirements are given in Table 3.7.
Table 3.7: OPERATIONAL TYPE REQUIREMENTS
REQUIREMENT
S. NO REQUIREMENT
IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
1. DP_COE_PC_REQ_07_01 Self Check operation requirements
2. DP_COE_PC_REQ_07_02 Type A operation requirements
3. DP_COE_PC_REQ_07_03 Type B operation requirements

Confidential
3.1.1.7.1 SELF CHECK WITH EXTERNAL LOOP BACK
Requirement ID: DP_COE_PC_REQ_07_01

Description
If the article type is selected as “Self Check” in “Enter into system” (refer Section 3.1.1.5),
the self check will be performed for all the three SEP's. The self check with external
connection will be performed for all the SEP's by connecting the self test cables.
Inputs
Refer Table 3.3 for bookmark sequence of reading inputs.
Processing
The self test is to be performed in the sequence given in Table 3.8.
Table 3.8: COE SELF CHECK WITH EXTERNAL LOOP BACK
TEST NUMBER (IN
S. NO CHECK/OPERATION NAME
EXISTING S/W)
1. Checking potential monitoring circuit 304
2. Checking the correctness of measurement bridge 306
3. Checking the function of dangerous potentials 307
monitoring
4. Checking the functionality of 40 KΩ Measurement 308
Bridge
5. Checking the functionality of 1.5 KΩ Measurement 309
Bridge
6. Checking the control circuits of SEP1 320
7. Checking the correctness of warhead simulator 323

8. Checking SEP SEP2 in mode of exchange with 315
SEP SC along mainlines М1, М2, M3 and
M4 (1553b Self check)
9. Checking the Fin Simulator Block 316
10. Checking the functionality of Temperature 322
Monitoring Circuit
11. Checking the device RF Seeker Testing Complex 324
(ИК1), ИК1С
Outputs
The test result will be displayed, logged and printed in panel computer (if required).

Confidential
3.1.1.7.2 TYPE A (RUSSIAN ARTICLE)
Description
If the article type is selected as “Type A” in “Enter into system” (refer Section 3.1.1.5), the
tests related to Type A will be performed in all the three SEP's. The requirements for type A
article are given in Table 3.9.
Table 3.9: TYPE A REQUIREMENTS
1. DP_COE_PC_REQ_07_02_01 Control
2. DP_COE_PC_REQ_07_02_02 Stand of the plant control K311
3. DP_COE_PC_REQ_07_02_03 Stand of the plant control K312
4. DP_COE_PC_REQ_07_02_04 Inward inspection stand
5. DP_COE_PC_REQ_07_02_05 Loading of programs
6. DP_COE_PC_REQ_07_02_06 Loading of the published data of device
7. DP_COE_PC_REQ_07_02_07 Amendment definition
8. DP_COE_PC_REQ_07_02_08 Instant mode of device K314-44
3.1.1.7.3 TYPE B (INDIAN ARTICLE)

Description
If the article type is selected as “Type B” in “Enter into system” (refer Section 3.1.1.5), the
tests related to Type B will be performed in all the three SEP's. The requirements for type B
article are given in Table 3.10.
Table 3.10: TYPE B REQUIREMENTS
1. DP_COE_PC_REQ_07_03_01 Control
2. DP_COE_PC_REQ_07_03_02 Stand of the plant control CK311
3. DP_COE_PC_REQ_07_03_03 Inward inspection stand (СВК/IGI stand)
4. DP_COE_PC_REQ_07_03_04 Loading of programs
5. DP_COE_PC_REQ_07_03_05 Loading of Passport Data into the Article
3.1.1.7.3.1 CONTROL
Requirement ID: DP_COE_PC_REQ_07_03_01

Description
The article will be tested in “Control” type based on the mode selection (automatic/
selective/step by step). The test will vary according to the attributes.

Confidential
Inputs
Refer Table 3.3 bookmark sequence for reading inputs
Processing
The test will be performed in the article based on the cyclogram for the type of mode. The
cyclogram for the modes will be selected based on the additional inputs given. The list of
cyclogram to be executed in Automatic mode are given in Table 3.11. The tests in the
cyclogram will be executed one after another.
Table 3.11: LIST OF CYCLOGRAM (AUTOMATIC MODE)
S. NO CYCLOGRAM ATTRIBUTES TEST NUMBER
NO. (IN EXISTING SOFTWARE)
1 9 K323P = 0, TDR = 0, 1010, 1012, 1014, 1016, 1020, 1030,
X2undock = 0, BS = 1, 1032, 1034, 1036, 1050, 1052, 1054,
К312 = 0 1060, 1062, 1064, 1066, 1202, 1024
2 10 K323P = 0, TDR = 0, 1010, 1012, 1014, 1016, 1020, 1030,
X2undock = 0, BS = 1, 1032, 1034, 1036, 1050, 1052, 1054,
К312 = 1 1060, 1062, 1064, 1066, 1202, 1024,
1100, 1112, 1150, 1102
3 13 K323P = 0, TDR = 0, 1010, 1012, 1014, 1016, 1020, 1030,
X2undock = 0, BS = 3, 1032, 1034, 1036, 1050, 1054, 1060,
К312 = 1 1064, 1066, 1202, 1024, 1100, 1112,
1150, 1102
4 14 K323P = 0, TDR = 0, 1010, 1012, 1014, 1016, 1020, 1030,
X2undock = 0, BS = 3, 1032, 1034, 1036, 1050, 1054, 1060,
К312 = 0 1064, 1066, 1202, 1024
5 21 K323P = 0, TDR = 0, 1034, 1064, 1066, 1202, 1024
X2undock = 1, BS = 3,
К312 = 0
6 22 K323P = 0, TDR = 1, 1010, 1012, 1014, 1016, 1020, 1030,
X2undock = 0, BS = 1, 1032, 1035, 1036, 1050, 1052, 1054,
К312 = 1 1060, 1062, 1064, 1066, 1202, 1024,
1100, 1112, 1150, 1102
7 23 K323P = 0, TDR = 1, 1010, 1012, 1014, 1016, 1020, 1030,
X2undock = 0, BS = 3, 1032, 1035, 1036, 1050, 1054, 1060,
К312 = 1 1064, 1066, 1202, 1024, 1100, 1112,
1150, 1102
8 24 K323P = 0, TDR = 1, 1035, 1064, 1066, 1202, 1024
К312 = 0

Confidential
S. NO CYCLOGRAM ATTRIBUTES TEST NUMBER

NO. (IN EXISTING SOFTWARE)
9 31 K323P = 1, TDR = 0, 1027, 1010, 1012, 1014, 1016, 1020,
X2undock = 0, BS = 1, 1030, 1032, 1034, 1036, 1050, 1052,
К312 = 0 1054, 1060, 1062, 1064, 1066, 1202,
1024
10 32 K323P = 1, TDR = 0, 1027, 1010, 1012, 1014, 1016, 1020,
X2undock = 0, BS = 1, 1030, 1032, 1034, 1036, 1050, 1052,
К312 = 1 1054, 1060, 1062, 1064, 1066, 1202,
1024, 1100, 1112, 1150, 1102
11 33 K323P = 1, TDR = 0, 1027, 1010, 1012, 1014, 1016, 1020,
X2undock = 0, BS = 3, 1030, 1032, 1034, 1036, 1050, 1054,
К312 = 1 1060, 1064, 1066, 1202, 1024, 1100,
1112, 1150, 1102
12 34 K323P = 1, TDR = 0, 1027, 1010, 1012, 1014, 1016, 1020,
X2undock = 0, BS = 3, 1030, 1032, 1034, 1036, 1050, 1054,
К312 = 0 1060, 1064, 1066, 1202, 1024
13 35 K323P = 1, TDR = 0, 1027, 1034, 1064, 1066, 1202, 1024
К312 = 0
14 36 K323P = 1, TDR = 1, 1027, 1010, 1012, 1014, 1016, 1020,
X2undock = 0, BS = 1, 1030, 1032, 1035, 1036, 1050, 1052,
К312 = 1 1054, 1060, 1062, 1064, 1066, 1202,
1024, 1100, 1112, 1150, 1102
15 37 K323P = 1, TDR = 1, 1027, 1010, 1012, 1014, 1016, 1020,
X2undock = 0, BS = 3, 1030, 1032, 1035, 1036, 1050, 1054,
К312 = 1 1060, 1064, 1066, 1202, 1024, 1100,
1112, 1150, 1102
16 38 K323P = 1, TDR = 1, 1027, 1035, 1064, 1066, 1202, 1024
К312 = 0
The tests to be executed in Selective Mode and Step by Step Mode are given in Table
3.12.

Confidential
Table 3.12: LIST OF CYCLOGRAM (SELECTIVE MODE AND STEP BY STEP MODE)
S. NO TEST NUMBER (IN EXISTING SOFTWARE)
1. 1025, 1026, 1100, 1102, 1112, 1150, 1202, 1500, 1501, 1502, 1503, 1504,
1505, 1506, 1507, 1508, 1005, 1011, 1019, 1022, 1025, 1026, 1027, 1037,
1022*
(* Presence of TM =1)
Output
The test results will be displayed, logged and printed in panel computer (if required).
3.1.1.7.3.2 STAND OF THE PLANT CONTROL CK311 (СЗК СК311)

Description
The article will be be tested in “СЗК СК311” type according to the mode selection
(automatic/selective/step by step mode). The test will vary according to the attributes.
Inputs
NA
Processing
The sequence of tests to be executed in Automatic mode of stand of plant control is given
in Table 3.13.
Table 3.13: STAND OF PLANT CONTROL
CYCLOGRAM CHECK NUMBER
S.NO ATTRIBUTES
NUMBER (IN EXISTING SOFTWARE)
1 11 К312=0 1010, 1012, 1014, 1016, 1020, 1046, 1202,
1024
2 12 К312=1 1010, 1012, 1014, 1016, 1020, 1046, 1202,
1024, 1100, 1112, 1150, 1102, 1160
Output

Confidential
3.1.1.7.3.3 INWARD INSPECTION STAND (СВК/IGI STAND)

Description
The article will be tested in the “СВК/IGI Stand” type according to the mode selection
(automatic/selective/step by step mode). The test will vary according to the attributes.
Inputs
NA
Processing
The sequence of Inward Inspection Stand test to be executed in Automatic mode is given
in Table 3.14. The type of operation performed is given in Table 3.15.
Table 3.14: INWARD INSPECTION STAND TEST SEQUENCE
S. CYCLOGRAM TEST NUMBER
ATTRIBUTES
NO NUMBER (IN EXISTING SOFTWARE)
1 5 - 1100, 1112, 1150, 1102, 1160
Table 3.15: TYPE OF OPERATION

TEST NUMBER
S. NO TYPE OF OPERATION
(IN EXISTING SOFTWARE)
1. Inward inspection stand (СВК / IGI Stand) 1200
2. Inward inspection stand (СВК / IGI Stand) 1072
Output
3.1.1.7.3.4 LOADING OF PROGRAMS

Description
The input required for loading the programs to the article will be provided in this section.
The loading of programs can be done only by the users 'root' and 'experts'.
Inputs
The inputs to be read from the user are given in Table 3.16.

Confidential
Table 3.16: INPUT TO LOAD PROGRAM INTO ARTICLE

BOOKMARK/
BOOKMARK/ATTRIBUTE CONTENTS REMARKS
ATTRIBUTE NO.
1 Device selection Single selection
1. CK315-1(OBC)
2. K312-10B (Seeker processor)
3. K312-10A (Seeker processor)
4. CK314-1(INS)
5. K323-1 (GPS)
2 Input device Single selection
1. USB interfaced CD-ROM
Processing
1. Checksum of the selected file will be displayed.
2. The tests to be executed in selective mode for loading of programs are given in
Table 3.17.
Table 3.17: TEST EXECUTED FOR LOADING DATA TO ONBOARD DEVICES

CHECK NUMBER
S.NO CHECK/OPERATION NAME
(IN EXISTING SW)
1. Loading the program in to the device СК315-1 1500
2. Reading and check summation of executable 1505
program of СК315-1
3. Loading the program in to the device К312-10В 1501
program of К312-10В
5. Loading the program in to the device К312-10А 1502
program of К312-10А
7. Loading the PD in to the СК315-1 1503
8. Reading the PD of article in КПА СК351.1 1504
9. Loading the data and programs in to the device 1508
СК314-1
10. S/W loading in to the device К323-1 1509
11. Loading of almanac in to device К323-1 1510
Output
The checksum of the selected file will be displayed to the user.
3.1.1.7.3.5 LOADING OF THE PASSPORT DATA INTO THE ARTICLE

Confidential
Description
The input required for loading the passport data to the missile will be provided.
Inputs
The inputs to be read from the user are given in Table 3.18.
Table 3.18: INPUT TO BE READ IN LOADING OF PASSPORT DATA
BOOKMARK/
BOOKMARK/ATTRIBUTE CONTENTS REMARKS
ATTRIBUTE NO.
1 Serial number and touch code Numeric value
1. Serial No. of the device
2. Alpha Xrleft code
3. Alpha Yr code
4. Alpha Zr code
5. Alpha Xrright code
2 Attributes of integration of the product Multiple selection
1. K312 is available (Seeker)
2. TSU is available (Telemetry)
3. TSU-I is available (Telemetry)
4. APSN is available (GPS)
3 Type of fuel Single selection
1. Basic (Default)
2. Reserve1
3. Reserve2
4 Published data Numeric value
1. Software version
2. S/W version modification number
2. License number of operating
system
Processing
The tests listed in Table 3.19 will be executed in selective mode for loading the programs.
Table 3.19: TEST EXECUTED FOR PASSPORT DATA LOADING
CHECK NUMBER
S.NO TEST/OPERATION NAME
(IN EXISTING SW)
1. Loading the PD in to the СК315-1 1503
2. Reading the PD of article in КПА СК351.1 1504
Output
The input given by user will be logged in a file.

Confidential
3.1.1.8 MODE SELECTION

Description
The test will be executed with respect to mode selection. The requirements of mode
selection is given in Table 3.20.
Table 3.20: MODE SELECTION REQUIREMENTS
REQUIREMENT IDENTIFICATION
S. NO REQUIREMENT
NUMBER
1. DP_COE_PC_REQ_08_01 Automatic mode
2. DP_COE_PC_REQ_08_02 Selective mode
3. DP_COE_PC_REQ_08_03 Step mode
3.1.1.8.1 AUTOMATIC MODE

Description
In this mode, all the tests will be executed automatically (as per the cyclogram) without user
interaction for the particular operational type of an article. The cyclogram will be selected
based on the inputs (article type, mode, presence of sub systems). Provision will be
provided for executing the selected test in the selected cyclogram. Initially all test will be
enabled and it can be disabled if needed.
Inputs
Attributes/sub-mode (Cyclic or Through)
Processing
1. According to the Article type, operational type and presence of sub system, the
cyclogram will be selected for execution.
2. If the sub-mode is Cyclic, test in the cyclogram will be executed twice.
3. If sub-mode is Through, Cyclogram with list of checks (say cyclogram 10 based on
input) will be executed. If any parameter fails in the test, the execution of current
test will be stopped and the next test in the cyclogram will be executed.
4. The following status will be updated during the execution of test.
a) Receive and display the current executing test with progress from SEP's.
b) Receive and display the first step and final step in the test from SEP's.
c) Receive and display the current step number with progress from SEP's.
d) NONORM (Not Normal) of test parameter should be highlighted.
Outputs
The test results will be displayed, logged and printed in panel computer (if required). If any
parameter fails in the test, it will be highlighted in red color.

Confidential
3.1.1.8.2 SELECTIVE MODE

Description
In this mode, the selected test will be executed for the particular operational type of article.
Provision will be given to select the test number for execution.
Inputs
Processing
1. According to the Article type and operational type, the selected test will be
executed.
2. For Cyclic sub-mode, the selected tset will be executed twice.
3. For Through sub-mode, if any parameter fails the execution of the test will be
stopped.
4. The following status will be updated during the execution of tests.
Outputs
3.1.1.8.3 STEP MODE

Description
In this mode, the selected step (from start step to end step) of the particular test will be
executed for the particular operational type of article. Provision will be provided to enter
Check number, first and final step number for the particular test. After execution of current
step, user has to press Continue button to execute the next step.
Inputs
Processing
1. According to the Article type and operation type, the selected steps of a test will be
executed.
2. For Cyclic sub-mode, the selected test will be executed twice.
3. For Through sub-mode, the test will be executed step by step (If one step fails it will
continue the next step).
4. The following status will be updated during the execution of tests.

Confidential
Outputs
3.1.1.9 TEST EXECUTION

Description
After configuring the system (refer Section 3.1.1.5 to Section 3.1.1.6), the execution of the
test will be initiated by user at any time. Provision will be given to initiate, start, pause,
continue and stop the test execution.
Inputs
Additional Information
Processing
1. To perform the initialization required for the test.
2. On starting the test execution, the test will be started according to the mode,
operational type and article. Test will be executed in the specified cyclogram (for
automatic mode).
3. When pause command is issued, the check execution will be paused.
4. When continue command is issued, the test execution will be continued from the
paused point.
5. When stop command is issued, the execution will be stopped after completing the
current step of the test.
Outputs
• The test (First step, final step and current test number with progress) and step
details (current check number with progress) will be updated to user.
• The test results will be displayed, logged and printed in panel computer (if required).

Confidential
3.1.1.10 REPORT MANAGEMENT

Description
For all tests, the parameter validation status will be logged and printed through printer. The
sub requirements of report management are mentioned in Table 3.21.
Table 3.21: SUB REQUIREMENTS OF REPORT MANAGEMENT
REQUIREMENT IDENTIFICATION
S. NO REQUIREMENT
NUMBER
1. DP_COE_PC_REQ_10_01 Logging reports
2. DP_COE_PC_REQ_10_02 Printing reports
3.1.1.10.1 LOGGING REPORTS
Requirement : DP_COE_PC_REQ_10_01
Description
For all tests, the parameter validation status will be logged in file. The results can be viewed
in future.
Inputs
The inputs for logging the reports are,
• Result of each parameter checks
• Kind of operation
• Mode of operation
• Additional information (AI) details
• Power supply status
Processing
1. For each test, the result will be logged with the parameter description.
2. AI Value will be logged for all the changes in the value during execution of test.
3. Power supply (SP, NI, OBESEP1, OBCSSEP2) status will be logged if there is any
change in present state power supply compared to previous state.
4. On any failure due to dangerous potentials or temperature, the failure result will be
printed.
5. The user name will be logged in the report.
6. Report files will be removed automatically after three months (if available).
7. The results will be logged in binary format and can be extracted to text format with
respect to user request.

Confidential
8. By default, all report files will be in read only file format (the file attribute will be
changed to read only to avoid accidental edit through file editors) after logging
results in the file.
Outputs
The data logged to file.
3.1.1.10.2 PRINTING REPORTS

Description
For all checks, the parameter validation status will be printed through printer.
Input
The inputs for printing the reports are,
• Printing enable or disable
• Result of each parameter tests
• Kind of operation
• Mode of operation
• Additional information(AI) details
• Power supply status
Processing
1. Provision will be given to select the printing of results on-line.
2. Before starting the printing operation, the feasibility of printer and paper feed should
be confirmed and status will be updated to the user.
3. Provision will be given for printing the test status (Normal/Not Normal) with signal
name.
4. AI values will be printed if there is any change from initial value during execution.
5. Power supply (SP, NI, SEP1, SEP2) status will be printed if there is any change
from OFF state to ON state and vice versa.
6. On any failure due to dangerous potentials or exceeding temperature limit, the result
will be printed.
7. The user name will be logged in the report.
8. All the message will be printed with time in seconds
Output
• The results will be sent to the printer.
• Printed results will be obtained.

Confidential
3.1.2 SEP1 REQUIREMENTS
SEP1 will run programs related to On-Board Equipment. It carries out testing of SEP1 units
with in DUT using Digital IO modules and Analog measurement modules. Panel computer
will initiate the execution of tests in SEP1 via Ethernet. It will send the status of parameter
tested via Ethernet and communicate with other SEP's for accessing the remote port data
through Ethernet.
Requirement ID: DP_COE_SEP1_REQ

Table 3.22: SEP1 REQUIREMENTS
TEST NO
IDENTIFICATION
S. NO REQUIREMENT (EXISTING
NUMBER
SYSTEM)
1. DP_COE_SEP1_R Monitoring of dangerous signals in Control Programs
EQ_01 the period of 10 ms and
emergency off will be done in case
of any potential variation.
2. DP_COE_SEP1_R SEP1 receives the remote request Control Programs
EQ_02 from Panel Computer or from other
SEP's and send response to the
respective sub-system.
3. DP_COE_SEP1_R Monitoring and simulation of Control Programs
EQ_03 Warhead signals.
4. DP_COE_SEP1_R Startup test for SEP1. 301
EQ_04
SELF - CHECK
5. DP_COE_SEP1_R Checking Potential monitoring 304
EQ_05 circuit.
6. DP_COE_SEP1_R Checking the correctness of 306
EQ_06 measurement bridge.
7. DP_COE_SEP1_R Checking the functionality of 307
EQ_07 dangerous potential monitoring.
8. DP_COE_SEP1_R Checking the functionality of 40 308
EQ_08 KΩ Measurement Bridge.
9. DP_COE_SEP1_R Checking the functionality of 1.5 309
EQ_09 KΩ Measurement Bridge.
10. DP_COE_SEP1_R Checking the control circuits of 320
EQ_10 SEP1.
11. DP_COE_SEP1_R Checking the correctness of 323

Confidential
TEST NO
IDENTIFICATION
NUMBER
SYSTEM)
EQ_11 warhead simulator.
12. DP_COE_SEP1_R Discrete I/O Loop Back Check. -
EQ_12
TYPE B
13. DP_COE_SEP1_R Checking the insulation resistance 1004
EQ_13 and supply circuits.
14. DP_COE_SEP1_R Checking the pyro sources on 1030
EQ_14 commands of СК341-43.
EQ_15 commands of PTD-5М.
EQ_16 commands of COE СК351.1.
17. DP_COE_SEP1_R Checking BZP based on 1035
EQ_17 commands К310-61МЭ
18. DP_COE_SEP1_R Checking of On-board Automation 1036
EQ_18 Block.
19. DP_COE_SEP1_R Checking of Pressure restoration 1037
EQ_19 signaling device.
20. DP_COE_SEP1_R Checking Warhead circuits (BS). 1050
EQ_20
21. DP_COE_SEP1_R Checking inclined launch 1052
EQ_21 (КПМРК2).
22. DP_COE_SEP1_R Checking of КПНС1. 1054
EQ_22
23. DP_COE_SEP1_R Check of КПМРК1. 1060
EQ_23
24. DP_COE_SEP1_R Checking of КПНС2 1062
EQ_24
25. DP_COE_SEP1_R Checking the connection of AMB 1064
EQ_25 to SEP1 bus.
26. DP_COE_SEP1_R Checking the Launch Circuits on 1066
EQ_26 command РС.
27. TYPE A Checking the insulation resistance, 1072
DP_COE_SEP1_R initial condition of switching
EQ_27 elements and circuits of the article.

TYPE A

Confidential
TEST NO
IDENTIFICATION
NUMBER
SYSTEM)
28. DP_COE_SEP1_R Checking the insulation resistance 4
EQ_28 and supply circuits
EQ_29 commands of СК341-43
EQ_30 commands of PTD-5М
EQ_31 commands of COE СК351.1
32. DP_COE_SEP1_R Checking BZP on commands 35
EQ_32 К310-61МЭ
33. DP_COE_SEP1_R Checking of On-board Automation 36
EQ_33 Block
34. DP_COE_SEP1_R Checking of Pressure restoration 37
EQ_34 signaling device
35. DP_COE_SEP1_R Check of circuits of Warhead (BS) 50
EQ_35
36. DP_COE_SEP1_R Checking of inclined launch 52
EQ_36 (КПМРК2)
EQ_37
38. DP_COE_SEP1_R Check of КПМРК1 60
EQ_38
EQ_39
40. DP_COE_SEP1_R Checking the connection of AMB 64
EQ_40 to SEP1 bus
41. DP_COE_SEP1_R Checking the Launch Circuits on 66
EQ_41 command РС
42. DP_COE_SEP1_R Checking the insulation resistance, 72
EQ_42 initial condition of switching
elements and circuits of article

Confidential
3.1.2.1 MONITORING DANGEROUS SIGNALS

Requirement ID: DP_COE_SEP1_REQ_01
Description
The SEP1 will monitor the dangerous signal with 10 ms period. If there is variation in
voltage compared to the threshold limit, an emergency OFF signal will be issued to switch
OFF the power supply.
Inputs
NA
Processing
1. The condition for checking the dangerous potentials are,
(a) The dangerous signal monitoring should not be performed for the tests listed in
Table 3.23.
Table 3.23: TESTS NOT TO BE MONITORED FOR DANGEROUS SIGNAL
S. NO TEST NUMBER DESCRIPTION
1. 307 Checking the circuit for potentials
TYPE A
2. 30 Checking the pyro sources on commands of СК341-43
3. 32 Checking the pyro sources on commands of PTD-5М
4. 52 Check of КПМРК2 - inclined launch
5. 54 Checking of КПНС1
6. 60 Check of КПМРК1
8. 72 Checking the insulation resistance, initial condition of
switching elements and circuits of article
TYPE B
9. 1030 Checking the pyro sources on commands of СК341-43
10. 1032 Checking the pyro sources on commands of PTD-5М
11. 1052 Check of КПМРК2 - inclined launch
13. 1060 Check of КПМРК1
15. 1072 Checking the insulation resistance, initial condition of

Confidential
(b) Checking of dangerous potentials should not be done while switching ON/OFF
of power supply.
2. The selection of dangerous signal for monitoring will be done based on the power
supply status which is given in Table 3.24.
3. If there is any difference in voltage compared to threshold limit, the following steps
will be carried out,
(a) Issue E_ALARM signal to remove the voltage.
(b) Remove signals C_WKL_ENI of SEP3 for illuminating indications.
(c) Send message to Panel Computer indicating the power supplies are switched
OFF.
(d) Send message to SEP3 and SEP2 to stop the execution of checks.
(e) The Channel in which variation of voltage occurs will be send to PC with signal
name.
2. If “Termination of check” signal E_PREKR_PROWEROK of warhead is present, the
following steps will be carried out,
(a) Issue E_ALARM signal to remove the voltage.
(b) Remove signals C_WKL_ENI of SEP3 for illuminating indications.
(c) Send message to Panel Computer indicating the power supplies are switched
OFF.
(d) Send message to SEP3 and SEP2 to stop the execution of checks.
The list of dangerous signals at various cases are given in Table 3.24.
Table 3.24: LIST OF DANGEROUS SIGNAL MONITORED
S. NO. LIST OF CASES SIGNALS
1 Switch ON of COE E_AMB
E_UMIT
2 Switch ON of SP E_AMB
E_WU
E_PP
E_UMIT
E_AMB_MINUS
E_WU_MINUS
E_PP_MINUS
3 Switch ON of GPS E_AMB
E_WU
E_PP
E_NI_CORPUS
E_UMIT

Confidential
S. NO. LIST OF CASES SIGNALS

E_AMB_MINUS
E_WU_MINUS
E_PP_MINUS
E_NI_CORP_MINUS
4 Switch ON of SEP1 E_AMB
E_WU
E_PP
E_NI_CORPUS
E_UMIT
E_BA
E_ISH2
E_AMB_MINUS
E_WU_MINUS
E_PP_MINUS
E_NI_CORP_MINUS
5 Check 307 for AMB E_AMB
6 Check 307 for WU E_WU
7 Check 307 for PP E_PP
8 Check 307 for GPS E_NI
9 Check 307 for Body E_NI_CORPUS
10 Reset all signal after Check 307 NA
11 Set E_UMIT E_UMIT
12 Switch OFF of SEP1 NA
13 Switch OFF of GPS NA
14 Switch OFF of SP NA
15 Check 72 E_UMIT
16 Reset all NA
Output:
The signal in which the voltage variation occur will be displayed in PC.

Confidential
3.1.2.2 PROCESSING REMOTE REQUESTS

Description
The SEP1 will process the request received from Panel Computer or other SEP's and send
response to the respective system.
Inputs
NA
Processing
1. The communication between SEP1 and PC are,
(a) PC initiates the execution of Start-up test for SEP1.
(b) PC initiates the execution of test in SEP1.
(c) PC will send user inputs to SEP1.
(d) PC sends initial, start, pause, continue and stop command to SEP1.
(e) SEP1 will issue emergency OFF to PC.
(f) SEP1 sends the status (Normal/Not normal) of parameters to PC while
executing the test.
2. The communication between SEP1 and SEP2 are,
(a) SEP1 will send its digital input status to SEP2 (on request from SEP2).
(b) SEP1 will issue emergency OFF to SEP2.
(c) SEP1 will send command to initiate 1553B transfer from SEP2 with MIU.
(d) SEP2 should send the result of 1553B exchange to SEP1.
(e) SEP1 will request SEP2 for reading its ADC signals.
(f) SEP1 will request SEP SEP2 to Switch ON/OFF its DOP signals.
(g) SEP1 will issue emergency OFF to SEP2.
(h) SEP2 will request SEP1 to switch ON / OFF its output signal.
(i) SEP3 will send emergency OFF command to SEP1 if temperature in instrument
bay exceeds the limit (15ºC to 45ºC).
3. The communication between SEP1 and SEP3 are,
(a) SEP1 will send its digital input status to SEP3 (on request from SEP3).
(b) SEP1 will issue emergency OFF to SEP3.
(c) SEP3 will request SEP1 to switch ON/OFF its output signal.
(d) SEP3 will send the power supply status to SEP1 whenever there is a change in
power supply status.
Output
NA
3.1.2.3 WARHEAD SIMULATOR

Confidential
Description
The warhead simulator will act as an interface between COE and Missile warhead circuit.
The warhead simulator serves the following purpose,
1. Surveillance of warhead signals and feed the values to SEP1 of COE.
2. Monitor the status of warhead signals on request of SEP1 and checks whether
there is permission to carryout the test.
3. In the simulation mode, the warhead signals are simulated by warhead
simulator.
Inputs
• Additional information
• Control program number of BS(1 or 3)
Processing
1. The warhead simulator will start execution when it is powered ON.
2. In the absence of self check mode, the missile warhead signals will be
monitored and set the respective signal to SEP1.
3. ”Termination of checks” signal will be issued in case of any abnormality in
warhead signals status.
4. If the mode is self check, simulation of missile warhead signals will be done
and set the respective signal to SEP1.
5. If the warhead signals are normal, “Warhead is OK” signal will be issued to
SEP1.
Output
Issue command to COE, to carryout the test if missile warhead is normal or the “termination
of check” will be issued to stop the test.
3.1.2.4 STARTUP TEST FOR SEP1 (301)

Description
The startup test will be executed automatically while selecting the “Entering into system”
(refer Section 3.1.1.5) option. This test will verify the initial condition of the input signals of
SEP1.
Inputs
NA

Confidential
Processing
1. The sequence to verify the signal status of SEP1 is given in Table 3.25.
Table 3.25: SEQUENCE TO VERIFY SIGNAL STATUS OF SEP1
SIGNAL EXPECTED
PARAMETER SIGNAL NAME DESCRIPTION
TYPE STATUS
1. E_ISH_IZD DIP OFF Initial OK
2. E_AMB_PODKL DIP OFF AMB connected
3. E_AMB_PROGR_WH DIP OFF AMB heated
4. E_OCP DIP OFF Dangerous current line
control
5. E_ST_RAZR_A DIP OFF Launch permitted (A)
6. E_PRZN_TDR DIP OFF Attribute TDR
7. E_PRZN_IR DIP OFF Attribute of “Missile
Simulator”
8. E_JIDK_TPS_OTST DIP OFF Liquid in TLC is absent
9. E_KNTR_PLUS_AMB DIP OFF Check point of (+)
_WH AMB
10. E_KNTR_MINUS_AM DIP OFF Check point of (-) AMB
B_WH
11. E_KONTR_STIK_WH DIP OFF Connection check of
electrical equipment
12. E_ISHODHOE_2 DIP OFF Initial 2
13. E_SIGN_NORMA_WH DIP OFF Signal (Normal)
14. E_SIGN_STOP_WH DIP OFF Signal (Stop)
15. E_SIGN_NAZAD_WH DIP OFF Signal (Back)
16. E_SIGN_ZAKR_WH DIP OFF Signal (Close)
17. E_KNTR_STIK_SPS DIP OFF Connection check of
Booster stage
18. E_KNTR_WENT_WH DIP OFF Checking of FANS
19. E_KNTR_SD_WH DIP OFF Checking of SD
20. E_KNTR_SD_1_WH DIP OFF Checking of SD1
21. E_PRZN_RSZ_WH Attribute of RDP
22. E_ISH_BALL_TPS_W DIP OFF Initial of TLC bottle
H
23. E_KNTR_NAL_W_ER DIP OFF Checking of presence
A of voltage in electrical
equipment
24. E_ST_RAZR_B DIP OFF Launch permitted (B)
25. E_PLUS_ZD_AMB_A DIP OFF + Activation of Ample

Confidential
SIGNAL EXPECTED
TYPE STATUS
Battery(A)
26. E_PLUS_ZD_DMT_A DIP OFF + Activation of LTE (A)
27. E_PLUS_ZD_GGS_A DIP OFF + Activation of GGS
(A)
28. E_PLUS_ZD_GGS_B DIP OFF + Activation of GGS
(B)
29. E_ZD_BALL_TPS_A DIP OFF Activation of TLC(A)
bottle
30. E_ZD_BALL_TPS_B DIP OFF Activation of TLC (B)
bottle
31. E_PLUS_ZD_DMT_B DIP OFF + Activation of LTE(B)
32. E_ZD_DRK_A DIP OFF Activation of RCM (A)
Emergency
33. E_ZD_DRK_B DIP OFF Activation of RCM (B)
Combat
34. E_ZD_DREN_AMB_B DIP OFF Activation of AMB (B)
drainage
35. E_MINUS_ZD_DMT_ DIP OFF - Activation of LTE,
DBT_DRK_A HTE, RCM (A)
36. E_MINUS_ZD_GGS_ DIP OFF - Activation of GGS,
BALL_B bottles (B)
37. E_MINUS_ZD_DMT_ DIP OFF - Activation of LTE,
DBT_DRK_B HTE, RCM (B)
38. E_MINUS_ZD_GGS_ DIP OFF - Activation of GGS
BALL_A bottles (A)
39. E_PLUS_ZD_AMB_B DIP OFF + Activation of AMB (B)
40. E_RAZR_ST_A DIP OFF Launch permission (А)
41. E_PDKL_NI_BA DIP OFF Connection of GPS to
SEP1 bus
42. E_RAZR_ST_B DIP OFF Launch permission (B)
43. E_ZD_DREN_AMB_A Activation of AMB (A)
drainage
44. E_PDKL_S_AMB_S_ DIP OFF Connect bus AMB to
BA_A buses SEP1 (А)
45. E_OTKL_S_MD DIP OFF Switch OFF of MD bus
46. E_OTKL_S_PP_1_2 DIP OFF Switch OFF of pyros
buses

Confidential
SIGNAL EXPECTED
TYPE STATUS
47. E_ZD_DBT_A DIP OFF Activation of HTE (A)
48. E_ZD_DBT_B DIP OFF Activation of HTE (B)
49. E_IMIT_SND_WIH DIP OFF Simulation of
command
50. E_IMIT_SWK_WH DIP OFF Simulation of “Out of
canister sensor”
51. E_IMIT_SWW_WH DIP OFF Simulation of “out of
water sensor”
52. E_IMIT_ND_SPS DIP OFF Simulation of SOM of
booster stage and
failure of valves
53. E_COM_STOP_WH DIP OFF Command (Stop)
54. E_COM_NAZAD_WH DIP OFF Command (Back)
55. E_WKL_KAN_B_WH DIP OFF Switch ON of channel
B
56. E_COM_MD_OTKL_ DIP OFF Switch OFF of
WH sustainer
command
57. E_COM_RPT_OTKL DIP OFF Command RPT Switch
OFF
58. E_COM_IMIT_DRR DIP OFF Command for
simulation of “FIN
unfolding sensor”
59. E_COM_SWD_BLOK DIP OFF Locking of Command
SWD
60. E_PDKL_S_AMB_S_ DIP OFF Connection of AMB
BA_B bus to the SEP1 bus
(B)
61. E_WKL_S_R DIP OFF Switch-ON of bus P
62. E_LG157 DIP OFF Reserve
63. E_IMIT_SDA_3_5 DIP OFF Simulator of absolute
pressure sensor 3-5
64. E_WKL_KAN_B DIP OFF Switch ON of channel
B
65. E_ISH_PWU DIP OFF Initial PTD
66. E_IMIT_SD_WH DIP OFF Simulation of SD

Confidential
SIGNAL EXPECTED
TYPE STATUS
67. E_IMIT_SD_1_WH DIP OFF Simulation of SD1
68. E_PLUS_27_NI_I DIP OFF +27 V GPS
69. E_IMIT_T_5GRAD_C DIP OFF Simulation of t = 5
degrees
70. E_KS_SRS_WH DIP OFF
71. E_MINUS_OTM_ST_ DIP OFF - Cancellation of
A launch (A)
72. E_MINUS_OTM_ST_ DIP OFF + Cancellation of
A launch (A)
Outputs
3.1.2.5 CHECKING POTENTIAL MONITORING CIRCUIT (304)

Description
This requirement will verify the efficiency of bridge measuring circuit. This circuit will be
used as an indicator of continuity and decoupling in the circuits of Electrical Equipment
while checking the article.
Note
1. To test the insulation between the signals, the Measurement Bridge 40 KΩ will be
used. The output of bridge will be measured in ADC. The sequence for bridge
measurement is,
(a) Select Check Point 1 and 2
(b) Connect the Check Point 1 and 2 to Measurement Bridge
(c) Measure the bridge output. The output should be ranging 8.0V to 15.0V
(d) Disconnect the Check Point 1 and 2 from Measurement Bridge
2. To test the continuity between the signals, the Measurement Bridge 1.5 KΩ will be
measurement is,
(c) Measure the bridge output. The output should be ranging -8.0V to -15.0V

Confidential
Inputs
Processing
1. Verify the input of Measurement Bridge. The input should be ranging -10 V to +10 V.
2. Check the insulation between the signals E_KONTR_PLUS_PP and
E_KONTR_MINUS_PP
3. Verify the input of Measurement Bridge. The input should be ranging 10V to 50 V.
4. Check the continuity between the signals E_KONTR_PLUS_PP and
E_KONTR_MINUS_PP
5. Verify the input of Measurement Bridge. The input should be ranging 10V to 50 V.
6. Verify the exceed in potential for the signal. The steps for the verification are,
a) Set minimum threshold limit for the signal AMB
b) Switch ON the Check Points (+)(-) AMB
c) Verify the exceed in voltage of “AMB” signal and send the status to PC
d) Switch OFF the Check Points (+)(-) AMB
Outputs
3.1.2.6 CHECKING THE CORRECTNESS OF MEASUREMENT BRIDGE (306)

Description
This requirement will test whether the input to the Measurement Bridge is normal.
Inputs
NA
Processing
1. Verify input voltage of Measurement Bridge. The input voltage will be ranging 23.5V
to 24.5 V.
2. Verify the 24 V GPS input.
3. Verify the 27 V GPS.
4. Verify the 24 V SEP1 input.
5. Verify the 27 V SEP1.
Outputs

Confidential
3.1.2.7 CHECKING THE FUNCTIONALITY OF DANGEROUS POTENTIAL MONITOR

(307)
Description
This requirement will test the functionality of Dangerous Potential Monitor. It will set the
minimum threshold limit for the dangerous signals, give an input greater than the threshold
limit and verifying the issue of exceed in limit message for the respective signal.
Inputs
Additional information
Processing
1. Verify the exceed in limit for signal AMB by setting minimum limit for the signal and
connecting the check point AMB of shunt network.
2. Verify the exceed in limit for signal BU by setting minimum limit for the signal and
connecting the check point BU of shunt network
3. Verify the exceed in limit for signal PP by setting minimum limit for the signal and
connecting the check point PP of shunt network
4. Verify the exceed in limit for signal SEP1 by setting minimum limit for the signal and
connecting the check point SEP1 of shunt network
5. Verify the exceed in limit for signal GPS by setting minimum limit for the signal and
connecting the check point GPS of shunt network
Output
The status indicating whether there is exceed in limit for the signal will be displayed in PC.
3.1.2.8 CHECKING THE FUNCTIONALITY OF 40 KΩ MEASUREMENT BRIDGE (308)

Description
This requirement will verify the functionality of 40 KΩ Measurement Bridge circuit. The
measurement bridge circuit will be used to check the insulation between two check points.
Note:
1. For checking the insulation between the signals, the Measurement Bridge of 40 KΩ
will be used. The output of bridge will be measured in ADC. The sequence for
bridge measurement includes the following steps,
(a) Select Check Point 1 and 2.
(b) Connect the Check Point 1 and 2 to the Measurement Bridge.
(c) Measure the bridge output. The output should be ranging 8.0V to 15.0V.
(d) Disconnect the Check Point 1 and 2 from the Measurement Bridge.

Confidential
2. For checking the continuity between the signals, the Measurement Bridge of 40 KΩ
(b) Connect the Check Point 1 and 2 to the Measurement Bridge.
(c) Measure the bridge output. The output should be ranging -8.0V to -15.0V.
(d) Disconnect the Check Point 1 and 2 from the Measurement Bridge.
Inputs
NA
Processing
1. Setting the 40KΩ Measurement Bridge into initial position.
(a) Issue command “Disconnection of Shunt Network”.
(b) Set the Check Points to initial position.
2. Setting the 40 KΩ Measurement bridge in operating condition.
(a) Read the input given to bridge and check whether it is in range of 23.0V to 25.0
V. If it is not within the range, stop the test.
(b) Feed 24V voltage to the Bridge and connect the diagonals to the meter.
The insulation between the signals will be verified by connecting the signals to
Check Points (CP1 & CP2) of 40 KΩ bridge (refer points 3 to 108 in Table 3.26).
The continuity between the signals will be verified by connecting the signals to
Check Points (CP1 & CP2) of 40 KΩ bridge. (refer points 109 to 161 in Table 3.26).

Confidential
Table 3.26: CHECKING FUNCTIONALITY OF 40 KΩ MEASUREMENT BRIDGE
POINT CONNECTIVITY /
STEP DESCRIPTION SIGNALS
NO. DISCONNECTION
CHECKING INSULATION BETWEEN THE SIGNALS
3 Check the decoupling between KT_MINUS_AMB disconnection
CP (-)AMB and CP (+)AMB KT_PLUS_AMB
4 Check the decoupling between KT_MINUS_AMB disconnection
CP (-)AMB and CP (+)AMB KT_PLUS_AMB
5 Check the decoupling between KT_PLUS_BA_A disconnection
CP (+)SEP1(A) and CP (+)AMB KT_PLUS_AMB
6 Check the decoupling between KT_MINUS_BA_A disconnection
CP (-)SEP1(A) and CP (+)AMB KT_PLUS_AMB
7 Check the decoupling between KT_PLUS_PP1_1_PP2 disconnection
CP (+)PP1-1, PP2-1 and CP _1
(+)AMB KT_PLUS_AMB
8 Check the decoupling between KT_MINUS_PP1_1_PP disconnection
CP (-)PP1-1, PP2-1 and CP 2_1
(+)AMB KT_PLUS_AMB
CP (+)PP1-2, PP2-2 and CP _2
(+)AMB KT_PLUS_AMB
CP (-)PP1-2, PP2-2 and CP 2_2
(+)AMB KT_PLUS_AMB
CP (+)PP1-3, PP2-3 and CP _3
(+)AMB KT_PLUS_AMB
CP (-)PP1-3, PP2-3 and CP 2_3
(+)AMB KT_PLUS_AMB
CP (+)PP1-4, PP2-4 and CP _4
(+)AMB KT_PLUS_AMB
CP (-)PP1-4, PP2-4 and CP 2_4
(+)AMB KT_PLUS_AMB
15 Check the decoupling between KT_PLUS_WU disconnection
CP (+) BU and CP (+)AMB KT_PLUS_AMB

Confidential
NO. DISCONNECTION
16 Check the decoupling between KT_MINUS_WU disconnection
CP (-)BU and CP (+)AMB KT_PLUS_AMB
17 Check the decoupling between KORPUS_OK disconnection
Body OK and CP (+)AMB KT_PLUS_AMB
18 Check the decoupling between PLUS_PP_AMB_A disconnection
bus (+)PP AMB(А) and CP KT_PLUS_AMB
(+)AMB
19 Check the decoupling between MINUS_PP_AMB_A disconnection
bus (-)PP AMB(А) and CP (+)AMB KT_PLUS_AMB
20 Check the decoupling between PLUS_PP_AMB_B disconnection
bus (+)PP AMB(Б) and CP KT_PLUS_AMB
(+)AMB
21 Check the decoupling between MINUS_PP_AMB_B disconnection
bus (-)PP AMB(Б) and CP (+)AMB KT_PLUS_AMB
22 Check the decoupling between PLUS_PP_DBT_A disconnection
bus (+)PP DBT(A) and CP KT_PLUS_AMB
(+)AMB
23 Check the decoupling between MINUS_PP_DBT_A disconnection
bus (-)PP DBT(A) and CP (+)AMB KT_PLUS_AMB
24 Check the decoupling between PLUS_PP_DBT_B disconnection
bus (+)PP DBT(B) and CP KT_PLUS_AMB
(+)AMB
25 Check the decoupling between MINUS_PP_DBT_B disconnection
bus (-)PP DBT(B) and CP (+)AMB KT_PLUS_AMB
26 Check the decoupling between PLUS_PP_GGS_A disconnection
bus (+)PP GGS(A) and CP KT_PLUS_AMB
(+)AMB
27 Checking the decoupling MINUS_PP_GGS_A disconnection
between bus (-) PP GGS(A) and KT_PLUS_AMB
CP (+)AMB
28 Checking the decoupling PLUS_PP_GGS_B disconnection
between bus (+) PP GGS(B) and KT_PLUS_AMB
CP (+)AMB
29 Checking the decoupling MINUS_PP_GGS_B disconnection
between bus (-) PP GGS(B) and KT_PLUS_AMB
CP (+)AMB

Confidential
NO. DISCONNECTION
30 Checking the decoupling NI_27V_PLUS disconnection
between bus (+)27V GPS and KT_PLUS_AMB
CP (+)AMB
31 Checking the decoupling NI_27V_MINUS disconnection
between bus (-)27V GPS and KT_PLUS_AMB
CP (+)AMB
32 Checking the decoupling KT_BZP_APS disconnection
between CP BZP APS and CP KT_PLUS_AMB
(+)AMB
33 Checking the decoupling KT_BZP_TPS disconnection
between CP BZP TPS and CP KT_PLUS_AMB
(+)AMB
34 Checking the decoupling KT_PLUS_PP disconnection
between CP (+) PP and CP KT_PLUS_AMB
(+)AMB
35 Checking the decoupling between KT_MINUS_PP disconnection
CP (-) PP and CP (+)AMB KT_PLUS_AMB
36 Checking the decoupling KT_BZP2_NO_A1 disconnection
between CP BZP2 НО(А1) and KT_PLUS_AMB
CP (+)AMB
between CP BZP3 NO(А2) and KT_PLUS_AMB
CP (+)AMB
38 Checking the decoupling between KT_BZP5A_NO_A3 disconnection
CP BZP5A(NO)A3 and CP KT_PLUS_AMB
(+)AMB
39 Checking the decoupling KT_BZP2_F3_A1 disconnection
between CP BZP2 F3(А1) and CP KT_PLUS_AMB
(+)AMB
(+)AMB
(+)AMB

Confidential
NO. DISCONNECTION
(+)AMB
43 Checking the decoupling between KT_BBA disconnection
CP BBA and CP (+)AMB KT_PLUS_AMB
44 Checking the decoupling between KT_BZP5A_SRS_A1 disconnection
CP BZP5A SRS(А1) and CP KT_PLUS_AMB
(+)AMB
45 Checking the decoupling between KT_BZP3_SRS_A2 disconnection
CP BZP3 SRS(А2) and CP KT_PLUS_AMB
(+)AMB
CP BZP3 SRS(А3) and CP KT_PLUS_AMB
(+)AMB
47 Checking the decoupling KT_BZP7_WNO disconnection
between CP BZP7 ВНО and KT_PLUS_AMB
CP (+)AMB
48 Checking the decoupling KT_PLUS_AMD disconnection
between CP "+" AMD and CP KT_PLUS_AMB
(+)AMB
49 Checking the decoupling KT_MINUS_AMD disconnection
between CP (-)AMB and CP KT_PLUS_AMB
(+)AMB
50 Checking the decoupling PLUS_PP_DRK_A disconnection
between bus (+) PP DRK(A) and KT_PLUS_AMB
CP (+)AMB
51 Checking the decoupling PLUS_PP_DRK_B disconnection
between bus (+) PP DRK(B) and KT_PLUS_AMB
CP (+)AMB
52 Checking the decoupling MINUS_PP_DRK_A disconnection
between bus (-) PP DRK(A) and KT_PLUS_AMB
CP (+)AMB
53 Checking the decoupling MINUS_PP_DRK_B disconnection
between bus (-) PP DRK(B) and KT_PLUS_AMB
CP (+)AMB
54 Checking the decoupling KT_PLUS_BA_B disconnection
between CP (+)SEP1(B) and KT_PLUS_AMB

Confidential
NO. DISCONNECTION
CP (+)AMB
55 Checking the decoupling KT_MINUS_BA_B disconnection
between CP (-)SEP1(B) and KT_PLUS_AMB
CP (+)AMB
56 Checking the decoupling KT_PLUS_AMB disconnection
between CP (+) AMB and CP KT_MINUS_AMB
"-"AMB
57 Checking the decoupling KT_PLUS_AMB disconnection
between CP "+" AMB and CP KT_MINUS_AMB
"-"AMB
58 Checking the decoupling KT_PLUS_BA_A disconnection
between CP "+"SEP1(A) and KT_MINUS_AMB
CP "-"AMB
59 Checking the decoupling KT_MINUS_BA_A disconnection
between CP "-"SEP1(A) and KT_MINUS_AMB
CP "-"AMB
60 Checking the decoupling KT_PLUS_PP1_1_PP2 disconnection
between CP (+) PP1-1, PP2-1 _1
and CP "-"AMB KT_MINUS_AMB
61 Checking the decoupling KT_MINUS_PP1_1_PP disconnection
between CP "-" PP1-1, PP2-1 2_1
and CP "-" AMB KT_MINUS_AMB
between CP "+" PP1-2, PP2-2 _2
between CP "+" PP1-3, PP2-3 _3
between CP "+"ПП1-4, PP2-4 _4

Confidential
NO. DISCONNECTION
between CP "-"ПП1-4, PP2-4 2_4
and CP "-" AMB KT_MINUS_AMB
68 Checking the decoupling between KT_PLUS_WU disconnection
CP "+"BU and CP "-"AMB KT_MINUS_AMB
69 Checking the decoupling between KT_MINUS_WU disconnection
CP "-"BU and CP "-"AMB KT_MINUS_AMB
70 Checking the decoupling between KORPUS_OK disconnection
Body and CP "-"AMB KT_MINUS_AMB
71 Checking the decoupling between PLUS_PP_AMB_A disconnection
bus (+) PP AMB(А) and CP KT_MINUS_AMB
"-"AMB
72 Checking the decoupling between MINUS_PP_AMB_A disconnection
bus (-) PP AMB(А) and CP KT_MINUS_AMB
"-"AMB
73 Checking the decoupling between PLUS_PP_AMB_B disconnection
bus (+) PP AMB(Б) and CP KT_MINUS_AMB
"-"AMB
74 Checking the decoupling MINUS_PP_AMB_B disconnection
between bus (-) PP AMB(Б) and KT_MINUS_AMB
CP
"-"AMB
75 Checking the decoupling PLUS_PP_DBT_A disconnection
between bus (+) PP DBT(A) and KT_MINUS_AMB
CP "-"AMB
76 Checking the decoupling MINUS_PP_DBT_A disconnection
between bus (-) PP DBT(A) and KT_MINUS_AMB
CP "-" AMB
77 Checking the decoupling PLUS_PP_DBT_B disconnection
between bus (+) PP DBT(B) and KT_MINUS_AMB
CP
"-"AMB
78 Checking the decoupling MINUS_PP_DBT_B disconnection
between bus (-) PP DBT(B) and KT_MINUS_AMB
CP "-" AMB

Confidential
NO. DISCONNECTION
79 Checking the decoupling PLUS_PP_GGS_A disconnection
between bus (+) PP GGS(A) and KT_MINUS_AMB
CP "-"AMB
80 Checking the decoupling MINUS_PP_GGS_A disconnection
between bus (-) PP GGS(A) and KT_MINUS_AMB
CP "-"AMB
81 Checking the decoupling PLUS_PP_GGS_B disconnection
between bus (+) PP GGS(B) and KT_MINUS_AMB
CP "-"AMB
82 Checking the decoupling MINUS_PP_GGS_B disconnection
between bus (-) PP GGS(B) and KT_MINUS_AMB
CP "-"AMB
83 Checking the decoupling between NI_27V_PLUS disconnection
bus (+) 27V GPS and CP "-" AMB KT_MINUS_AMB
84 Checking the decoupling between NI_27V_MINUS disconnection
bus "-" 27V GPS and CP "-" AMB KT_MINUS_AMB
85 Checking the decoupling between KT_BZP_APS disconnection
CP BZP APS and CP "- KT_MINUS_AMB
"AMB
86 Checking the decoupling between KT_BZP_TPS disconnection
CP BZP TPS and CP "-"AMB KT_MINUS_AMB
87 Checking the decoupling between KT_PLUS_PP disconnection
CP (+) PP and CP "-"AMB KT_MINUS_AMB
88 Checking the decoupling between KT_MINUS_PP disconnection
CP (-) PP and CP "-"AMB KT_MINUS_AMB
between CP BZP2 НО(А1) and KT_MINUS_AMB
CP "-" AMB
between CP BZP3 NO(А2) and KT_MINUS_AMB
CP "-" AMB
91 Checking the decoupling between KT_BZP5A_NO_A3 disconnection
CP BZP5A(NO)A3 and CP "-" KT_MINUS_AMB
AMB
between CP BZP2 F3(А1) and CP KT_MINUS_AMB

Confidential
NO. DISCONNECTION
"-" AMB
"-" AMB
"-" AMB
"-" AMB
96 Checking the decoupling between KT_BBA disconnection
CP BBA and CP "-"AMB KT_MINUS_AMB
97 Checking the decoupling between KT_BZP5A_SRS_A1 disconnection
CP BZP5A SRS(А1) and CP "-" KT_MINUS_AMB
AMB
CP BZP3 SRS(А2) and CP "-" KT_MINUS_AMB
AMB
CP BZP3 SRS(А3) and CP "-" KT_MINUS_AMB
AMB
100 Checking the decoupling KT_BZP7_WNO disconnection
between CP BZP7 ВНО and CP KT_MINUS_AMB
"-"AMB
101 Checking decoupling between CP KT_PLUS_AMD disconnection
"+" AMD and CP "-" AMB KT_MINUS_AMB
102 Checking decoupling between CP KT_MINUS_AMD disconnection
"-" AMD and CP "-" AMB KT_MINUS_AMB
103 Checking decoupling between PLUS_PP_DRK_A disconnection
bus (+) PP DRK(A) and CP KT_MINUS_AMB
"-"AMB
104 Checking decoupling between PLUS_PP_DRK_B disconnection
bus (+) PP DRK(B) and CP KT_MINUS_AMB
"-"AMB
105 Checking the decoupling MINUS_PP_DRK_A disconnection
between bus (-) PP DRK(A) and KT_MINUS_AMB

Confidential
NO. DISCONNECTION
CP "-"AMB
106 Checking the decoupling MINUS_PP_DRK_B disconnection
between bus (-) PP DRK(B) and KT_MINUS_AMB
CP "-"AMB
107 Checking decoupling between CP KT_PLUS_BA_B disconnection
"+"SEP1(B) and CP "-"AMB KT_MINUS_AMB
108 Checking decoupling between CP KT_MINUS_BA_B disconnection
"-"SEP1(B) and CP "-"AMB KT_MINUS_AMB
CHECKING CONTINUITY BETWEEN THE SIGNALS
109 Check the message CP (+)AMB KT_PLUS_AMB connectivity
KT_PLUS_AMB
110 Check the message CP (-)AMB KT_MINUS_AMB connectivity
KT_MINUS_AMB
111 Check the message CP +SEP1(A) KT_PLUS_BA_A connectivity
KT_PLUS_BA_A
112 Check the message CP -SEP1(A) KT_MINUS_BA_A connectivity
KT_MINUS_BA_A
113 Check the message CP (+)PP1-1, KT_PLUS_PP1_1_PP2 connectivity
PP2-1 _1
KT_PLUS_PP1_1_PP2
_1
114 Check the message CP (-)PP1-1, KT_MINUS_PP1_1_PP connectivity
PP2-2 2_1
KT_MINUS_PP1_1_PP
2_1
PP2-2 _2
KT_PLUS_PP1_2_PP2
_2
PP2-2 2_2
KT_MINUS_PP1_2_PP
2_2
PP2-3 _3
KT_PLUS_PP1_3_PP2

Confidential
NO. DISCONNECTION
_3
PP2-3 2_3
KT_MINUS_PP1_3_PP
2_3
PP2-4 _4
KT_PLUS_PP1_4_PP2
_4
PP2-4 2_4
KT_MINUS_PP1_4_PP
2_4
121 Check the message CP (+) BU KT_PLUS_WU connectivity
KT_PLUS_WU
122 Check the message CP (-)BU KT_MINUS_WU connectivity
KT_MINUS_WU
123 Check the message Body OK KORPUS_OK connectivity
KORPUS_OK
124 Check the message bus (+)PP PLUS_PP_AMB_A connectivity
AMB(А) PLUS_PP_AMB_A
125 Check the message bus (-)PP MINUS_PP_AMB_A connectivity
AMB(А) MINUS_PP_AMB_A
126 Check the message bus (+)PP PLUS_PP_AMB_B connectivity
AMB(Б) PLUS_PP_AMB_B
127 Check the message bus (-)PP MINUS_PP_AMB_B connectivity
AMB(Б) MINUS_PP_AMB_B
128 Check the message bus (+)PP PLUS_PP_DBT_A connectivity
DBT(A) PLUS_PP_DBT_A
129 Check the message bus (-)PP MINUS_PP_DBT_A connectivity
DBT(A) MINUS_PP_DBT_A
130 Check the message bus (+)PP PLUS_PP_DBT_B connectivity
DBT(B) PLUS_PP_DBT_B
131 Check the message bus (-)PP MINUS_PP_DBT_B connectivity
DBT(B) MINUS_PP_DBT_B
132 Check the message bus (+)PP PLUS_PP_GGS_A connectivity

Confidential
NO. DISCONNECTION
GGS(A) PLUS_PP_GGS_A
133 Check the message bus (-)PP MINUS_PP_GGS_A connectivity
GGS(A) MINUS_PP_GGS_A
134 Check the message bus (+)PP PLUS_PP_GGS_B connectivity
GGS(B) PLUS_PP_GGS_B
135 Check the message bus (-)PP MINUS_PP_GGS_B connectivity
GGS(B) MINUS_PP_GGS_B
136 Check the message bus (+)27V NI_27V_PLUS connectivity
GPS NI_27V_PLUS
137 Check the message bus (-)27V NI_27V_MINUS connectivity
GPS NI_27V_MINUS
138 Check the message CP KT_BZP_APS connectivity
BZP(APS) KT_BZP_APS
139 Check the message CP KT_BZP_TPS connectivity
BZP(TPS) KT_BZP_TPS
140 Check the message CP (+)PP KT_PLUS_PP connectivity
KT_PLUS_PP
141 Check the message CP (-)PP KT_MINUS_PP connectivity
KT_MINUS_PP
142 Check the message CP KT_BZP2_NO_A1 connectivity
BZP2(NО)А1 KT_BZP2_NO_A1
143 Check the message CP KT_BZP3_NO_A2 connectivity
BZP2(НО)А2 KT_BZP3_NO_A2
144 Check the message CP KT_BZP5A_NO_A3 connectivity
BZP5A(NO)A3 KT_BZP5A_NO_A3
145 Check the message CP KT_BZP2_F3_A1 connectivity
BZP2(F3)A1 KT_BZP2_F3_A1
BZP2(F3)А3 KT_BZP2_F3_A3
149 Check the message CP BBA KT_BBA connectivity
KT_BBA
150 Check the message CP BZP5A KT_BZP5A_SRS_A1 connectivity

Confidential
NO. DISCONNECTION
SRS А1 KT_BZP5A_SRS_A1
151 Check the message CP BZP3 KT_BZP3_SRS_A2 connectivity
SRS A2 KT_BZP3_SRS_A2
152 Check the message CP BZP3 KT_BZP3_SRS_A3 connectivity
SRS(A3) KT_BZP3_SRS_A3
153 Check the message CP BZP7 KT_BZP7_WNO connectivity
ВНО KT_BZP7_WNO
154 Check the message CP +AMD KT_PLUS_AMD connectivity
KT_PLUS_AMD
155 Check the message CP -AMD KT_MINUS_AMD connectivity
KT_MINUS_AMD
156 Check the message bus (+)PP PLUS_PP_DRK_A connectivity
DRK(A) PLUS_PP_DRK_A
157 Check the message bus (+)PP PLUS_PP_DRK_B connectivity
DRK(B) PLUS_PP_DRK_B
158 Check the message bus (-)PP MINUS_PP_DRK_A connectivity
DRK(A) MINUS_PP_DRK_A
159 Check the message bus (-)PP MINUS_PP_DRK_B connectivity
DRK(B) MINUS_PP_DRK_B
160 Check the message CP +SEP1(B) KT_PLUS_BA_B connectivity
KT_PLUS_BA_B
161 Check the message CP -SEP1(B) KT_MINUS_BA_B connectivity
KT_MINUS_BA_B
3. Setting the 40 KΩ bridge to initial condition.

(a) Remove the voltage connection to the bridge and disconnect the diagonals from
meter.
(b) Connect the Shunt Network by removing the command “Disconnection of Shunt
Network”.
Outputs

Confidential
3.1.2.9 CHECKING THE FUNCTIONALITY OF 1.5 KΩ MEASUREMENT BRIDGE (309)

Description
This requirement will verify the functionality of 1.5 KΩ Measurement Bridge circuit, which is
used for checking the continuity between two check points.
Note
1. For checking the insulation between the signals, the Measurement Bridge 1.5 KΩ
(b) Connect the Check Point 1 and 2 to Measurement Bridge.
(c) Measure the bridge output. The output will be ranging 8.0V to 16.0V.
(d) Disconnect the Check Point 1 and 2 from Measurement Bridge.
2. For checking the continuity between the signals the Measurement Bridge 1.5 KΩ will
be used. The output of bridge will be measured in ADC. The sequence for bridge
measurement is given below,
(c) Measure the bridge output. The output shall be in range -8.0V to -16.0V.
Inputs
NA
Processing
1. Set the 1.5 KΩ Measurement Bridge into initial position.
(a) Issue command “Disconnection of Shunt Network”.
(b) Set the Check Points to initial position.
2. Set the 1.5 KΩ Measurement Bridge to operating condition.
(a) Read the input to bridge and check whether it is ranging 23.5V to
24.5 V. If it is not within the range, stop the test.
(b) Feed 24V voltage to the Bridge and connect the diagonals to the
meter.
3. Refer Table 3.26 to verify the insulation and continuity between the
signals using 1.5 KΩ bridge.
4. Set the bridge 1.5 KΩ to initial condition.

Confidential
(a) Remove voltage from bridge and the diagonals are disconnected
from meter.
(b) Disconnect the shunt network by removing the command
“Disconnection of Shunt Network”.
Outputs
3.1.2.10 CHECKING THE CONTROL CIRCUITS OF SEP1 (320)

Description
This requirement will verify the control circuits of SEP1. In this test, the control commands
will be issued and the status of respective signals will be verified in the “Self check with the
external loop back” mode (refer Table 3.27).
Inputs
• Article type – COE
• Self-check with loop-back mode
Processing
1. This test will be performed only in “Self-test with loop-back” mode.
2. “Unlocking of COE (SEP1)” command will be issued and “Mode Self-
Control” command will be removed.
3. The list of control command will be checked as follows,
(a) Issue a command from the list of control commands.
(b) The presence of the respective signal for the issued command will be
verified and the absence of all the other 56 signals will be verified to
ensure that the issue of one command will not affect the status of
other signals.
(c) Remove the issued command.
(d) The absence of the respective signal for the removed command will
be verified.

Confidential
Table 3.27: CHECKING CONTROL CIRCUITS OF SEP1
S.NO. CONTROL COMMANDS SIGNALS DESCRIPTION
1. E_OTM_ST_A E_MINUS_OTM_ST_A Cancel Start (А)
2. E_AMB_PODKL_WIH E_AMB_PODKL "АМB connected"
3. E_AMB_PROGR E_AMB_PROGR_WH "АМB warmed up"
4. E_ST_RAZR_A_WIH E_ST_RAZR_A "Start enabled (А)"
5. E_PRZN_TDR_WIH E_PRZN_TDR Attribute for
“Technological Article”
6. E_PRZN_IR_WIH E_PRZN_IR Attribute of “Missile
Simulator”
7. E_J_TPS_OTST_WIH E_JIDK_TPS_OTST Absence of liquid in
“TLC”
8. E_IMIT_T_5GRC E_IMIT_T_5GRAD_C Simulation of t=5 °С
9. E_ISH_2 E_ISHODHOE_2 Initial 2
10. E_SIGN_NORMA E_SIGN_NORMA_WH Signal “OK”
11. E_SIGN_STOP E_SIGN_STOP_WH Signal “Stop”
12. E_SIGN_NAZAD E_SIGN_NAZAD_WH Signal “Back”
13. E_SIGN_ZAKR E_SIGN_ZAKR_WH Signal “Close”
14. E_KS_SRS E_KS_SRS_WH Check locking of
“Booster”
15. E_KNTR_WENT E_KNTR_WENT_WH Check fans
16. E_KNTR_SD E_KNTR_SD_WH Check “Pressure Sensor
”
17. E_KNTR_SD_1 E_KNTR_SD_1_WH Check Pressure Sensor 1
18. E_ISH_BALL_TPS E_ISH_BALL_TPS_WH Initial bottle “TPS”
19. E_ST_RAZR_B_WIH E_ST_RAZR_B Start enabled (B)
20. E_ZAD_AMB_A E_PLUS_ZD_AMB_A Activation AMB (А)
21. E_ZAD_AMB_B E_PLUS_ZD_AMB_B Activation AMB (B)
22. E_ZAD_GGS_A E_PLUS_ZD_GGS_A + Activation GGS (А)
23. E_ZAD_GGS_B E_PLUS_ZD_GGS_B + Activation GGS (B)
24. E_ZAD_BALL_TPS_A E_ZD_BALL_TPS_A Activation bottle TPS (А)
25. E_ZAD_BALL_TPS_B E_ZD_BALL_TPS_B Activation bottle TPS (B)
26. E_ZAD_DMT_A E_PLUS_ZD_DMT_A + Activation DMT (А)
27. E_ZAD_DRK_A E_ZD_DRK_A Activation DRK (А)
28. E_ZAD_DRK_A E_ZD_DRK_B Activation DRK (A)
29. E_ZAD_DMT_B E_PLUS_ZD_DMT_B Activation DMT (B)
30. E_MINUS_ZAD_DMT_D E_MINUS_ZD_DMT_DBT Activation DMT, DBT,
BT_DRK_A _DRK_A DRK (А)
31. E_MINUS_ZAD_GGS_B E_MINUS_ZD_GGS_BAL - Activation GGS, bottle

Confidential

ALL_B L_B (B)
32. E_MINUS_ZAD_DMT_D E_MINUS_ZD_DMT_DBT Activation DMT, DBT,
BT_DRK_B _DRK_B DRK (B)
33. E_MINUS_ZAD_GGS_B E_MINUS_ZD_GGS_BAL - Activation GGS, bottle
ALL_A L_A (А)
34. E_ZAD_DRN_AMB_B E_ZD_DREN_AMB_B Activation drainage AMB
(B)
35. E_RZR_ST_A E_RAZR_ST_A Permission for Start (А)
36. E_PLKL_HI_BA E_PDKL_NI_BA Connect GPS to SEP1
bus
37. E_PLKL_AMB_BA_A E_PDKL_S_AMB_S_BA_ Connect AMB to buses
A SEP1 (А)
38. E_ZAD_DRN_AMB_A E_ZD_DREN_AMB_A Activation drainage AMB
(А)
39. E_OTM_ST_A_WIH E_PLUS_OTM_ST_A + Cancel Start (А)
40. Reserved Reserved Passing of command
disconnection of buses
“MD (Sustainer)”
41. Reserved Reserved Passing of command
disconnection of bus
PP1, PP2
42. E_IMIT_SND_WIH E_IMIT_SND_WH Simulation of command
43. E_IMIT_SWK E_IMIT_SWK_WH Simulation of “СВK”
44. E_IMIT_SWW E_IMIT_SWW_WH Simulation of “СВВ”
45. E_IMIT_ND_SRS E_IMIT_ND_SPS Simulation of “Booster”
and failure of fans.
46. E_COM_STOP E_COM_STOP_WH Command “Stop”
47. E_COM_NAZAD E_COM_NAZAD_WH Command “Back”
48. E_PDKL_AMB_BA E_PDKL_S_AMB_S_BA_ Conn. bus AMB to buses
B SEP1 (B)
49. E_COM_MD_OTKL E_COM_MD_OTKL_WH Command “Sustainer”
disconnect
50. E_RPT_OTKL E_COM_RPT_OTKL Command RPT
disconnect
51. E_IMIT_DRR E_COM_IMIT_DRR Command Simulation of
“Fin Sensor”
52. E_SWD_BLOK E_COM_SWD_BLOK Command SWD block

Confidential

53. E_RAZR_ST_B_WIH E_RAZR_ST_B Command enable Start
(B)
54. E_WKL_R E_WKL_S_R Switch ON bus Р
55. E_IMIT_SDA3_5 E_IMIT_SDA_3_5 Simulation of Pressure
Sensor А 3-5
56. E_WKL_KAN_B_WIH E_WKL_KAN_B Switch ON channel В
57. E_ISH_PWU_WIH E_ISH_PWU Initial “PTD”
58. E_IMIT_SD E_IMIT_SD_WH Simulation of “Pressure
Sensor“
59. E_IMIT_SD1 E_IMIT_SD_1_WH Simulation of “Pressure
Sensor 1”
4. The presence of following signals are verified,

(a) Presence of signal “Initial article”.
(b) Presence of signal “Checking connection of SEP1”.
(c) Presence of signal for attribute “Additional Inputs”.
(d) Remove the command “Unlocking COE SEP1”.
Outputs
3.1.2.11 CHECKING THE CORRECTNESS OF WARHEAD SIMULATOR (323)

Description
This requirement will verify the correctness of Warhead simulator module.
Inputs
NA
Processing
1. Issue the command “Locking of COE BS”.
2. In absence of signal “COE BS is locked” issue the command “Simulation
of overload”.
3. Check for the presence of signal “Correctness Warhead” and send status
to PC.
4. Remove the command “Locking of COE BS” and “Simulation of
overload”.
5. The test will be stopped in the absence of signal “COE BS is locked”
Outputs

Confidential
3.1.2.12 CHECKING THE INSULATION RESISTANCE AND SUPPLY CIRCUITS (1004)

Description
This check shall be performed in “Control” and “Self-check” modes after switching ON of
Signal Power(SP) bus. This test is to verify the insulation resistance and safety circuits.
Note:
1. For checking the insulation between the signals, the Measurement Bridge 40 KΩ will
measurement includes the following steps,
(c) If the INS code is 72, the bridge output will be read after time exposure of T3
AMD or after 3 seconds. The output should be in range 0.1V to 14.0V.
(a) Select the Check Point 1 and 2.
(c) Measure the bridge output. The output should be in range -0.1V to -14.0V.
Inputs
• Work type
• Control program number if mode is control
• Attribute – dangerous current control line(If checking with dangerous signals)
Processing
1. The initial operation for this test will be,
a) This test should not be performed if the “GPS bus” is switched ON.
b) This test should not be performed if the article is Type A.
c) Issue the command “Disconnect shunt network” (E_OTKL_SHUNT).
d) Set the Check Points to initial position (ISHOD_POL_1).
2. Set the Measurement Bridge (40 KΩ and 1.5 KΩ) in operating condition.
a) Read the input to bridge (E_UMIT) and check whether it is within the range
of 23.0 V to 25.0 V. If it is not within the range, stop the test.

Confidential
b) Feed 24V voltage to the Bridge and connect the diagonals to the meter.
3. If the work mode is “self-check with loop-back”, perform the following steps,
a) If signal “Mode Self Control” is present, the presence of following signals will
be verified.
i. Presence of “Attribute 1 BS”.
ii. Presence of “Attribute 2 BS”.
iii. Absence of “Attribute 2 BS (COE)(К)”.
iv. Presence of “Initial BS“.
v. Presence of “Simulator of BS”.
b) Issue the signal "Query of program 3".
c) Verify the presence/absence of signal “Stopping of checks” and send status
to PC.
d) The test will be stopped in the presence of signal “COE BS is blocked”.
e) Remove the signal "Query of program 3".
f) The test will be stopped in absence of signal “COE BS is blocked”.
g) The presence of following signals will be verified.
iii. Presence of “Attribute 2 BS (COE)(К)”.
h) Issue the signal "Query of program 1".
i) The test will be stopped in presence of signal “COE BS is blocked”.
j) Remove the signal "Query of program 1".
k) The test will be stopped in absence of signal “COE BS is blocked”
l) The presence/absence of following signals shall be verified
i. Presence of “Attribute 1 BS”
ii. Absence of “Attribute 2 BS”
iii. Absence of “Attribute 2 BS (COE)(К)”
iv. Presence of “Initial BS“
v. Absence of “Simulator of BS”
m) Issue the signal "Query of program 3".
n) Verify the status of signal “Permission of check” and send status to PC.
4. If the work mode is not “Self-check with loop-back”, perform the following Steps,
a) If the control program number is 1, then the presence of following signal is
verified.

Confidential
iii. Presence of “Attribute 2 BS (COE)(К)”.
b) Issue command "Query of program 1".
c) Verify the presence/absence of signal “Permission of check” and send status
to PC.
d) If the control program number is 3 then the presence/absence of following
signal is verified.
vi. Presence of “Attribute 1 BS”.
vii. Absence of “Attribute 2 BS”.
viii. Absence of “Attribute 2 BS (COE)(К)”.
ix. Presence of “Initial BS“.
x. Absence of “Simulator of BS”.
e) Issue the command "Query of program 3".
f) Verify the presence/absence of signal “Permission of check” and send status
to PC.
g) Read the signal “Initial of 2” and send the status to PC.
5. If work type is control, stop the test on following cases,
a) If attribute “Dangerous current line control” is selected and if the signal for
“Dangerous current line control” is absent.
b) If attribute “dangerous current line control” is not selected and if the signal for
“Dangerous current line control” is present.
6. If work type is control then analyze the following attributes,
a) The test will be stopped if the attribute “Rocket Production Plant(RPP)” is
selected and the signal for “RPP” is absent. If the signal for “RPP” is present
then perform the 3rd operation in Table 3.28.
b) The test will be stopped if the attribute “RPP” is not selected and the signal
for “RPP” is present.
c) If work type is control, send the status of signal “Liquid in TLC is absent” to
PC
7. The decoupling between the signals will be verified. Refer Table 3.28.
Table 3.28: DECOUPLING BETWEEN THE SIGNALS (1004)
CONNECTIVITY /
S.NO. STEP DESCRIPTION SIGNALS
DISCONNECTION
1 Decoupling of (+) SEP1 (А) KT_PLUS_BA_A disconnection
and (+) 27V GPS NI_27V_PLUS
2 Decoupling of (-) SEP1(А) and KT_MINUS_BA_A disconnection
(-) 27V GPS NI_27V_MINUS

Confidential
CONNECTIVITY /
S.NO. STEP DESCRIPTION SIGNALS
DISCONNECTION
3 Decoupling of (+) SEP1(А) and KT_PLUS_BA_A disconnection
Body KORPUS_OK
4 Decoupling of Body and (+) KORPUS_OK disconnection
SEP1(А) KT_PLUS_BA_A
5 Decoupling of Body and (-) KORPUS_OK disconnection
SEP1(А) KT_MINUS_BA_A
6 Decoupling Body and (+) 27V KORPUS_OK disconnection
GPS NI_27V_PLUS
7 Decoupling of Body and (-)27V KORPUS_OK disconnection
GPS NI_27V_MINUS
8 Decoupling of (+) 27V GPS NI_27V_PLUS disconnection
and Body KORPUS_OK
9 Decoupling of (-) 27V GPS and NI_27V_MINUS disconnection
Body KORPUS_OK
8. Set the 40 KΩ and 1.5 KΩ Bridge to initial condition

a) Remove voltage from bridge and disconnect the diagonal to output.
Outputs

Confidential
3.1.2.13 CHECKING THE PYRO SOURCES ON COMMANDS OF СK341-43 (1030)

Description
This requirement will check the functionality of block БЗП2 on commands given to SEP1
from SEP2.
Note:
1. For checking the insulation between the signals the Measurement Bridge 1.5 KΩ will
(c) Measure the bridge output. The output shall be in range 0.1V to 14.0V.
Inputs
• Work type
Processing
1. The initial operation for this test will be,
(a) This test should not be performed if the article is Type A.
(b) This test should not be performed if attribute “X2 is connected” is not
selected and input signal for “X2 is connected” (C_X2_SOSTIK) is
not present.
(c) Reset the limits of dangerous signals (Remove the dangerous signals
from monitoring list).
2. Set the Measurement Bridge (40 KΩ and 1.5 KΩ) into operating
condition.

Confidential
(a) Read the input to bridge and check whether it is in range of 23.0 to
meter.
3. Set the Measurement Bridge (40 KΩ and 1.5 KΩ) into initial position.
(a) Set the check point to initial position (ISHOD_POL_1).
(b) Issue and remove the signals connection of CP1 (E_KT1_MIS_40)
and CP2 (E_KT2_MIS_40) on bridge 1.5 KΩ and Initial of PTD
(E_ISH_PWU_WIH).
(c) Issue and remove of command “Cancellation of start A”
(E_OTM_ST_A_WIH and E_OTM_ST_A).
4. The decoupling between the signals will be verified. Refer Table 3.29.
Table 3.29: DECOUPLING BETWEEN THE SIGNALS (1030)
S DESCRIPTION SIGNALS CONNECTIVITY /

NO. DISCONNECTION
1 Decoupling of CP (+), (-) PP1 KT_PLUS_PP1_1_PP2_1 disconnection
into initial condition KT_MINUS_PP1_1_PP2_1


5. The presence of connection/disconnection between Check Points will be

monitored for the PTD commands in the following sequence,
(a) Issue command PTD to SEP2 to initiate an exchange with CK314-
43(MIU) through 1553B message.
(b) The result of an exchange will be read from SEP2.
(c) The connection between Check Points will be monitored after issuing
the command.
(d) The decoupling between Check Points will be monitored after the
removal of command.

Confidential
Table 3.30: DECOUPLING OF CHECKPOINTS AFTER REMOVAL OF COMMAND
STEP COMMAND PTD CHECK POINT 1 CHECK POINT 2 CONNECTIVITY /

NO. ISSUED REMOVED DISCONNECTION
1 V2P - KT_PLUS_PP1_1_PP2_1 KT_MINUS_PP1_1_PP2_1 Connectivity
KT_PLUS_PP1_2_PP2_2 KT_MINUS_PP1_2_PP2_2 Connectivity
2 - V2P KT_PLUS_PP1_1_PP2_1 KT_MINUS_PP1_1_PP2_1 Disconnection
KT_PLUS_PP1_2_PP2_2 KT_MINUS_PP1_2_PP2_2 Disconnection
3 GAMMA - KT_PLUS_PP1_1_PP2_1 KT_MINUS_PP1_1_PP2_1 Connectivity
1P,
GAMMA
2P KT_PLUS_PP1_3_PP2_3 KT_MINUS_PP1_3_PP2_3 Connectivity
4 - GAMMA KT_PLUS_PP1_1_PP2_1 KT_MINUS_PP1_1_PP2_1 Disconnection
1P,
GAMMA
2P KT_PLUS_PP1_3_PP2_3 KT_MINUS_PP1_3_PP2_3 Disconnection
3P,
GAMMA
4P KT_PLUS_PP1_3_PP2_3 KT_MINUS_PP1_3_PP2_3 Connectivity
3P,
GAMMA
7 V1P - KT_PLUS_PP1_1_PP2_1 KT_MINUS_PP1_1_PP2_1 Connectivity
8 - V1P KT_PLUS_PP1_1_PP2_1 KT_MINUS_PP1_1_PP2_1 Disconnection
5СТ,GA
MMA
6СТ KT_PLUS_PP1_3_PP2_3 KT_MINUS_PP1_3_PP2_3 Connectivity
5СТ,GAM
MA
6СТ KT_PLUS_PP1_3_PP2_3 KT_MINUS_PP1_3_PP2_3 Disconnection
7CT,
GAMMA

Confidential

NO. ISSUED REMOVED DISCONNECTION
8CT KT_PLUS_PP1_4_PP2_4 KT_MINUS_PP1_4_PP2_4 Connectivity
7CT,
GAMMA
8CT KT_PLUS_PP1_3_PP2_3 KT_MINUS_PP1_3_PP2_3 Disconnection
6. Issue and remove the command “Cancel of Start A” (E_OTM_ST_A_WIH

and E_OTM_ST_A).
7. Set the limits for the dangerous signals (Add the dangerous signals to
the monitoring list).
Outputs

Description
This requirement will check ПЭ ЭО command by the continuity method in operating
modes 1 and 2 of Programmable Timing Device (PTD).
Note:

Confidential
Inputs
• Work type
• Attribute – dangerous current control line (If checking with dangerous signals)
Processing
1. This test should not be performed if the article is Type A.
2. This test should not be performed if attribute “Simulation of Fin sensor” is
present.
3. This test should not be performed if attribute “X2 is docked” is not
selected and input signal C_X2_SOSTIK is not present.
4. Analysis for the presence of attribute “Dangerous current line control”.
(a) Stop the test if attribute “Dangerous current line control” is selected
and if the signal for “Dangerous current line control” is absent
(b) If attribute “Dangerous current line control” is not selected and if the
signal for “Dangerous current line control” is present.
5. Analysis for the presence of attribute “Additional inputs”
(a) The test shall be stopped on following conditions,
Table 3.31: CONDITIONS FOR THE HALT OFTEST
ATTRIBUTE “DANGEROUS SIGNAL FOR ATTRIBUTE
ATTRIBUTE “RPP”
CURRENT LINE CONTROL” “RPP”
1 1 0
1 0 1
0 1 0
0 1 1
0 0 1
6. Set the Measurement Bridge (40 KΩ and 1.5 KΩ) into operating
condition.
(a) Reset the limits of dangerous signals (Remove the dangerous signals
from monitoring list).
(b) Read the input to bridge and check whether it is in range of 23.5 V to
(c) Feed 24V voltage to the Bridge and connect the diagonals to the
meter.
7. Set the Measurement Bridge (40 KΩ and 1.5 KΩ) into initial position
(a) Set the check points to initial position (ISHOD_POL_1).
(b) Issue and remove the signals connection of CP1 and CP2 on Bridge
1.5 KΩ .
Confidential
(c) Issue and remove command “Initial of PTD”.
(d) Issue and remove the command “Cancellation of start A”.
8. Checking the presence of signal "Absence of liquid in TLC”
(a) In presence absence of attribute “RPP”, the presence of signal
“Liquid in TLC is absent” is verified.
(b) In presence / absence of attribute “RPP”, the absence of signal
"Liquid in TLC is absent” is verified.
9. Issue the command “BACK” (E_COM_NAZAD).
10. The commands of PTD (for Steps 10 – 27, 31, 33, 34 in Table 3.32) will
be verified using following sequence.
(a) Issue and removal of the signal “Switch ON channel B”
(E_WKL_KAN_B_WIH). Which initiates sending of PTD of the next
matrix command in duration of 1.1 s.
(b) The connectivity between Check Points will be monitored after
issuing command PTD.
(c) The decoupling between Check Points will be monitored after
removal of command PTD automatically after 1.1 seconds. Refer
Table 3.32.

Confidential
Table 3.32: DECOUPLING OF CHECKPOINTS AFTER REMOVAL OF PTD COMMAND

NO. DISCONNECTION
ISSUE REMOVE
(1.1 SEC)
10 5А4 - KT_PLUS_PP1_1_PP2_ KT_MINUS_PP1_1_PP2_1 Connectivity
1
KT_PLUS_PP1_2_PP2_ KT_MINUS_PP1_2_PP2_2 Connectivity
2
3
4
- 5А4 KT_PLUS_PP1_1_PP2_ KT_MINUS_PP1_1_PP2_1 Disconnection
1
KT_PLUS_PP1_2_PP2_ KT_MINUS_PP1_2_PP2_2 Disconnection
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4

Confidential

NO. DISCONNECTION
ISSUE REMOVE
(1.1 SEC)
1
2
3
4
13 1АA - KT_PLUS_PP1_1_PP2_ KT_MINUS_PP1_1_PP2_1 Connectivity
1
2
3
4
- 1АA KT_PLUS_PP1_1_PP2_ KT_MINUS_PP1_1_PP2_1 Disconnection
1
2
3
4
1АB - KT_PLUS_PP1_1_PP2_ KT_MINUS_PP1_1_PP2_1 Connectivity
14 1
2
3
4
- 1АB KT_PLUS_PP1_1_PP2_ KT_MINUS_PP1_1_PP2_1 Disconnection
1
2
3
4
15 1АC - KT_PLUS_PP1_1_PP2_ KT_MINUS_PP1_1_PP2_1 Connectivity
1

Confidential

NO. DISCONNECTION
ISSUE REMOVE
(1.1 SEC)
2
3
4
- 1АC KT_PLUS_PP1_1_PP2_ KT_MINUS_PP1_1_PP2_1 Disconnection
1
2
3
4
16 1АD - KT_PLUS_PP1_1_PP2_ KT_MINUS_PP1_1_PP2_1 Connectivity
1
2
3
4
- 1АD KT_PLUS_PP1_1_PP2_ KT_MINUS_PP1_1_PP2_1 Disconnection
1
2
3
4
17 1АE - KT_PLUS_PP1_1_PP2_ KT_MINUS_PP1_1_PP2_1 Connectivity
1
2
3
4
- 1АE KT_PLUS_PP1_1_PP2_ KT_MINUS_PP1_1_PP2_1 Disconnection
1
2

Confidential

NO. DISCONNECTION
ISSUE REMOVE
(1.1 SEC)
3
4
18 1АF - KT_PLUS_PP1_1_PP2_ KT_MINUS_PP1_1_PP2_1 Connectivity
1
2
3
4
- 1АF KT_PLUS_PP1_1_PP2_ KT_MINUS_PP1_1_PP2_1 Disconnection
1
2
3
4
19 2АB - KT_PLUS_PP1_1_PP2_ KT_MINUS_PP1_1_PP2_1 Connectivity
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3

Confidential

NO. DISCONNECTION
ISSUE REMOVE
(1.1 SEC)
4
1
2
3
4
21 2АD - KT_PLUS_PP1_1_PP2_ KT_MINUS_PP1_1_PP2_1 Connectivity
1
2
3
4
- 2АD KT_PLUS_PP1_1_PP2_ KT_MINUS_PP1_1_PP2_1 Disconnection
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4

Confidential

NO. DISCONNECTION
ISSUE REMOVE
(1.1 SEC)
23 2AF - KT_PLUS_PP1_1_PP2_ KT_MINUS_PP1_1_PP2_1 Connectivity
1
2
3
4
- 2AF KT_PLUS_PP1_1_PP2_ KT_MINUS_PP1_1_PP2_1 Disconnection
1
2
3
4
24 3АA - KT_PLUS_PP1_1_PP2_ KT_MINUS_PP1_1_PP2_1 Connectivity
1
2
3
4
- 3АA KT_PLUS_PP1_1_PP2_ KT_MINUS_PP1_1_PP2_1 Disconnection
1
2
3
4
25 3AB - KT_PLUS_PP1_1_PP2_ KT_MINUS_PP1_1_PP2_1 Connectivity
1
2
3
4
- 3AB KT_PLUS_PP1_1_PP2_ KT_MINUS_PP1_1_PP2_1 Disconnection
1

Confidential

NO. DISCONNECTION
ISSUE REMOVE
(1.1 SEC)
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
31 4АB - KT_PLUS_PP1_1_PP2_ KT_MINUS_PP1_1_PP2_1 Connectivity
1
2

Confidential

NO. DISCONNECTION
ISSUE REMOVE
(1.1 SEC)
3
4
1
2
3
4
33 КПЗ-2 - KT_PLUS_PP1_1_PP2_ KT_MINUS_PP1_1_PP2_1 Connectivity
1
2
3
4
- КПЗ-2 KT_PLUS_PP1_1_PP2_ KT_MINUS_PP1_1_PP2_1 Disconnection
1
2
3
4
34 КПЗ-3 - KT_PLUS_PP1_1_PP2_ KT_MINUS_PP1_1_PP2_1 Connectivity
1
2
3
4
- КПЗ-3 KT_PLUS_PP1_1_PP2_ KT_MINUS_PP1_1_PP2_1 Disconnection
1
2
3

Confidential

NO. DISCONNECTION
ISSUE REMOVE
(1.1 SEC)
4
11. Issue the following commands,

(a) Issue command "Simulation of СВK" (E_IMIT_SWK).
(b) Issue command " Switch ON bus Р" (E_WKL_R).
12. PTD 4AA will issue the following commands,

(a) Issue and removal of the signal “Switch ON channel B”. Which.
initiates sending of PTD of the next matrix command in duration 1.1
sec.
(b) If attribute “Dangerous current line control” is absent, the decoupling
of check points will be monitored. Refer Table 3.33.
Table 3.33: DECOUPLING OF CHECKPOINTS AFTER REMOVAL OF PTD 4AA

COMMAND
NO. DISCONNECTION
ISSUE REMOVE (1.1 SEC)
29 4AА - KT_PLUS_PP1_ KT_MINUS_PP1 Disconnection
1_PP2_1 _1_PP2_1
KT_PLUS_PP1_ KT_MINUS_PP1 Disconnection
2_PP2_2 _2_PP2_2
3_PP2_3 _3_PP2_3
4_PP2_4 _4_PP2_4
(c) If attribute “Dangerous current line control” is present and attribute for
“Presence of booster” is present then the decoupling of check points
will be monitored.
STEP COMMAND PTD KT CONNECTIVITY /
NO. DISCONNECTION
29 4AА - KT_PLUS_PP1_1_P KT_MINUS_PP1_1 Disconnection
P2_1 _PP2_1
KT_PLUS_PP1_2_P KT_MINUS_PP1_2 Disconnection
P2_2 _PP2_2

Confidential
P2_3 _PP2_3
P2_4 _PP2_4
(d) If attribute “Dangerous current line control” is present and attribute for
“presence of booster” is absent,the connectivity between check
points PP1-2 and decoupling of check points PP3-4 will be done.

Confidential

NO. DISCONNECTION
ISSUE REMOVE
(1.1 SEC)
29 4AА - KT_PLUS_PP1_1_PP2_1 KT_MINUS_PP1_1_PP2_1 Connectivity
(e) Decoupling of check points will be monitored after removal of

command.
NO. DISCONNECTION
ISSUE REMOVE
(1.1 SEC)
29 - 4AА KT_PLUS_PP1_1_PP2_1 KT_MINUS_PP1_1_PP2_1 Disconnection
13. Remove the following commands.

(a) Remove command "Simulation of СВK".
(b) Remove command "Switch ON bus Р".
14. PTD 4AA will issue the following commands - Similar to Step 12
(a) If attribute for “presence of booster” is present, checking the
decoupling of check points will be monitored (Refer c of Step 12).
(b) If attribute for “presence of booster” is absent, checking the
connectivity between check points PP1-2 and decoupling of check
points PP2-4 will be done. (Refer d of Step 12)
(c) The decoupling of check points will be monitored after removal of
command (Refer e of Step 12).
15. Remove the following commands.
(a) The command "Back" will be issued.
(b) The command “SWD block” will be removed.
16. Command“Switching on of DMT" will be issued.
(a) If signal E_JIDK_TPS_OTST(Liquid in TLC is absent) is present,
checking the decoupling of check points will be monitored

Confidential
(b) If signal E_JIDK_TPS_OTST(Liquid in TLC is absent) is absent,
checking the connectivity between check points PP1&3 and
decoupling of check points PP2&4 will be done.
command (Refer e of Step 12)
17. Refer Step 11.
18. PTD “DBT” will issue the following command,
(a) If attribute “Dangerous current line control” is present and attribute for
“presence of booster” is absent, checking the connectivity between
check points PP1-2 and decoupling of check points PP3-4 will be
done.
NO. DISCONNECTION
38 DBT - KT_PLUS_PP1 KT_MINUS_PP1_ Connectivity
_1_PP2_1 1_PP2_1
KT_PLUS_PP1 KT_MINUS_PP1_ Connectivity
_2_PP2_2 2_PP2_2
KT_PLUS_PP1 KT_MINUS_PP1_ Disconnection
_3_PP2_3 3_PP2_3
KT_PLUS_PP1 KT_MINUS_PP1_ Disconnection
_4_PP2_4 4_PP2_4
(b) Verification of decoupling of check points PP1-4 will be done in

following cases,
i. If attribute “Dangerous current line control” is present and
attribute for “presence of booster” is present.
ii. If attribute “Dangerous current line control” is absent and in
presence or absence of attribute for “presence of booster”.
NO. DISCONNECTION
ISSUE REMOVE
(1.1 SEC)
38 DBT - KT_PLUS_PP1_1_PP2_1 KT_MINUS_PP1_1_PP2_1 Disconnection

command.

Confidential

NO. DISCONNECTION
ISSUE REMOVE
(1.1 SEC)
38 - DBT KT_PLUS_PP1_1_PP2_1 KT_MINUS_PP1_1_PP2_1 Disconnection
19. Removal of following commands will be carried out.

(a) Remove command "Simulation of СВК".
(b) Remove command "Switch ON bus Р" .
(c) Remove command "SWD block".
20. SEP1 and PTD will be set to initial position.
(a) Set the check point to initial position.
1.5KΩ.
(d) Issue and remove of command “Cancel of start A”.
(e) Remove voltage from bridge and disconnect the diagonal to output.
(f) Set the limits for the dangerous signals (Add the dangerous signals
to the monitoring list).
Outputs
3.1.2.15 CHECKING THE PYRO SOURCES ON COMMANDS OF COE СК351.1 (1034)

Description
This requirement will check the of functionality of checked blocks BZP by checking the
connection in appropriate circuit after sending the command and disconnection in the same
circuit after removal of command.

Confidential
Note:
Inputs
• Work type
• Attribute RPP
Processing
1. This test should not be performed for Type A article.
2. This test should not be performed if attribute “Simulation of Fin sensor” is
present.
3. Analysis of presence of “dangerous current control line” will be done. The
test will stop if the below conditions are true.
(a) If attribute “dangerous current line control” is selected and the signal for
“dangerous current line control” is absent.
(b) If attribute “dangerous current line control” is not selected and the signal
for “dangerous current line control” is present.
4. Analysis for the presence of attribute “RPP” will be done.

Confidential
ATTRIBUTE “DANGEROUS ATTRIBUTE “RPP” INPUT SIGNAL FOR “RPP”

CURRENT LINE CONTROL (E_PRZN_RSZ_WH )
1 1 0
1 0 1
0 1 0
0 1 1
0 0 1
5. If the attribute “Technological article” is present and X2 is not docked, then

stop the test
6. Reset the limits of dangerous signals (Remove the dangerous signals from
monitoring list)
7. Set the bridge to operating condition
(a) Read the input to bridge and check whether is in range 23.5 V to 24.5 V.
If it is not in range then stop the test
(b) Bridge is fed with voltage 24V and connected the diagonals to meter
8. Setting into initial position SEP1 and PTD
(a) Set the check point to initial position
(b) Issue and remove the signals connection of CP1 and CP2 on bridge 1.5
KΩ
(c) Issue and remove of command “Initial of PTD”
(d) Issue and remove of command “Cancel of start A”
9. Checking the presence of signal "Absence of liquid in TLC".
INPUT SIGNAL "LIQUID IN TLC IS
ATTRIBUTE “RPP” NEXT STEP
ABSENT" (E_JIDK_TPS_OTST )
1 1 10
1 0 15
0 1 10
0 0 15
10. Send command "Activation of DRK(A)(B)". Check the disconnection of check

points after sending commands and after removal of command.

Confidential
CONNECTIVITY /
S.NO COMMAND STATUS CHECK POINTS
DISCONNECTION
1 E_ZAD_DRK_A TRUE Disconnection PLUS_PP_DRK_A and
MINUS_PP_DRK_A
E_MINUS_ZAD_DM TRUE PLUS_PP_DRK_B and
T_DBT_DRK_A MINUS_PP_DRK_B
2 E_ZAD_DRK_A FALSE Disconnection PLUS_PP_DRK_A and
MINUS_PP_DRK_A
E_MINUS_ZAD_DM FALSE PLUS_PP_DRK_B and
T_DRK_DRK_A MINUS_PP_DRK_B
3 E_ZAD_DRK_B TRUE Disconnection PLUS_PP_DRK_A and
MINUS_PP_DRK_A
E_MINUS_ZAD_DM TRUE PLUS_PP_DRK_B and
T_DBT_DRK_B MINUS_PP_DRK_B
4 E_ZAD_DRK_B FALSE Disconnection PLUS_PP_DRK_A and
MINUS_PP_DRK_A
E_MINUS_ZAD_DM FALSE PLUS_PP_DRK_B and
T_DBT_DRK_B MINUS_PP_DRK_B
11. Send command "Activation of DRK(A)(B)" and check dis connectivity after
sending commands and disconnection after removal of command.
S.NO COMMAND STATU CONNECTIVITY / CHECK POINTS
S DISCONNECTION
1 E_ZAD_DBT_A TRUE Disconnection PLUS_PP_DBT_A and
MINUS_PP_DBT_A
E_MINUS_ZAD_D TRUE PLUS_PP_DBT_B and
MT_DBT_DRK_A MINUS_PP_DBT_B
PLUS_PP_DRK_A and
MINUS_PP_DRK_A
PLUS_PP_DRK_B and
MINUS_PP_DRK_B
2 E_ZAD_DBT_A FALSE Disconnection PLUS_PP_DBT_A and
MINUS_PP_DBT_A
E_MINUS_ZAD_D FALSE PLUS_PP_DBT_B and
PLUS_PP_DRK_A and
MINUS_PP_DRK_A
PLUS_PP_DRK_B and
MINUS_PP_DRK_B

Confidential
S.NO COMMAND STATU CONNECTIVITY / CHECK POINTS

S DISCONNECTION
3 E_ZAD_DBT_B TRUE Disconnection PLUS_PP_DBT_A and
MINUS_PP_DBT_A
PLUS_PP_DBT_B and
MINUS_PP_DBT_B
E_MINUS_ZAD_D TRUE PLUS_PP_DRK_A and
MT_DBT_DRK_B MINUS_PP_DRK_A
PLUS_PP_DRK_B and
MINUS_PP_DRK_B
4 E_ZAD_DBT_B FALSE Disconnection PLUS_PP_DBT_A and
MINUS_PP_DBT_A
PLUS_PP_DBT_B and
MINUS_PP_DBT_B
E_MINUS_ZAD_D FALSE PLUS_PP_DRK_A and
PLUS_PP_DRK_B and
MINUS_PP_DRK_B
12. Send command "Activation of DMT(А)(B)" and check disconnection of check

S.NO COMMAND STATUS CONNECTIVITY / CHECK POINTS
DISCONNECTION
1 E_ZAD_DMT_A TRUE Disconnection PLUS_PP_DBT_A and
MINUS_PP_DBT_A
2 E_ZAD_DMT_A FALSE Disconnection PLUS_PP_DBT_A and
MINUS_PP_DBT_A
3 E_ZAD_DMT_B TRUE Disconnection PLUS_PP_DBT_A,MINUS_
PP_DBT_A
E_MINUS_ZAD_D TRUE PLUS_PP_DBT_B,MINUS_
MT_DBT_DRK_B PP_DBT_B
4 E_ZAD_DMT_B FALSE Disconnection PLUS_PP_DBT_A,MINUS_
PP_DBT_A
E_MINUS_ZAD_D FALSE PLUS_PP_DBT_B,MINUS_
MT_DBT_DRK_B PP_DBT_B

Confidential
(a) If the attribute “dangerous current line control” is present, go to Step 19.
In absence of “dangerous current line control” attribute, go to Step 13.
13. Send command "Activation of GGS(A)(B)" and check disconnection of check

DISCONNECTION
1 E_ZAD_GGS_A TRUE Disconnection PLUS_PP_GGS_A and
MINUS_PP_GGS_A
E_MINUS_ZAD TRUE PLUS_PP_GGS_B and
_GGS_BALL_A MINUS_PP_GGS_B
2 E_ZAD_GGS_A FALSE Disconnection PLUS_PP_GGS_A and
MINUS_PP_GGS_A
E_MINUS_ZAD FALSE PLUS_PP_GGS_B and
3 E_ZAD_GGS_B TRUE Disconnection PLUS_PP_GGS_A,MINUS_PP_
GGS_A
E_MINUS_ZAD TRUE PLUS_PP_GGS_B,MINUS_PP_
_GGS_BALL_B GGS_B
4 E_ZAD_GGS_B FALSE Disconnection PLUS_PP_GGS_A,MINUS_PP_
GGS_A
E_MINUS_ZAD FALSE PLUS_PP_GGS_B,MINUS_PP_
_GGS_BALL_B GGS_B
14. Send command "Activation of bottle TPS(А)(B)".

(a) Check disconnection of check points after sending commands and after
removal of command.
(b) Perform Step 21.

DISCONNECTION
1 E_ZAD_BALL_TPS TRUE Disconnection PLUS_PP_GGS_A and
_A MINUS_PP_GGS_A

Confidential
E_MINUS_ZAD_GG TRUE PLUS_PP_GGS_B and

S_BALL_A MINUS_PP_GGS_B
2 E_ZAD_BALL_TPS FALSE Disconnection PLUS_PP_GGS_A and
_A MINUS_PP_GGS_A
E_MINUS_ZAD_GG FALSE PLUS_PP_GGS_B and
3 E_ZAD_BALL_TPS TRUE Disconnection PLUS_PP_GGS_A and
_B MINUS_PP_GGS_A
S_BALL_B MINUS_PP_GGS_B
4 E_ZAD_BALL_TPS FALSE Disconnection PLUS_PP_GGS_A and
_B MINUS_PP_GGS_A
15. Send command "Activation of DRK(A)(B)" and check the connectivity of

check points after sending commands and disconnection after removal of
command.
DISCONNECTION
1 E_ZAD_DRK_A TRUE Connectivity PLUS_PP_DRK_A and
MINUS_PP_DRK_A
E_MINUS_ZAD_DMT_ TRUE PLUS_PP_DRK_B and
DBT_DRK_A MINUS_PP_DRK_B
2 E_ZAD_DRK_A FALSE Disconnection PLUS_PP_DRK_A and
MINUS_PP_DRK_A
E_MINUS_ZAD_DMT_ FALSE PLUS_PP_DRK_B and
3 E_ZAD_DRK_B TRUE Connectivity PLUS_PP_DRK_A and
MINUS_PP_DRK_A
E_MINUS_ZAD_DMT_ TRUE PLUS_PP_DRK_B and
DBT_DRK_B MINUS_PP_DRK_B
4 E_ZAD_DRK_B FALSE Disconnection PLUS_PP_DRK_A and
MINUS_PP_DRK_A
E_MINUS_ZAD_DMT_ FALSE PLUS_PP_DRK_B and
(a) If the attribute “Simulation of Booster ” is not present, go to Step 17. If

“Simulation of Booster ” is present, go to Step 16.
Confidential
16. Send command "Activation of DRK(A)(B)" and check for disconnection after
sending the command and disconnection after removal of command.
S.NO COMMAND STATUS CONNECTIVITY / SIGNALS
DISCONNECTION
1 E_ZAD_DBT_A TRUE Disconnection PLUS_PP_DBT_A and
MINUS_PP_DBT_A
PLUS_PP_DRK_A and
MINUS_PP_DRK_A
PLUS_PP_DRK_B and
MINUS_PP_DRK_B
MINUS_PP_DBT_A
PLUS_PP_DRK_A and
MINUS_PP_DRK_A
PLUS_PP_DRK_B and
MINUS_PP_DRK_B
3 E_ZAD_DBT_B TRUE Disconnection PLUS_PP_DBT_A and
MINUS_PP_DBT_A
PLUS_PP_DBT_B and
MINUS_PP_DBT_B
E_MINUS_ZAD_D TRUE PLUS_PP_DRK_A and
PLUS_PP_DRK_B and
MINUS_PP_DRK_B
MINUS_PP_DBT_A
PLUS_PP_DBT_B and
MINUS_PP_DBT_B
E_MINUS_ZAD_D FALSE PLUS_PP_DRK_A and
PLUS_PP_DRK_B and
MINUS_PP_DRK_B

Confidential
17. Send command "Activation of DRK(A)(B)" and check for connectivity of
check points after sending commands and disconnection of check points
after removal of command.
CONNECTIVITY /
S.NO COMMAND STATUS CHECK POINTS
DISCONNECTION
1 E_ZAD_DBT_A TRUE Connectivity PLUS_PP_DBT_A and
MINUS_PP_DBT_A
E_MINUS_ZAD_DM TRUE PLUS_PP_DBT_B and
T_DBT_DRK_A MINUS_PP_DBT_B
PLUS_PP_DRK_A and
MINUS_PP_DRK_A
PLUS_PP_DRK_B and
MINUS_PP_DRK_B
MINUS_PP_DBT_A
E_MINUS_ZAD_DM FALSE PLUS_PP_DBT_B and
PLUS_PP_DRK_A and
MINUS_PP_DRK_A
PLUS_PP_DRK_B and
MINUS_PP_DRK_B
3 E_ZAD_DBT_B TRUE Connectivity PLUS_PP_DBT_A and
MINUS_PP_DBT_A
PLUS_PP_DBT_B and
MINUS_PP_DBT_B
E_MINUS_ZAD_DM TRUE PLUS_PP_DRK_A and
T_DBT_DRK_B MINUS_PP_DRK_A
PLUS_PP_DRK_B and
MINUS_PP_DRK_B
MINUS_PP_DBT_A
PLUS_PP_DBT_B and
MINUS_PP_DBT_B
E_MINUS_ZAD_DM FALSE PLUS_PP_DRK_A and
T_DBT_DRK_B MINUS_PP_DRK_A
PLUS_PP_DRK_B and
MINUS_PP_DRK_B

Confidential
18. Send command "Activation of DMT(А)(B)" and check for connectivity of
STATU CONNECTIVITY /
S.NO COMMAND SIGNALS
S DISCONNECTION
1 E_ZAD_DMT_A TRUE Connectivity PLUS_PP_DBT_A and
MINUS_PP_DBT_A
E_MINUS_ZAD_DM TRUE PLUS_PP_DBT_B and
2 E_ZAD_DMT_A FALSE Disconnection PLUS_PP_DBT_A and

MINUS_PP_DBT_A
E_MINUS_ZAD_DM FALSE PLUS_PP_DBT_B and
3 E_ZAD_DMT_B TRUE Connectivity PLUS_PP_DBT_A,MINUS_P

P_DBT_A
E_MINUS_ZAD_DM TRUE PLUS_PP_DBT_B,MINUS_P
T_DBT_DRK_B P_DBT_B
4 E_ZAD_DMT_B FALSE Disconnection PLUS_PP_DBT_A,MINUS_P
P_DBT_A
E_MINUS_ZAD_DM FALSE PLUS_PP_DBT_B,MINUS_P
T_DBT_DRK_B P_DBT_B
19. Send command "Activation of GGS(A)(B)" and check for connectivity of

DISCONNECTION
1 E_ZAD_GGS_A TRUE Connectivity PLUS_PP_GGS_A
and
MINUS_PP_GGS_A
E_MINUS_ZAD_GGS TRUE PLUS_PP_GGS_B
_BALL_A and
MINUS_PP_GGS_B
2 E_ZAD_GGS_A FALSE Disconnection PLUS_PP_GGS_A
and
MINUS_PP_GGS_A
E_MINUS_ZAD_GGS FALSE PLUS_PP_GGS_B

Confidential
_BALL_A and
MINUS_PP_GGS_B
3 E_ZAD_GGS_B TRUE Connectivity PLUS_PP_GGS_A,MI
NUS_PP_GGS_A
E_MINUS_ZAD_GGS TRUE PLUS_PP_GGS_B,MI
_BALL_B NUS_PP_GGS_B
4 E_ZAD_GGS_B FALSE Disconnection PLUS_PP_GGS_A,MI
NUS_PP_GGS_A
E_MINUS_ZAD_GGS FALSE PLUS_PP_GGS_B,MI
_BALL_B NUS_PP_GGS_B
20. Send command "Activation of bottle TPS(А)(B)" and check for connectivity of
CONNECTIVITY /
S.NO COMMAND STATUS CHECKPOINTS
DISCONNECTION
1 E_ZAD_BALL_TPS_ TRUE Connectivity PLUS_PP_GGS_A and
A MINUS_PP_GGS_A
2 E_ZAD_BALL_TPS_ FALSE Disconnection PLUS_PP_GGS_A and
A MINUS_PP_GGS_A
3 E_ZAD_BALL_TPS_ TRUE Connectivity PLUS_PP_GGS_A and
B MINUS_PP_GGS_A
4 E_ZAD_BALL_TPS_ FALSE Disconnection PLUS_PP_GGS_A and
B MINUS_PP_GGS_A
21. Send command "Simulation of absolute pressure sensor (Pressure Sensor

А3-5)" and check for connectivity/disconnection based on signal “X2 is
docked” and attribute “dangerous current control line” after sending
commands and disconnection after removal of command.

Confidential
(a) If signal “X2 is docked” C_X2_SOSTIK is present and attribute
“dangerous current control line” is selected, check the decoupling
between the signals.
DISCONNECTION
1 E_IMIT_SDA3_ TRUE Disconnection PLUS_PP_GGS_A and
5 MINUS_PP_GGS_A
PLUS_PP_GGS_B and
MINUS_PP_GGS_B
(b) If signal “X2 is docked” C_X2_SOSTIK is present and attribute

“dangerous current control line” is not selected then check the
connectivity between the signals.
DISCONNECTION
1 E_IMIT_SDA3_ TRUE Connectivity PLUS_PP_GGS_A and
5 MINUS_PP_GGS_A
PLUS_PP_GGS_B and
MINUS_PP_GGS_B
(c) If X2 is not docked, check the decoupling between the signals.

DISCONNECTION
1 E_IMIT_SDA3_5 TRUE Dis Connectivity PLUS_PP_GGS_A and
MINUS_PP_GGS_A
PLUS_PP_GGS_B and
MINUS_PP_GGS_B
(d) Check the decoupling between the signal after removal of command.
DISCONNECTION
1 E_IMIT_SDA3_5 FALSE Dis Connectivity PLUS_PP_GGS_A and
MINUS_PP_GGS_A
PLUS_PP_GGS_B and
MINUS_PP_GGS_B

Confidential
22. Send command "Activation AMB(А)(B)" and check for connectivity of check
points after sending commands and disconnection of check points after
removal of command.
(a) If attribute “dangerous current control line” is not selected, check the
decoupling between the signals.
DISCONNECTION
1 E_ZAD_AMB_ TRUE Disconnection PLUS_PP_AMB_A and
A MINUS_PP_AMB_A
PLUS_PP_AMB_B and
MINUS_PP_AMB_B
(b) If attribute “dangerous current control line” is selected, check the

DISCONNECTION
1 E_ZAD_AMB_A TRUE Connectivity PLUS_PP_AMB_A and
MINUS_PP_AMB_A
PLUS_PP_AMB_B and
MINUS_PP_AMB_B
(c) Check the decoupling between the signal after removal of command.

Confidential

DISCONNECTION
1 E_ZAD_AMB_A FALSE Disconnection PLUS_PP_AMB_A and
MINUS_PP_AMB_A
PLUS_PP_AMB_B and
MINUS_PP_AMB_B
(d) If attribute “dangerous current control line” is not selected, check the
DISCONNECTION
1 E_ZAD_AMB_B TRUE Disconnection PLUS_PP_AMB_A and
MINUS_PP_AMB_A
PLUS_PP_AMB_B and
MINUS_PP_AMB_B
(e) If attribute “dangerous current control line” is selected, check the

DISCONNECTION
1 E_ZAD_AMB_ TRUE Connectivity PLUS_PP_AMB_A and
B MINUS_PP_AMB_A
PLUS_PP_AMB_B and
MINUS_PP_AMB_B
(f) Check the decoupling between the signal after removal of command.
DISCONNECTION
1 E_ZAD_AMB_B FALSE Disconnection PLUS_PP_AMB_A and
MINUS_PP_AMB_A
PLUS_PP_AMB_B and
MINUS_PP_AMB_B
23. Send command "Activation of drainage AMB(А)(B)" and check for

connectivity of check points after sending commands and disconnection of
check points after removal of command.

Confidential

DISCONNECTION
1 E_ZAD_DRN_A TRUE Disconnection PLUS_PP_AMB_A and
MB_A MINUS_PP_AMB_A
PLUS_PP_AMB_B and
MINUS_PP_AMB_B
(b) If the attribute “dangerous current control line” is selected, check the
DISCONNECTION
1 E_ZAD_DRN_A TRUE Connectivity PLUS_PP_AMB_A and
MB_A MINUS_PP_AMB_A
PLUS_PP_AMB_B and
MINUS_PP_AMB_B
(c) Check the decoupling between the signal after removal of command.
DISCONNECTION
1 E_ZAD_DRN_A FALSE Disconnection PLUS_PP_AMB_A and
MB_A MINUS_PP_AMB_A
PLUS_PP_AMB_B and
MINUS_PP_AMB_B
(d) If attribute “dangerous current control line” is not selected, check the
DISCONNECTION
1 E_ZAD_DRN_A TRUE Disconnection PLUS_PP_AMB_A and
MB_B MINUS_PP_AMB_A
PLUS_PP_AMB_B and
MINUS_PP_AMB_B
(e) If attribute “dangerous current control line” is selected, check the


Confidential

DISCONNECTION
1 E_ZAD_DRN_A TRUE Connectivity PLUS_PP_AMB_A and
MB_B MINUS_PP_AMB_A
PLUS_PP_AMB_B and
MINUS_PP_AMB_B
(f) Check the decoupling between the signal after removal of command.
DISCONNECTION
1 E_ZAD_DRN_A FALSE Disconnection PLUS_PP_AMB_A and
MB_B MINUS_PP_AMB_A
PLUS_PP_AMB_B and
MINUS_PP_AMB_B
24. Issue command “Switch ON bus Р" .

S.NO. SIGNAL NAME SIG TYPE STATUS DESCRIPTION
1. E_WKL_R DOP ON Command "Switch ON bus Р"
25. Reserved.
26. Send command "Activation of GGS(A)(B)" and check for connectivity of
(a) If signal C_X2_SOSTIK (X2 is docked) is present, check the decoupling
between the signals.
DISCONNECTION
MINUS_PP_GGS_A
E_MINUS_ZAD_GGS TRUE PLUS_PP_GGS_B and
_BALL_A MINUS_PP_GGS_B
(b) If attribute “dangerous current control line” is not selected and signal “X2
is docked” is not present, check the decoupling between the signals.

Confidential
S.No COMMAND STATUS CONNECTIVITY / SIGNALS

DISCONNECTION
MINUS_PP_GGS_A
E_MINUS_ZAD_G TRUE PLUS_PP_GGS_B and
GS_BALL_A MINUS_PP_GGS_B
(c) If attribute “dangerous current control line” is selected and signal “X2 is
docked” is not present, check the connectivity between the signals.
DISCONNECTION
1 E_ZAD_GGS_A TRUE Connectivity PLUS_PP_GGS_A and
MINUS_PP_GGS_A
E_MINUS_ZAD_ TRUE PLUS_PP_GGS_B and
GGS_BALL_A MINUS_PP_GGS_B
27. Remove command "Switch ON bus Р".

1. E_WKL_R DOP OFF Command "Switch ON bus Р"
28. Check the message Check Point +, (-)PP GGS(A)(B).

DISCONNECTION
1 E_ZAD_GGS_A - Disconnection PLUS_PP_GGS_A and
MINUS_PP_GGS_A
E_MINUS_ZAD - PLUS_PP_GGS_B and
(b) If “dangerous current control line” attribute is selected, check the

DISCONNECTION
1 E_ZAD_GGS_A - Connectivity PLUS_PP_GGS_A and
MINUS_PP_GGS_A
E_MINUS_ZAD_ - PLUS_PP_GGS_B and
GGS_BALL_A MINUS_PP_GGS_B
29. Remove command "Activation GGS(A),(B)".

Confidential

DISCONNECTION
1 E_ZAD_GGS_ FALSE Disconnection PLUS_PP_GGS_A and
A MINUS_PP_GGS_A
30. Issue command "Switch ON bus Р" .

31. Reserved
32. Issue command "Activation AMB(А)(B)"
(a) If signal “X2 is docked” is present, check the decoupling between the
signals.
S.NO COMMAND STATU CONNECTIVITY / SIGNALS
S DISCONNECTION
1 E_ZAD_AMB_A TRUE Disconnection PLUS_PP_AMB_A and
MINUS_PP_AMB_A
PLUS_PP_AMB_B and
MINUS_PP_AMB_B
is docked” is not present, check the decoupling between the signals.
S.NO COMMAND STATU CONNECTIVITY / SIGNALS
S DISCONNECTION
1 E_ZAD_AMB_A TRUE Disconnection PLUS_PP_AMB_A and
MINUS_PP_AMB_A
PLUS_PP_AMB_B and
MINUS_PP_AMB_B

DISCONNECTION

Confidential
1 E_ZAD_AMB_A TRUE Connectivity PLUS_PP_AMB_A and

MINUS_PP_AMB_A
PLUS_PP_AMB_B and
MINUS_PP_AMB_B

34. Check the message Check Point +,(-)PP AMB(А)(B)

DISCONNECTION
1 - - Disconnection PLUS_PP_AMB_A and
MINUS_PP_AMB_A
PLUS_PP_AMB_B and
MINUS_PP_AMB_B

DISCONNECTION
1 - - Connectivity PLUS_PP_AMB_A and
MINUS_PP_AMB_A
PLUS_PP_AMB_B and
MINUS_PP_AMB_B
35. Remove command "Activation AMB(А)(B)".

DISCONNECTION
1 E_ZAD_AMB_ FALSE Disconnection PLUS_PP_AMB_A and
A MINUS_PP_AMB_A
PLUS_PP_AMB_B and
MINUS_PP_AMB_B
36. Issue command "Switch ON bus Р".


Confidential
37. Send command "Activation of bottle TPS(А)(B)" and check disconnection
after sending commands.
(a) If signal “X2 is docked” is present, check the decoupling between the
signals.
DISCONNECTION
1 E_ZAD_BALL_ TRUE Disconnection PLUS_PP_GGS_A and
TPS_A MINUS_PP_GGS_A
is docked” is not present, check the decoupling between the signals,
DISCONNECTION
1 E_ZAD_BALL_ TRUE Disconnection PLUS_PP_GGS_A and
DISCONNECTION
1 E_ZAD_BALL_ TRUE Connectivity PLUS_PP_GGS_A and

S.NO. SIGNAL NAME SIG TYPE CHECK FOR DESCRIPTION
39. Check the message Check Point +,(-)PP GGS(A)(B).


Confidential

DISCONNECTION
1 - - Disconnection PLUS_PP_GGS_A and
MINUS_PP_GGS_A
PLUS_PP_GGS_B and
MINUS_PP_GGS_B

DISCONNECTION
1 - - Connectivity PLUS_PP_GGS_A and
MINUS_PP_GGS_A
PLUS_PP_GGS_B and
MINUS_PP_GGS_B
40. Remove command "Activation of bottle TPS(А),(B)".

DISCONNECTION
1 E_ZAD_BALL_T FALSE Disconnection PLUS_PP_GGS_A and
PS_A MINUS_PP_GGS_A
41. Reserved
42. Set the bridges (1.5KΩ) into initial position.
(b) Issue and remove the signals connection of CP1 and CP2 on bridge 1.5
KΩ and Initial of PTD. Send and remove the command “Cancel of start
A(E_OTM_ST_A_WIH and E_OTM_ST_A”
(c) Check the disconnection between the signals.

Confidential
S.NO CONNECTIVITY / SIGNALS

DISCONNECTION
1. disconnection PLUS_PP_DRK_A
MINUS_PP_DRK_A
2. disconnection PLUS_PP_DRK_B
MINUS_PP_DRK_B
3. disconnection PLUS_PP_DBT_A
MINUS_PP_DBT_A
4. disconnection PLUS_PP_DBT_B
MINUS_PP_DBT_B
5. disconnection PLUS_PP_GGS_A
MINUS_PP_GGS_A
6. disconnection PLUS_PP_GGS_B
MINUS_PP_GGS_B
7. disconnection PLUS_PP_AMB_A
MINUS_PP_AMB_A
8. disconnection PLUS_PP_AMB_B
MINUS_PP_AMB_B
43. Set the limits for the dangerous signals (Add the dangerous signals to the
monitoring list)
Outputs

Confidential
3.1.2.16 CHECKING BZP ON COMMANDS К310-61МЭ (1035)

Description
This requirement will check BZP as per commands 3Р50. The functioning of checked
blocks BZP will be monitored by checking the continuity in appropriate circuit after sending
the command and disconnection of the circuit after removal of command.
Note
1. For checking the insulation between the signals, Measurement Bridge 1.5 KΩ will be
Inputs
• Work type
• Control programmer number
• Attribute – RPP
• Attribute “Technological article”
Processing
2. Verify the following attributes to continue the execution of test.
(a) The test should be performed only in the presence of attribute
“Technological article”.
(b) The test should be performed only if “Control program number” is 3.
(c) The test should be performed only in the absence of signal
“C_X2_SOSTIK”.

Confidential
3. Analysis for the presence of attribute “Dangerous current line control” will
include the following steps.
(a) The test will be stopped if attribute “dangerous current line control” is
selected and the signal for “dangerous current line control” is absent.
(b) The test will be stopped if attribute “dangerous current line control” is
not selected and the signal for “dangerous current line control” is
present.
4. The test will be stopped for the following condition as give in below table.
ATTRIBUTE “DANGEROUS ATTRIBUTE “RPP” INPUT SIGNAL FOR “RPP”
CURRENT LINE (E_PRZN_RSZ_WH )
CONTROL”
1 1 0
1 0 1
0 1 0
0 0 1
5. Set the Measurement bridge 1.5 KΩ into operating condition.

(a) Read the signal E_UMIT (Input to bridge) and check whether it is in
range+23.5V to +24.5V. If it is not in range, stop the test.
meter.
6. Set the check point to initial position.
(a) Issue and remove the signal connection of CP1 and CP2 on Bridge
1.5 KΩ
(b) Issue and remove the signal “Initial of PTD”.
(c) Issue and remove of command “Cancel of start A”.
7. Check the presence of signal "Absence of liquid in TLC".
(a) In presence / absence of attribute “RPP”, The presence of signal
E_JIDK_TPS_OTST ("Liquid in TLC is absent”) will be monitored.
(b) In presence / absence of attribute “RPP”, The absence of signal
E_JIDK_TPS_OTST ("Liquid in TLC is absent”) will be monitored.
8. Send command "Activation of DRK (А)(B)" and check connectivity after
sending commands and decoupling after removal of command.

Confidential

DISCONNECTION
1 E_ZAD_DRK_A TRUE Connectivity PLUS_PP_DRK_A &
E_MINUS_ZAD_DMT_ MINUS_PP_DRK_A
DBT_DRK_A
2 E_ZAD_DRK_A FALSE Disconnection PLUS_PP_DRK_A &
MINUS_PP_DRK_A
E_MINUS_ZAD_DMT_ PLUS_PP_DRK_B,
3 E_ZAD_DRK_B TRUE Connectivity PLUS_PP_DRK_B,
E_MINUS_ZAD_DMT_ MINUS_PP_DRK_B
DBT_DRK_B
4 E_ZAD_DRK_B FALSE Disconnection PLUS_PP_DRK_B,
MINUS_PP_DRK_B
E_MINUS_ZAD_DMT_ PLUS_PP_DRK_A &
DBT_DRK_B MINUS_PP_DRK_A
9. Send command "Activation of DRK (А)(B)" and check connectivity after

DISCONNECTION
1 E_ZAD_DBT_A TRUE Connectivity PLUS_PP_DBT_A &
MINUS_PP_DBT_A
DBT_DRK_A MINUS_PP_DRK_A
2 E_ZAD_DBT_A FALSE Disconnection PLUS_PP_DBT_A &
MINUS_PP_DBT_A
DBT_DRK_A MINUS_PP_DRK_A
3 E_ZAD_DBT_B TRUE Connectivity PLUS_PP_DBT_B,
MINUS_PP_DBT_B
4 E_ZAD_DBT_B FALSE Disconnection PLUS_PP_DBT_B,
MINUS_PP_DBT_B

Confidential
10. Send command "Activation of DMT(А)(B)" and check connectivity after
DISCONNECTION
1 E_ZAD_DMT_A TRUE Connectivity PLUS_PP_DBT_A &
E_MINUS_ZAD_DMT_ MINUS_PP_DBT_A
DBT_DRK_A
2 E_ZAD_DMT_A FALSE Disconnection PLUS_PP_DBT_A &
E_MINUS_ZAD_DMT_ MINUS_PP_DBT_A
DBT_DRK_A
3 E_ZAD_DMT_B TRUE Connectivity PLUS_PP_DBT_B &
E_MINUS_ZAD_DMT_ MINUS_PP_DBT_B
DBT_DRK_B
4 E_ZAD_DMT_B FALSE Disconnection PLUS_PP_DBT_B &
E_MINUS_ZAD_DMT_ MINUS_PP_DBT_B
DBT_DRK_B
11. Send command "Activation of GGS(А)(B)" and check connectivity after

DISCONNECTION
1 E_ZAD_GGS_A TRUE Connectivity PLUS_PP_GGS_A &
E_MINUS_ZAD_GGS_ MINUS_PP_GGS_A
BALL_A
2 E_ZAD_GGS_A FALSE Disconnection PLUS_PP_GGS_A &
BALL_A
3 E_ZAD_GGS_B TRUE Connectivity PLUS_PP_GGS_B &
E_MINUS_ZAD_GGS_ MINUS_PP_GGS_B
BALL_B
4 E_ZAD_GGS_B FALSE Disconnection PLUS_PP_GGS_B &
BALL_B
12. Send command "Activation of bottle TPS(А)(B)" and check connectivity

after sending commands and decoupling after removal of command.

Confidential

DISCONNECTION
1 E_ZAD_BALL_TPS_A TRUE Connectivity PLUS_PP_GGS_A &
BALL_A
2 E_ZAD_BALL_TPS_A FALSE Disconnection PLUS_PP_GGS_A &
BALL_A
3 E_ZAD_BALL_TPS_B TRUE Connectivity PLUS_PP_GGS_B &
BALL_B
4 E_ZAD_BALL_TPS_B FALSE Disconnection PLUS_PP_GGS_B &
BALL_B
13. Send command "Activation AMB(А)(B)" and check connectivity after

DISCONNECTION
1 E_ZAD_AMB_A TRUE Connectivity PLUS_PP_AMB_A &
MINUS_PP_AMB_A
PLUS_PP_AMB_B &
MINUS_PP_AMB_B
2 E_ZAD_AMB_A FALSE Disconnection PLUS_PP_AMB_A &
MINUS_PP_AMB_A
PLUS_PP_AMB_B &
MINUS_PP_AMB_B
3 E_ZAD_AMB_B TRUE Connectivity PLUS_PP_AMB_A &
MINUS_PP_AMB_A
PLUS_PP_AMB_B &
MINUS_PP_AMB_B
4 E_ZAD_AMB_B FALSE Disconnection PLUS_PP_AMB_A &
MINUS_PP_AMB_A
PLUS_PP_AMB_B &
MINUS_PP_AMB_B
14. Send command "Activation of drainage AMB(А)(B)" and check

connectivity after sending commands and decoupling after removal of
command.

Confidential

DISCONNECTION
1 E_ZAD_DRN_AMB_A TRUE Connectivity PLUS_PP_AMB_A &
MINUS_PP_AMB_A
PLUS_PP_AMB_B &
MINUS_PP_AMB_B
2 E_ZAD_DRN_AMB_A FALSE Disconnection PLUS_PP_AMB_A &
MINUS_PP_AMB_A
PLUS_PP_AMB_B &
MINUS_PP_AMB_B
3 E_ZAD_DRN_AMB_B TRUE Connectivity PLUS_PP_AMB_A &
MINUS_PP_AMB_A
PLUS_PP_AMB_B &
MINUS_PP_AMB_B
4 E_ZAD_DRN_AMB_B FALSE Disconnection PLUS_PP_AMB_A &
MINUS_PP_AMB_A
PLUS_PP_AMB_B &
MINUS_PP_AMB_B
15. Set SEP1 and PTD into initial position.

(b) Issue and remove the signals connection of CP1 and CP2 on bridge
1.5 KΩ.
(d) Issue and remove command “Cancel of start A”.
(e) Check the disconnection between the following signals as given in
below table.

Confidential
S.NO CONNECTIVITY / SIGNALS

DISCONNECTION
1. disconnection PLUS_PP_DRK_A
MINUS_PP_DRK_A
2. disconnection PLUS_PP_DRK_B
MINUS_PP_DRK_B
3. disconnection PLUS_PP_DBT_A
MINUS_PP_DBT_A
4. disconnection PLUS_PP_DBT_B
MINUS_PP_DBT_B
5. disconnection PLUS_PP_GGS_A
MINUS_PP_GGS_A
6. disconnection PLUS_PP_GGS_B
MINUS_PP_GGS_B
7. disconnection PLUS_PP_AMB_A
MINUS_PP_AMB_A
8. disconnection PLUS_PP_AMB_B
MINUS_PP_AMB_B
16. Set the limits for the dangerous signals (Add the dangerous signals to
the monitoring list).
Outputs
3.1.2.17 CHECKING OF ON-BOARD AUTOMATION BLOCK (CHECK 1036)

Description
This requirement will check automatics of sustainer.
Inputs
• Work type
Processing
1. This test should not be performed on following conditions,
(a) If the article is Type A.
(b) If presence of attribute “Simulation of Fin Sensors” or “Hydro
system”.
(c) If the remote signal “ “X2 is connected” (C_X2_SOSTIK)” of SEP3 is
not present and attribute “ “X2 is not connected” is not selected.
2. In initial position the following steps will be performed,

Confidential
(a) Issue and remove command “Initial PTD”.
(b) Issue and remove command “Cancellation of start (А)”.
(c) Issue command “Simulation Fin Sensor”.
(d) Issue and remove command “Command MD bus switch OFF
(E_COM_MD_OTKL)”.
(e) Remove command “Simulation Fin Sensor”.
(f) Check the presence of signal “Initial 2 (E_ISHODHOE_2)”.
(g) Remove the signal “MD bus switch OFF (E_OTKL_MD)”.
(h) Verify the presence of signals “Stop”, “Back” and absence of signals
“Normal”, “Close”
3. The status of signals "Stop", "Back", "Closing", "OK" will be verified after
issue and removal of commands.
Note:
For S.No. 10 and 20 (Refer Table 3.34) time AMD is verified. If the time for change of
status of expected signal is not 0 < t1, Т1AMD < 26 or 199 < t1, Т1AMD < 226 or 99 <
t2,Т2АМD < 126, the status is set as not normal
Table 3.34 SIGNAL STATUS FOR CHECK 1036

S.NO. COMMAND EXPECTED STATUS OF SIGNALS
ISSUED REMOVED STOP BACK CLOSING OK
1 - E_OTKL_MD ON ON OFF OFF
2 E_SWD_BLOK - OFF OFF OFF OFF
3 E_COM_STOP - ON OFF OFF OFF
4 E_COM_STOP OFF OFF OFF OFF
5 E_COM_NAZAD - OFF OFF OFF OFF
6 - E_COM_NAZAD OFF OFF OFF OFF
7 E_COM_STOP - ON OFF OFF OFF
8 E_COM_NAZAD - ON ON OFF OFF
9 - E_COM_STOP ON ON OFF OFF
10 - E_COM_NAZAD ON ON OFF OFF
OFF OFF OFF OFF
11 E_WKL_KAN_B_WI - OFF OFF OFF ON
H
12 E_COM_STOP - ON OFF OFF ON
13 E_COM_NAZAD - ON ON OFF ON
14 - E_COM_NAZAD ON OFF OFF ON
15 - E_COM_STOP OFF OFF OFF ON

Confidential
S.NO. COMMAND EXPECTED STATUS OF SIGNALS

ISSUED REMOVED STOP BACK CLOSING OK
16 - E_WKL_KAN_B_ OFF OFF OFF OFF
WIH
17 E_COM_MD_OTKL - OFF OFF FALSE ON
18 - E_COM_MD_OTK OFF OFF OFF OFF
L
19 E_WKL_R - OFF OFF OFF OFF
20 - E_SWD_BLOK OFF OFF OFF OFF
OFF OFF ON OFF
21 E_COM_MD_OTKL - ON ON ON ON
22 - E_COM_MD_OTK OFF OFF ON OFF
L
23 - E_WKL_R ON ON OFF OFF
24 E_RPT_OTKL - ON ON OFF ON
25 - E_RPT_OTKL ON ON OFF OFF
26 E_SWD_BLOK OFF OFF OFF OFF
27 E_WKL_R - OFF OFF OFF OFF
28 E_WKL_KAN_B_WI - ON ON ON ON
H
29 - E_WKL_KAN_B_ OFF OFF OFF OFF
WIH
E_WKL_R
30 - E_SWD_BLOK ON ON OFF FALSE
31 E_OTKL_MD - OFF OFF OFF OFF
4. Issued and remove the following commands,

(a) Issue and remove command “Initial PTD”.
(b) Issue and remove command “Cancellation of start (А)”.
Outputs

Confidential
3.1.2.18 CHECKING OF PRESSURE RESTORATION SIGNALING DEVICE (1037)

Description
This requirement will check the automatics of sustainer. This check is performed only in
step-wise mode.
Inputs
Work type
Processing
1. This test should not be performed on following condition.
(a) If the article is Type A.
(b) If absence of attribute “Simulation of Fin sensors”.
2. Analysis for the presence of attributes “Hydro system” & “Simulation of
Fin sensors”
(a) Test should not be performed if mode is not step-wise.
(b) Test should not be performed if attribute “Hydro system” is present
and absence of attribute "Simulation of Booster".
(c) Test should not be performed if attribute “Hydro system” is absent.
3. Issue and remove the following signals,
(a) Issue the command “Simulation of FIN sensors”.
(b) Issue and remove command “MD bus switch OFF”.
(c) Remove the command “Simulation of FIN sensors”.
(d) Check presence of signal “Initial 2”.
(e) Remove the command “Switch OFF of MD bus” and check the status
of signals mentioned in below table.
E_SIGN_STO E_SIGN_NAZ E_SIGN_ZAKR E_SIGN_NOR DESCRIPTION

P_WH (STOP) AD_WH _WH (CLOSE) MA_WH
(BACK) (NORMAL)
1 1 0 0 Presence of signal
"Close" "Stop"
4. The presence / absence of signals “Stop”, “Back” and “Close” will be

verified.

Confidential
S.NO. E_SIGN_STO E_SIGN_NAZA E_SIGN_Z DESCRIPTION

P_WH (STOP) D_WH (BACK) AKR_WH
(CLOSE)
1. 0 0 1 Presence of signal "Close",absence
of signals "Stop","Back"
2. 1 0 0 Presence of signal "Stop",absence
of signals "Close","Back"
3. 0 0 1 Presence of signal "Close",absence
4. 1 0 0 Presence of signal "Stop", absence
of signals "Close","Back"
5. 0 0 1 Presence of signal "Close", absence
7. 1 1 0 Presence of "Stop","Back", Absence
"Close"
10 1 1 0 Presence of "Stop","Back", Absence
. "Close"
11 1 1 0 Presence of "Stop","Back", Absence

. "Close"
12 0 0 0 The absence <Stop>, <Back> is

. verified after issuing of command
“Switch OFF of MD bus”
5. Issue and remove the following signals.

(a) Issue and removal of command "Initial PTD".
(b) Issue and removal of command "Cancellation of start (А)".
Outputs

Confidential
3.1.2.19 CHECKING THE CIRCUITS OF WARHEAD (BS) (1050)
Description
This check is used for checking the circuits of Warhead.
Inputs
Work type
Processing
2. This test should not be performed if of attribute “Fin sensors” is present.
3. Issue and remove the following signals,
4. Verify the issue of command “Attribute МРК” through 1553B message to
СК314-43 (MIU) from SEP2 and the result of exchange will be read from
SEP2 and verified.
5. Verify the presence of signal “Permission МРК” through 1553B message
to СК314-43 (MIU) from SEP2 and the result of exchange will be read
from SEP2 and verified.
6. Issue and remove the command “Initial PTD”.
7. Verify the issue of command “Command НС” through 1553B message to
СК314-43 (MIU) from SEP2 and the result of exchange will be read from
SEP2 and verified.
8. Verify the presence of signal “Permission НС” through 1553B message
to СК314-43 (MIU) from SEP2 and the result of exchange will be read
from SEP2 and verified.
9. Issue and removal the following signals,
Outputs

Confidential
3.1.2.20 CHECK OF INCLINED LAUNCH(КПМРК2) (1052)

Description
This requirement will check the integrated interaction of СК311, Programmable Timing
Device (PTD), On-board Automation Block and Warhead in mode МРК.
Note:
1. For checking the insulation between the signals, Measurement Bridge 1.5 KΩ will be
(c) Measure the bridge output. The output will be in range 0.1V to 14.0V.
2. For checking the continuity between the signals, Measurement Bridge 1.5 KΩ will be
(c) Measure the bridge output. The output will be in range -0.1V to -14.0V.
Inputs
Processing
1. The initial attributes will be verified.
(a) This test should not be performed if the article is Type A.
(b) This test should not be performed if the control program number is 2 or 3.
(c) Check for presence of attributes given in below table.
S.NO. DESCRIPTION
1. Presence of attribute “RPP”
2. Presence of attribute “Liquid in TLC is absent”
3. Presence of attribute "Simulator of BS"
4. Presence of "Attribute 1 BS"
5. Presence of "Attribute 2 BS"
2. If attribute “X2 is docked” / the signal for presence of “X2 is docked” is

absent, the check should not be performed.

Confidential
3. Set the Measurement Bridge 1.5 KΩ into operating condition.
(a) Read the input to bridge and check whether it is in range of 23.5 to 24.
V. If it is not in range, stop the test.
(b) Feed 24V voltage to the Bridge and connect the diagonals to the meter.
(a) Set the check points to initial position.
(b) Issue and remove the connection of CP1 and CP2 on bridge 1.5 KΩ and
40 KΩ.
(c) Issue and remove the “Initial of PTD” command.
5. Verify the decoupling between the check points (+)(-) AMB and (+)(-) PP.
6. Verify the issue of command “Attribute МРК” to MIU from SEP2.
7. Verify the presence of “Permission МРК” in MIU using SEP2.
8. Verify the “Disconnection of MD bus” after issue and removal of command
“MD Switch OFF“.
9. Verify the absence of signals Stop, Back, Close, Normal and Lunch
permitted(A) (B).
10. Switch OFF MD bus and switch OFF PP1 bus.
11. Verify the presence of signals Stop, Back and absence of Close, Normal and
Lunch permitted(A) (B).
12. Verify the decoupling between the check points (+)(-) AMB and (+)(-) BU.
13. Issue command “Connection of AMB to SEP1 bus A” and “Connection of
AMB to SEP1 bus”.
14. Verify the presence of signal “AMB Connected”.
15. Verify the ADC signals AMB for range 24.0 to 30.0 V and BU for -0.3 to 0.3
V.
16. Issue the command “Simulation of CND”.
17. Verify the presence of signal “KND” of MIU through SEP2.
18. Verify the ADC signals BU for range 22.0 to 30.0 V.
19. Issue the command “Simulation of СВК”.
20. Verify the absence of signal “KND” of MIU through SEP2.
21. Check the presence of signals “СВК1”, “Вкл.ДБТ” and absence of “KND" of
MIU through SEP2.
22. Issue command "Unlocking of COE BS" and if the status of "Unlocking of
COE BS" is not present, issue command “Simulation of acceleration”.
23. Issue command “Simulation of NDS and failure of FANS”.
24. Verify the presence of signals “Simulation of NDS”, “СВК”, “Вкл.ДБТ” and
absence “KND” of MIU through SEP2.

Confidential
25. Verify the presence of signals “Simulation of NDS”, “Вкл.ДБТ” and absence
of “СВК” and “KND" of MIU through SEP2.
26. Issue command "Permission to activate BU" (permission of cocking BU) to
MIU through SEP2.
27. Verify the issue of command "FD" to MIU through SEP2.
28. Verify the issue of command "BFD” to MIU through SEP2.
29. Verify the presence of signals "Stop", "Back", "Normal" and absence of
"Launch Permitted(A) (B)".
30. Verify the issue of command "680” to MIU through SEP2
31. Verify the presence of signals "Stop", "Back", absence of "Launch
Permitted(A) (B)" and “Normal”.
32. Verify the issue of command "ДП (M30_M05)” to MIU through SEP2.
33. Verify the issue of command "KL” to MIU through SEP2.
34. Verify the presence of signal "BS is OK".
35. Verify the connection of РА1-4 of MIU through SEP2.
36. Verify the deflection of РА1-4 of MIU through SEP2 and verify the PA value
as given in below table.
S.NO DEFLECTION OF РА VALUE OF PA
MIN MAX
1 PA1 -2.5 2.5
2 PA2 19.8 27.2
3 PA3 -2.5 2.5
4 PA4 19.8 27.2
37. Remove the command "Connection of AMB to SEP1 bus (A)" and
"Connection of AMB to SEP1 bus".
38. Verify the disconnection of РА1-4 of MIU through SEP2.
39. Verify the removal of command "FD" to MIU through SEP2.
40. Verify the removal of command "BFD" to MIU through SEP2.
41. Verify the removal of command "680" to MIU through SEP2.
42. Verify the removal of command "KL" to MIU through SEP2.
43. Removal of command "simulation of CND", "Simulation of СВК" and
“Simulation of NDSRS and failure of FANS”.
44. Issue and remove “Switch ON of bus P”.
45. Issue and remove command “Cancellation of start (А)” and “Switch OFF of
MD bus”.
46. Verify the absence of signals Stop, Back, Normal, Close and Launch
Permitted(A) B).

Confidential
47. Verify the absence of following signals of MIU through SEP2.
(d) absence of signals KND.
(e) absence of signals СВК1.
(f) absence of signals Вкл.ДБТ.
(g) absence of signals “Simulation of NDSRS”.
48. Verify the voltage on bus AMB of range -0.3 to 0.3 V and BU of range -0.3 to
0.3 V.
49. Verify the decoupling between the check points (+)(-) AMB and (+)(-) PP.
50. Set the bridge to initial position.
(a) Disconnect the Check Points of the bridge.
(b) Remove 24V input to the bridge and disconnect the diagonals from
meter.
(c) Issue and remove “Initial of PTD” command.
(d) Remove command “Unlocking of COE BS”.
(e) Remove command “Simulation of acceleration”.
(f) Verify the absence of command “Unlocking of COE BS”.
Outputs
3.1.2.21 CHECKING OF КПНС1 (1054)

Description
This requirement will check the interaction of СK311, Programmable Timing Device(PTD),
On-board Automation Block in НС mode.
Note:
1. For checking the insulation between the signals, the Measurement Bridge 1.5 KΩ

Confidential
Inputs
Work type
Processing
2. Analyze the attribute of “Fin sensor”, “hydro system”.
(a) This test should not be performed if attribute “X2 is connected” is not
selected and input signal for “X2 is connected” of SEP3 is not
present.
(b) This test should not be performed in presence of attributes
“Simulation of Fin sensor” and “Hydro System”.
3. Set the bridge 1.5 KΩ to operating condition.
(a) Read the input to bridge and check whether it is in range 23.5 to 24.5
V. If it is not in the range, stop the test.
4. Analyze the presence of attribute “dangerous current control line”.
(a) The test will be stopped if attribute “Dangerous current control line” is
selected and if input signal for “Dangerous current control line” is
absent.
(b) The test will be stopped if attribute “Dangerous current control line” is
not selected and if input signal for “Dangerous current control line” is
present.
5. Check for the absence of voltage (0V) on AMB buses, with the tolerance
limit of (+/- 0.5 V).
6. Feed 24V voltage to the Bridge and connected the diagonals to the
meter.
1.5 KΩ and bridge 40 KΩ.
(d) Issue and remove command “Cancel of start A”.
8. Check of presence of signal "АМB heated”.
9. Check the decoupling / connectivity between signals given in below
table.

Confidential
STEP STEP DESCRIPTION SIGNAL CONNECTIVITY /

NO. DISCONNECTION
1 Decoupling CP (+) PP1 and KT_PLUS_PP1_1_PP2_1 Disconnection

CP (-) PP1 KT_MINUS_PP1_1_PP2_1
2 Decoupling of (+) AMB and CP KT_PLUS_AMB Disconnection
(+)PP KT_PLUS_PP
Decoupling of CP (-)PP and KT_MINUS_PP Disconnection
(-)AMB KT_MINUS_AMB
3 Decoupling of (+)AMB and CP KT_PLUS_AMB Disconnection
(+) BU KT_PLUS_WU
Decoupling of CP (-)BU and KT_MINUS_WU Disconnection
(-)AMB KT_MINUS_AMB
4 Message (+)PP1-1 and (+)CP KT_PLUS_PP1_1_PP2_1 Connection
BU KT_PLUS_WU
Message (+)PP1-3 and (+)CP KT_PLUS_PP1_3_PP2_3 Connection
BU KT_PLUS_WU
Message (-)CP BU and (-)PP1- KT_MINUS_WU Connection
1 KT_MINUS_PP1_1_PP2_1
Message (-)CP BU and (-)PP1- KT_MINUS_WU Connection
5 Message (+)PP1-1 and (+)CP KT_PLUS_PP1_1_PP2_1 Connection
PP KT_PLUS_PP
Message (-)CP PP and (-)PP1- KT_MINUS_PP Connection
10. Check the absence of signals "Stop", "Back", "Close", "Normal", "Launch
permitted (A)(B)"
11. Verify the issue of command "Command НС” through SEP2.
12. Check the presence of signal “Permission НС” through SEP2.
13. Verify the issue and remove command “Switch OFF of bus MD“.
(a) Issue command “Switch OFF of bus MD“ (E_COM_MD_OTKL).
(b) The test will be stopped if the signal “Switch OFF of bus MD” is not
present.
(c) Remove command “Switch OFF of bus MD”.
(d) The test will be stopped if the signal “Switch OFF of bus MD” is
present.
(e) Remove command “MD bus Switch OFF“ (E_OTKL_MD).
(f) Remove command “Disconnection of bus PP1,2”.

Confidential
14. Verify the presence of signals “Stop”, “Back” and absence of
“Normal” ,”Close”, “Launch permitted (A)(B)”.
15. Issue and remove command “Permission to start (А)” and “Permission to
start (B)”.
16. Verify the presence of signals “Stop”, “Back”, “Launch permitted (A)(B)”
and absence of “Normal” ,”Close”.
17. Check the absence of signal “Permission НС” through SEP2.
18. Issue the command "Simulation of command".
19. Verify the absence “Stop”, “Back”, ”Close” and presence of “Normal”,
“Launch permitted (A)(B)”.
20. Check the continuity between CP (+)AMB and CP (+)PP.
21. Check the presence of signal “KND” through SEP2.
22. Issue the command “Simulation of СВК”.
23. Check the presence / absence of signals "KND", "СВК1" through SEP2.
24. Check the decoupling between signals given in below table.
S.NO. STEP DESCRIPTION SIGNAL CONNECTIVITY /

DISCONNECTION
1 Decoupling of (+)PP1-1 and KT_PLUS_PP1_1_PP2_1 Disconnection
(+)CP PP KT_PLUS_PP
Decoupling of (-)CP PP and KT_MINUS_PP Disconnection
(-)PP1-1 KT_MINUS_PP1_1_PP2_1
(+) BU KT_PLUS_WU
(-)AMB KT_MINUS_AMB
32 KT_PLUS_PP KT_PLUS_PP1_1_PP2_1 Connection
KT_PLUS_PP
25. Verify the absence of signals “Stop”, “Back”, ”Close” and presence of
“Normal”, “Launch permitted (A)(B)”.
26. Issue command "ОА1" and check the presence of <KND>, <СВК1> and
absence of <Вкл.ДБТ> through SEP2.
27. Check the presence <СВК1>,<Вкл.ДБТ> and remove <KND>.
28. Issue and remove the command "Switch ON bus Р”.
29. Verify the absence of signals “Stop”, “Back”, ”Close” and presence of
30. Check the disconnection / continuity between CP (+)(-)AMB and CP (+)
(-)BU.

Confidential
S.NO. CONDITION STEP DESCRIPTION SIGNAL CONNECTIVITY /

DISCONNECTION
1 Absent attribute Decoupling of (+)AMB KT_PLUS_AMB Disconnection
”dangerous and CP (+) BU KT_PLUS_WU
current line Decoupling of CP (-)BU KT_MINUS_WU Disconnection
control” and (-)AMB KT_MINUS_AMB
Present attribute Message (+)AMB and KT_PLUS_AMB Connection
”dangerous CP (+) BU KT_PLUS_WU
current line Message CP (-)BU and KT_MINUS_WU Connection
control” (-)AMB KT_MINUS_AMB
31. Issue the command "Connection of РА1-4" through SEP2.

32. Issue the command "KL" through SEP2.
33. Issue the command “Check deflection of РА1-4” through SEP2 and verify
the result of PA1-4.
S.NO. DEFLECTION OF РА VALUE OF PA
MIN MAX
1 PA1 -2.5 2.5
2 PA2 19.8 27.2
3 PA3 -2.5 2.5
4 PA4 19.8 27.2
34. Remove the command "KL" through SEP2.

35. Issue the command “Check deflection of РА1-4” through SEP2 and verify
the result of PA1-4.
S.NO. DEFLECTION OF РА VALUE OF PA
MIN MAX
1 PA1 -2.5 2.5
2 PA2 -2.5 2.5
3 PA3 -2.5 2.5
4 PA4 -2.5 2.5
36. Issue command “Disconnection of РА1-4” through SEP2.

37. Remove the command "ОА1" using SEP2.
38. Issue the command "Simulation of Booster”.
39. Check the presence of signals "Simulation of Booster", <СВК>,
<Вкл.ДБТ> and absence of “KND” using SEP2.
40. Verify the presence of input signals “Initial 2”.

Confidential
41. Verify the presence of signals "Simulation of Booster", <Вкл.ДБТ> and
absence of “KND”, <СВК> using SEP2.
42. Verify the presence of input signals “Initial 2”.
43. Verify the continuity and decoupling between the signals given in below
table.
NO. DISCONNECTION
48 Message (+)AMB and CP KT_PLUS_AMB Connection
(+) BU
KT_PLUS_WU
Message CP (-)BU and KT_MINUS_WU Connection
(-)AMB KT_MINUS_AMB
49 Message (+)AMB and CP KT_PLUS_AMB Connection
(+) BU KT_PLUS_WU
Message CP (-)BU and KT_MINUS_WU Connection
(-)AMB KT_MINUS_AMB
50 Decoupling of (+)PP1-3 and KT_PLUS_PP1_3_PP2_3 Disconnection
(+) BU KT_PLUS_WU
Decoupling of (-)BU and KT_MINUS_WU Disconnection
CP(-)PP1-3 KT_MINUS_PP1_3_PP2_3
51 Message (+)PP1-3 and (+) KT_PLUS_PP1_3_PP2_3 Connection
BU KT_PLUS_WU
Message (-)BU and KT_MINUS_WU Connection
CP(-)PP1-3 KT_MINUS_PP1_3_PP2_3
53 Decoupling of (+)AMB and KT_PLUS_AMB Disconnection
CP (+) BU KT_PLUS_WU
(-)AMB KT_MINUS_AMB
44. Issue the command "680" through SEP2.

45. Verify the presence of signals “Stop”, “Back”, “Normal”, “Launch
permitted (A)(B)” and absence of “Close”.
46. Verify the presence of “Stop”, “Back”, “Launch permitted (A)(B)” and
absence of “Close”, “Normal” signals. Program for time exposure from
moment of sending command "Remove FD”.
47. Remove the command “Simulation of command”, "Simulation of СВК"
and “Simulation of Booster”.
48. Verify the presence / absence of “Initial 2”.
49. Remove the command "680" using SEP2.

Confidential
50. Issue and remove the command “Cancel of start A”.
51. Refer: Step 19
52. Remove command “MD bus switch OFF” and “Disconnection of bus
PP1,2”.
53. Refer: Step 14
54. Issue and remove command “Initial PTD”.
55. Check the absence of signal “Perm. ПС” (M30_M05) using SEP2 and the
absence of following signals will be verified.
(a) Absence of signal <KND>.
(b) Absence of signal <СВК>.
(c) Absence of signal <Simulation of booster>.
56. Refer: Step 9
57. Refer: Step 10
58. Refer: Step 11
59. Refer: Step 14
60. The continuity between the Check Points will be monitored.

NO. DISCONNECTION
1 Message (+)PP1-1 and KT_PLUS_PP1_1_PP2_1 Connection
(+)CP PP KT_PLUS_PP
Message (-)CP PP and KT_MINUS_PP Connection
(-)PP1-1 KT_MINUS_PP1_1_PP2_1
61. Check the absence of signal "AMB connected".

62. Check for absence of voltage on bus +/- AMB (-0.3 to -0.3 V).
63. Perform the following steps,
(a) Remove voltage from bridge circuit and disconnect the diagonals
from meter.
(b) Issue and remove command “Initial PTD”.
(c) Issue and remove command “Cancellation of start (А)”.
Outputs
3.1.2.22 CHECK OF КПМРК1 (1060)

Description

Confidential
This check is meant for integrated checking of interactions СК311, Programmable Timing
Device (PTD), On-board Automation Block in the mode МРК.
Note:
1. For checking the insulation between the signals, Measurement Bridge 1.5 KΩ will
be be used. The output of bridge will be measured in ADC. The sequence for bridge
Inputs
Work type
Input parameters
Processing
2. Analyze the presence / absence of input attributes.
(a) This test should not be performed if the attribute “Simulation of FIN
sensors” is selected.
(b) This test should not be performed if attribute “X2 is docked” is not
selected and input signal for “X2 is docked” is not present.
(c) This test should not be performed if attribute for presence of “Hydro
system” is selected.
3. Set Bridge 1.5 KΩ into operating condition.
(a) Read the input to bridge and check whether it is in range 23.5 to
24.5V. If it is not in range, stop the test.
(b) Read the voltage on AMB bus and check whether it is in range -0.5 to
0.5 V. If it is not in range, stop the test.
4. Analyze the presence of attribute “Dangerous current control line”.
(a) If attribute “dangerous current control line” is selected and if input
signal for “Dangerous current control line” is absent, stop the test.

Confidential
(b) If attribute “Dangerous current control line” is not selected and if input
signal for “Dangerous current control line” is present, stop the test.
5. Set Bridge 1.5 KΩ into operating condition.
(a) Feed 24V voltage to the Bridge and connected the diagonals to the
meter.
6. Set the bridge (1.5 KΩ and 40 KΩ.) into initial position.
1.5 KΩ and bridge 40 KΩ.
(c) Issue and remove the command “Initial of PTD”.
(d) Issue and remove the command “Cancellation of start (А)”.
7. Check the presence of signal "АМB is heated".
8. Check the decoupling between CP(+)PP1 and CP(-)PP1.
NO. DISCONNECTION
9 Decoupling (+)PP1 and KT_PLUS_PP1_1_PP2_1 Disconnection
CP(-)PP1
KT_MINUS_PP1_1_PP2_1
(+)PP KT_PLUS_PP
Decoupling of (-)AMB and CP KT_MINUS_AMB Disconnection
(-)PP KT_MINUS_PP Disconnection
(+) BU KT_PLUS_WU Disconnection
(-)AMB KT_MINUS_AMB Disconnection
12 Message (+)PP1-1 and (+)CP KT_PLUS_PP1_1_PP2_1 Connectivity
BU KT_PLUS_WU Connectivity
Message (+)PP1-2 and (+)CP KT_PLUS_PP1_2_PP2_2 Connectivity
Message (-)CP BU and KT_MINUS_WU Connectivity
(-)PP1-1 KT_MINUS_PP1_1_PP2_1 Connectivity

Confidential

NO. DISCONNECTION
9. Check sending command “Attribute МРК” using SEP2.

10. Check the presence of signal “Permission МРК” using SEP2.
11. Verify the command “Command MD switch off”.
(a) Issue command “Command MD switch off” and in absence of signal
“Command MD switch off” stop the test.
(b) Remove command “Command MD switch off” and in presence of
signal “Command MD switch off” stop the test.
12. Check the absence of signals "Close", "Normal", "Launch permitted (A)
(B)", “Stop”, “Back”.
13. Remove the command “Disconnection of MD bus” and “Disconnection of
bus PP1,2“.
14. Check the presence of signals “Stop”, “Back” and absence of "Close",
"Normal", "Launch permitted (A)(B)".
15. Issue and remove the command “Permission to start (А)" and
“Permission to start (А)".
16. Check the presence of signals “Stop”, “Back”, "Launch permitted (A)(B)"
and absence of "Close", "Normal".
17. Check the absence of signal “Permission МРК” using SEP2.
18. Send command "KPZ" of MIU through SEP2.
19. Perform the Steps 23 – 25 as given in below table.

Confidential

NO. DISCONNECTION
23 Decoupling (+)PP1 and KT_PLUS_PP1_1_PP2_1 Disconnection
CP(-)PP1
KT_PLUS_WU
Decoupling of (+)AMB and CP KT_PLUS_PP1_2_PP2_2 Disconnection
(+)PP KT_PLUS_WU
Decoupling of (-)AMB and CP KT_MINUS_WU Disconnection
(-)PP KT_MINUS_PP1_1_PP2_1 Disconnection
Decoupling of (+)AMB and CP KT_MINUS_WU Disconnection
(+) BU KT_MINUS_PP1_2_PP2_2 Disconnection
24 Message (+)PP1-3 and (+) BU KT_PLUS_PP1_3_PP2_3 Connectivity
KT_PLUS_WU Connectivity
Message (+)PP1-4 and (+) BU KT_PLUS_PP1_4_PP2_4 Connectivity
KT_PLUS_WU Connectivity
Message (-)BU and KT_MINUS_WU Connectivity
CP(-)PP1-3 KT_MINUS_PP1_3_PP2_3 Connectivity
Message (-)BU and KT_MINUS_WU Connectivity
CP(-)PP1-4 KT_MINUS_PP1_4_PP2_4 Connectivity
25 Message (+)AMB and CP (+) KT_PLUS_AMB Connectivity
Message CP (-)BU and KT_MINUS_WU Connectivity
(-)AMB KT_MINUS_AMB Connectivity
20. Remove command "KPZ" of MIU through SEP2.


NO. DISCONNECTION
(+) BU KT_PLUS_WU
Decoupling of (+)AMB and CP KT_MINUS_WU Disconnection
(+) BU KT_MINUS_AMB
28 Message (+)PP1-3 and (+) BU KT_PLUS_PP1_1_PP2_1 Connectivity
KT_PLUS_PP
22. Send command "Simulation of CND" .

23. Check the value of signal “KND” of MIU through SEP2.
(a) Check the decoupling between the signals KT_PLUS_PP1_1_PP2_1
and KT_PLUS_PP.

Confidential
24. Check the connectivity between CP (+),(-)PP AMB and CP (+),(-)PP.

NO. DISCONNECTION
31 Message (+)AMB and CP KT_PLUS_AMB Connectivity
(+)PP KT_PLUS_PP
Message CP (-)PP and KT_MINUS_PP Connectivity
(-)AMB KT_MINUS_AMB
PP KT_PLUS_PP
Message (+)AMB and CP KT_PLUS_AMB Connectivity
(+)PP KT_PLUS_PP
25. Check the absence of signal “Stop”, “Back”, “Close” and presence of
26. Check the messages between CP (+),(-)PP AMB and CP (+),(-)BU.
(a) If Control program number is 1, check the connectivity between the
signals.
NO. DISCONNECTION
BU KT_PLUS_WU
Message CP (-)BU and (-)AMB KT_MINUS_WU Connectivity
KT_MINUS_AMB
(b) If Control program number is 3, check the decoupling between the

signals.
NO. DISCONNECTION
33 Decoupling (+)AMB and CP (+) KT_PLUS_AMB Disconnection
BU KT_PLUS_WU
Decoupling CP (-)BU and KT_MINUS_WU Disconnection
(-)AMB KT_MINUS_AMB

Confidential
27. Check messages between CP+,(-)PP3 and CP+,(-)PP.

NO. DISCONNECTION
34 Message (+)PP1-3 and KT_PLUS_PP1_3_PP2_3 Connectivity
CP(+)PP
KT_PLUS_PP
Message CP (-)BU and KT_MINUS_PP Connectivity
(-)AMB KT_MINUS_PP1_3_PP2_3
28. Send command “switch ON bus Р”.

29. Check the decoupling between CP +,(-)PP AMB and CP (+),(-)BU.
NO. DISCONNECTION
36 Decoupling (+)AMB and CP KT_PLUS_AMB Disconnection
(+) BU KT_PLUS_WU
Decoupling CP (-)BU and KT_MINUS_WU Disconnection
(-)AMB KT_MINUS_AMB
30. Send command "Simulation of СВК" (E_IMIT_SWK).

31. Check "СВК1","Вкл.ДБТ", removal of "KND" of MIU through SEP2.
32. Check messages between CP (+),(-)PP AMB and CP (+),(-)BU .
If attribute for “dangerous current line control” is present, check the connectivity between
the signals,

NO. DISCONNECTION
BU
KT_PLUS_WU
KT_MINUS_AMB
If attribute for “dangerous current line control” is absent, check the decoupling between the
signals,
NO. DISCONNECTION
39 Decoupling (+)AMB and CP (+) KT_PLUS_AMB Disconnection
BU KT_PLUS_WU
Decoupling CP (-)BU and (-)AMB KT_MINUS_WU Disconnection
KT_MINUS_AMB

Confidential
33. Send command "Simulation of Booster”.
34. Check presence of signal “Simulation of Booster”, <СВК>, <Вкл.ДБТ> of
MIU through SEP2.
35. Remove command "Simulation of СВК".
36. Verify the connectivity and disconnection of check points given in below
table.
NO. DISCONNECTION
1 Message (+)AMB and CP (+) BU KT_PLUS_AMB Connectivity
KT_PLUS_WU
KT_MINUS_AMB
2 Message (+)AMB(А) and CP KT_PLUS_AMB Connectivity
(+)PP KT_PLUS_PP
Message CP (-)PP and (-)AMB(А) KT_MINUS_PP Connectivity
KT_MINUS_AMB
3 Decoupling of (+)PP1-4 and KT_PLUS_PP1_4_PP2 Disconnection
_4
CP(+) BU
KT_PLUS_WU
Decoupling of CP(-)BU and KT_MINUS_WU Disconnection
(-)PP1-4 KT_MINUS_PP1_4_PP
2_4
37. Check the presence of signals "Close", "Normal", "Launch permitted (A)
(B)" and absence of “Stop”, “Back”.
38. Remove command “switch ON bus Р”.
39. Check the presence of "Stop", "Back", "Normal", “Launch permitted (A)
(B)” and absence of “Close”.
40. Send command "680" using SEP2.
41. Similar to Step 48
46. Remove command "680" of MIU through SEP2.
47. Send command "KPZ" of MIU through SEP2
48. Check messages between (+)AMB and CP (+) BU.

Confidential

NO. DISCONNECTION
BU KT_PLUS_WU

50. Remove command "KPZ" of MIU through SEP2
57. Check of continuity between (+)AMB and CP (+) BU.

NO. DISCONNECTION
57 Message (+)AMB and CP KT_PLUS_AMB Connectivity
(+) BU KT_PLUS_WU

63. Check for connection of РА1-4 using SEP2.
64. Send command KL using SEP2.
65. Check deflection of РА1-4 using SEP2 and check the PA1-4 for the
below values,
S.NO PA EXPECTED VALUE
MIN MAX
1 PA1 -2.5 2.5
2 PA2 19.8 27.2
3 PA3 -2.5 2.5
4 PA4 19.8 27.2
66. Remove command KL using SEP2.

67. Check the deflection of РА1-4 using SEP2 and check the PA1-4 for the
below values.

Confidential
MIN MAX
1 PA1 -2.5 2.5
2 PA2 -2.5 2.5
3 PA3 -2.5 2.5
4 PA4 -2.5 2.5
68. Check the issue of command “Switching-off Fin Simulator(IRA)” using

SEP2.
S.NO. SIGNAL NAME SIGNAL TYPE STATUS DESCRIPTION
79 E_IMIT_SND_WIH DIP OFF Removal of "Simulation of
CND"
E_IMIT_ND_SRS DIP OFF Removal of command
"Simulation of Booster"
80 E_OTKL_MD DOP ON Disconnect bus MD
E_OTKL_PP1_PP2 DOP ON Disconnection of bus
PP1,2
81 E_ISH_PWU_WIH DOP ON Issue initial PTD
E_ISH_PWU_WIH DOP OFF Remove initial PTD
82 E_OTM_ST_A_WIH DOP ON Issue and remove
E_OTM_ST_A DOP ON command «Cancellation of
E_OTM_ST_A_WIH DOP OFF start (А)»
E_OTM_ST_A DOP OFF
70. Similar to step 16

71. Check for the absence of following signals using SEP2,
(a) Absence of signal <KND>.
(b) Absence of signal <СВК>.
(c) Absence of signal <Wkl. DBT>.
(d) Absence of signal <Simulation of Booster>.
72. Check for the absence of signal "AMB connected".
73. Check for the absence of voltage on "bus AMB”.
74. Remove voltage from bridge circuit, issue and remove of commands
“Initial PTD” and “Cancellation of start (А)”.
Outputs


Confidential
Description
This requirement will verify the integrated interaction of СК311, Programmable Timing
Device (PTD), On-board Automation Block in mode НС.
Note:
Inputs
Work type
Processing
2. Analyze attribute “Control program number of BS”.
(a) If the control program number is not 1 or 3, the test should not be
performed
3. Checking the presence warhead attributes.
(a) Read the presence of signal E_PRZN_RSZ_WH. Attribute for
presence of “RPP”.
(b) Read the attribute “RPP”.
(c) Read the presence of signal E_JIDK_TPS_OTST. Attribute for the
presence of “Liquid in TLC is absent”.
(d) Verify the presence of signals "Simulator of BS", "Attribute 1 BS",
"Attribute 2 BS".
4. Analyze the attributes “X2 is docked”.
(a) This test should not be performed if attribute “X2 is docked” is not
selected and input signal C_X2_SOSTIK is not present.

Confidential
5. Setting into operating condition of bridge
(a) If value of E_UMIT is not within range, stop the execution of test.
(b) Feed 24V voltage to the Bridge and connected the diagonals to the
meter.
(a) Set the check point to initial.
1.5 KΩ, Bridge 40 KΩ.
(d) Issue and remove command “Cancellation of start (А)”.
7. Check the decoupling between CP (+),(-)PP AMB and CP (+),(-)PP.
STEP STEP DESCRIPTION PARAMETER SIGNAL CONNECTIVITY /
NO. DISCONNECTION
8 Decoupling of (+)AMB and KT_PLUS_AMB Disconnection
CP (+)PP
KT_PLUS_PP
Decoupling of CP (-)PP and KT_MINUS_PP Disconnection
(-)AMB KT_MINUS_AM
B
8. Check the issue of command "Command НС” using SEP2.

9. Check the presence of signal “Permission НС” using SEP2.
10. Verify the command “Switch OFF of MD bus”.
(a) Issue command “Switch OFF of MD bus”. In absence of signal
“Switch OFF of MD bus” stop the test.
(b) Remove command “Switch OFF of MD bus”. In presence of signal
“Switch OFF of MD bus” stop the test.
11. Check absence of "Stop", "Back", "Close", "Normal", “Launch permitted
(A)(B)”.
12. Issue command “MD bus switch OFF”.
13. Check the presence of signal "Stop", "Back" and absence of “Close”,
“Normal” “Launch permitted (A)(B)”.

DISCONNECTION
(+) BU KT_PLUS_PP

Confidential
Decoupling of CP (-)BU and KT_MINUS_PP Disconnection

(-)AMB KT_MINUS_AMB
15. Send command "Connect AMB to SEP1(A)" and verify the presence of
signal "AMB connected".
16. Check presence of voltages on AMB(24.0 to 30.0V) bus and absence of
voltage in BU(-0.3 to 0.3V) bus.
17. Issue the command "Simulation of command".
18. Check passage of signal KND using SEP2.
19. Send command "Simulation of СВК".
20. Check the presence of signals "KND", "СВК1" using SEP2.
21. Send command ОА1 using SEP2.
22. Check the absence of signal KND using SEP2.
23. Check the presence of signal “СВК1”, “Вкл.ДБТ” and absence of signal
“KND" using SEP2.
24. Check voltages on buses BU.
25. Send command "Simulation of acceleration".
(a) Set the signal E_BLOK_KPA_BS as True.
(b) Read the input signal E_KPA_BS_ZABLOK. If it is False, set the
signal E_IMIT_PERGR_K as True.
(c) If E_KPA_BS_ZABLOK is True, stop the test.
26. Send command "Simulation of Booster".
27. Check presence of "Simulation of Booster", <СВК>, <Вкл.ДБТ> and
absence of <KND> using SEP2.
28. Check presence of <Вкл.ДБТ>, "Simulation of Booster" and absence of
<СВК1>, <KND> using SEP2
29. Check the presence of signal <Stop>,<Back>,<OK> and absence of
“Close”, “Launch permitted (A)(B)”.
30. Send command "Permission to activate BU" using SEP2.
31. Send command "Send command "FD" using SEP2.
32. Send command "BFD" using SEP2.
33. Send command "680" using SEP2.
34. Check the presence of signal “Stop”, “Back” and absence of “Normal”,
“Close”, “Launch permitted (A)(B)”
35. Send command "ДП(M30_M05)" using SEP2.
36. Send command "KL" using SEP2.
37. Check of signal "Correctness of BS".
38. Check for connection of "Connection IRA (Fin Simulator)" using SEP2.

Confidential
39. Check "Check deflection of РА1-4 " using SEP2 and check PA1-4 for the
below values,
MIN MAX
1 PA1 -2.5 2.5
2 PA2 19.8 27.2
3 PA3 -2.5 2.5
4 PA4 19.8 27.2
40. Remove command "Connect AMB to SEP1(A) and (B)".

41. If the attribute “Hydro system” is not present, issue the command
"Switching-off IRA(Fin Simulator)" using SEP2.
42. Removal of commands "Simulation of command", "Simulation of СВК"
and "Simulation of Booster".
43. Remove command "KL" using SEP2.
44. Remove command "680" using SEP2.
45. Remove command "BFD" using SEP2.
46. Remove command "FD" using SEP2.
47. Remove command ОА1 using SEP2.
48. Remove command "Simulation of acceleration".
49. Issue and remove command “Cancellation of start (А)”, “Initial PTD“ and
“Switch ON bus Р”.
S.N STEP SIGNAL CONNECTIVITY / PARAMET
O. DESCRIPTION DISCONNECTION ER NO
1 Decoupling of KT_PLUS_AMB Disconnection
(+)AMB and CP (+)
KT_PLUS_WU
BU
Decoupling of CP KT_MINUS_WU Disconnection
(-)BU and (-)AMB KT_MINUS_AMB

Confidential
51. Remove command “MD bus switch OFF”.
52. Check for the absence “Close”, “Normal”, “Stop”, “Back”, “Launch
permitted (A)(B)”.
53. Check absence of signals KND, СВК1, Вкл.ДБТ, Simulation of Booster
using SEP2.
54. Verify the absence of following signals using SEP2.
(a) Verify the absence of signal <KND>.
(b) Verify the absence of signal <СВК>.
(c) Verify the absence of signal <Вкл.ДБТ>.
(d) Verify the absence of signal "Simulation of Booster".
55. Check for the absence of voltage in AMB(-0.3 to 0.3V) bus and BU(-0.3
to 0.3V) bus.
56. Check the decoupling between CP +,(-)PP AMB and CP +,(-)PP .
S.NO STEP DESCRIPTION SIGNAL CONNECTIVITY / DISCONNECTION
1 Decoupling of KT_PLUS_AMB Disconnection
(+)AMB and CP KT_PLUS_PP
(+)PP
Decoupling of CP KT_MINUS_PP Disconnection
(-)PP and (-)AMB KT_MINUS_AMB
57. Remove the following commands,

(a) Remove voltage from bridge 1.5 KΩ and disconnect the diagonal to
output.
(b) Issue and remove command “Initial PTD”.
(c) Remove the command “Unlock COE BS”.
(d) Remove the command “Simulation of acceleration”.
Output

Confidential
3.1.2.24 CHECKING THE CONNECTION OF AMB TO SEP1 BUS (1064)

Description
This requirement will check the integrated interaction of СК311, PTD, On-board Automation
Block.
Inputs
Work type
Processing
2. This test should not be performed if the attribute “Simulation of FIN sensors”
is selected.
3. Issue the command “MD bus switch OFF”.
4. Issue and remove command “Initial PTD”.
5. Check for the absence of voltage on bus AMB.
6. Check for the absence of signals "Stop", "Back", “Normal” and “Close”.
7. Issue and remove command "Connect AMB to SEP1(B)" and verify the
presence of signal “AMB connected”.
8. Check for the presence of voltage on bus AMB (24.0 to 30.0 V)
9. Check for the absence of signals "Stop", "Back", “Normal” and “Close”.
10. Issue and remove command (+)(-) “Cancel of start (B)”.
11. Verify the absence of signal “AMB connected”.
13. Issue and remove command “ Initial PTD“.
Output

Confidential
3.1.2.25 CHECKING LAUNCH CIRCUITS ON COMMAND РС (1066)

Description
This requirement will check integrated interaction of CK311.
Inputs
Work type
Processing
2. This test should not be performed if the attribute “Simulation of FIN
sensors” is selected.
3. Issue and remove command “Initial PTD” and “Cancellation of start (А)”.
4. Check for the presence of signal “X2 is docked” of SEP2.
5. Check for the absence of signal "АМB connected".
7. Remove the command “Disconnection of bus PP1,2“.
8. Issue and remove the command “Permission to start(А)”.
9. Verify the presence of signal “Launch permitted (A)”.
10. Issue and remove the command “Cancellation of start (А)”.
11. Verify the absence of “signal CP(A)”.
12. Verify the absence of signal "AMB connected" and the absence of
voltage (0V) on bus AMB with ±0.3 tolerance.
13. Issue and remove the command "Permission to start (B)”.
14. Verify the presence of signal “Launch permitted (B)”.
15. Issue and remove the command (+)(-) “Cancellation start (B)".
16. Verify the absence of signal “Launch permitted (B)”.
17. Verify the absence of signal "AMB connected" and the absence of
voltage (0V) on bus AMB with ±0.3 tolerance.
18. Verify the presence of signal “Disconnection of bus PP1,2”.
19. Issue and remove the command "Permission to Launch (A)”.
20. Verify the absence of signal “Launch permitted (A)”.
21. Issue and remove the command “Cancellation of start (А)”.
22. Verify the absence of signal “Launch permitted (A)”.
23. Issue and remove command “Initial PTD” and “Cancellation of start (А)”.
Output

Confidential

SWITCHING ELEMENTS AND CIRCUITS OF ARTICLE (1072)
Description
This check is meant for checking the insulation resistance, initial condition of switching
elements and circuits of article
Note:
1. For checking the insulation between the signals the Measurement Bridge 40 KΩ will
be used for the parameter 51. The sequence for bridge measurement includes the
following steps,
(c) If the INS code if 72, the measurement bridge output is read after time exposure
of T3 AMD or measure the bridge output after 3 seconds. The output should be
in range 0.1V to 14.0V
Input
Work type

Confidential
Processing
1. The test should not be performed if GPS bus is switched ON.
3. Issue command “Disconnect shunt network”.
4. Set the check point to initial position.
5. Set the bridge 1.5 KΩ and bridge 40 KΩ into operating condition
(a) The test will not be performed if the input to bridge is not in range of 23.5
to 24.5 V.
(b) Feed 24V voltage to the Bridge (40 KΩ, 1.5 KΩ) and connected the
diagonals to the meter.
6. Verify the warhead circuits.
(a) If the work type is “Self-check with external connection” and signal for
“Self Control” is not present, stop the test. If the signal for “Self Control”
is present, the status of following warhead signals shall be verified.
S.NO. SIGNAL NAME SIGNAL STATUS DESCRIPTION
TYPE
1. E_PRZN_1_BS DIP ON Presence of “Attribute 1 BS”
3. E_PRZN_2_BS_KPA DIP ON Presence of “Attribute 2 BS
(COE)(К)”
4. E_ISHODNOE_BS DIP ON Presence of “Initial BS“
5. E_IMITATOR_BS DIP ON Presence of “Simulator of BS”
6. E_ZPR_PR_3_K DOP ON Issue of "Query of program 3"
7. E_PREKR_PROWER DIP ON presence of "Stopping the
OK checks"
8. E_KPA_BS_ZABLOK DIP OFF Presence of attribute <COE BS is
locked>. If present then stop the
execution of test
9. E_ZPR_PR_3_K DOP OFF Remove of "Query of program 3"
10. E_KPA_BS_ZABLOK DIP ON Presence of attribute <COE BS is
locked>. If not present, stop the
execution of test
13. E_PRZN_2_BS_KPA DIP ON Presence of “Attribute 2 BS
(COE)(К)”
15. E_IMITATOR_BS DIP ON Presence of “Simulator of BS”

Confidential
S.NO. SIGNAL NAME SIGNAL STATUS DESCRIPTION

TYPE
16. E_ZPR_PR_1_K DOP ON Issue of "Query of program 1"
17. E_KPA_BS_ZABLOK DIP OFF Presence of attribute <COE BS is
blocked>. If present then stop the
execution of test
18. E_ZPR_PR_1_K DOP OFF Remove of "Query of program 1"
19. E_KPA_BS_ZABLOK DIP ON Presence of attribute <COE BS is
blocked>. If not present then stop
the execution of test
21. E_PRZN_2_BS DIP OFF Presence of “Attribute 2 BS”
22. E_PRZN_2_BS_KPA DIP OFF Presence of “Attribute 2 BS
(COE)(К)”
24. E_IMITATOR_BS DIP OFF Presence of “Simulator of BS”
(b) If the work type is other than self check with external connections, read
the control program number for warhead(BS). If the number is 1 perform
step (i) and if the number is 3 perform step (ii).
i. Verify the status of following signals of warhead if BS = 1.
S.NO. SIGNAL NAME SIG TYPE STATUS PARAMETER DESCRIPTION
1. E_PRZN_1_BS DIP ON Presence of “Attribute
1 BS”
2 BS”
3. E_PRZN_2_BS_ DIP ON Presence of “Attribute
KPA 2 BS (COE)(К)”
4. E_ISHODNOE_B DIP ON Presence of “Initial
S BS“
5. E_IMITATOR_BS DIP ON Presence of
“Simulator of BS”
6. E_ZPR_PR_1_K DOP ON Issue of "Query of
program 1"
7. E_RAZR_PR_UK DIP ON Checking the
BS presence <Permission
for check>
ii. Analyze the signals of warhead if BS = 3.

Confidential
S.NO. SIGNAL NAME SIG TYPE STATUS PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

1 BS”
2. E_PRZN_2_BS DIP OFF Presence of “Attribute
2 BS”
3. E_PRZN_2_BS_ DIP OFF Presence of “Attribute
KPA 2 BS (COE)(К)”
4. E_ISHODNOE_B DIP ON Presence of “Initial
S BS“
5. E_IMITATOR_BS DIP OFF Presence of
“Simulator of BS”
6. E_ZPR_PR_3_K DOP ON Issue of "Query of
program 3"
7. E_RAZR_PR_UK DIP ON Checking the
BS presence <Permission
for check>
(c) Check for the absence of signal E_ISHODHOE_2(“initial 2”).

7. Analyze the attribute “RPP”
(a) If work mode is “Control”, the test will be stopped if attribute “Dangerous
current line control” is not normal.
ATTRIBUTE “DANGEROUS SIGNAL FOR PRESENCE OF “DANGEROUS
CURRENT LINE CONTROL” CURRENT LINE CONTROL”
1 0
0 1
(b) The test will be stop stopped if attribute “RPP” is not normal.
ATTRIBUTE “RPP” SIGNAL FOR PRESENCE OF OPERATION
“RPP”
1 0 Stop the test
1 1 Perform step 11
0 1 Stop the test
(c) If work type is CK311 / K312 go to Step 5 or go to Step 7.

Confidential
8. The insulation between the check points given in below table will be verified.
S.NO. STEP DESCRIPTION CHECK POINTS CONNECTIVITY /
DISCONNECTION
1. Check the decoupling between KT_PLUS_BA_A Disconnection
CP +SEP1(A) and bus (+)27V NI_27V_PLUS
GPS
2. Check the decoupling between KT_MINUS_BA_A Disconnection
CP -SEP1(A) and bus (-)27V NI_27V_MINUS
GPS
3. Check the decoupling between KT_PLUS_BA_A Disconnection
CP +SEP1(A) and Body KORPUS_OK
4. Check the decoupling between KORPUS_OK Disconnection
Body and CP +SEP1(A) KT_PLUS_BA_A
Body and CP -SEP1(A) KT_MINUS_BA_A
Body and bus (+)27V GPS NI_27V_PLUS
Body and bus (-)27V GPS NI_27V_MINUS
8. Check the decoupling between NI_27V_PLUS Disconnection
bus (+)27V GPS and Body KORPUS_OK
9. The insulation between the following check points will be verified.

DISCONNECTION
13 Decoupling of (-)27V GPS, Body NI_27V_MINUS Disconnection
KORPUS_OK
(a) If work type is CK311 / K312 go to Step 549, else go to Step 14.
10. The insulation between the following check points will be verified.

Confidential

DISCONNECTION
1 Check the decoupling between KT_PLUS_AMB Disconnection
CP (+)AMB and CP (-)AMB KT_MINUS_AMB
CP (+)AMB and CP +SEP1(A) KT_PLUS_BA_A
CP (+)AMB and CP +SEP1(B) KT_PLUS_BA_B
CP (+)AMB and CP -SEP1(A) KT_MINUS_BA_A
CP (+)AMB and CP -SEP1(B) KT_MINUS_BA_B
CP (+)AMB and CP (+)PP KT_PLUS_PP
CP (+)AMB and CP (-)PP KT_MINUS_PP
CP (+)AMB and CP (+) BU KT_PLUS_WU
9 Check the decoupling between KT_MINUS_AMB Disconnection
CP (-)AMB and CP +SEP1(A) KT_PLUS_BA_A
CP (-)AMB and CP +SEP1(B) KT_PLUS_BA_B
CP (-)AMB and CP -SEP1(A) KT_MINUS_BA_A
CP (-)AMB and CP -SEP1(B) KT_MINUS_BA_B
CP (-)AMB and CP (+)PP KT_PLUS_PP
CP (-)AMB and CP (+) BU KT_PLUS_WU
15 Check the decoupling between KT_MINUS_PP Disconnection
CP (-)PP and CP (+)AMB KT_PLUS_AMB
CP (-)PP and CP (-)AMB KT_MINUS_AMB
CP (-)PP and CP +SEP1(A) KT_PLUS_BA_A

Confidential

DISCONNECTION
CP (-)PP and CP -SEP1(A) KT_MINUS_BA_A
CP (-)PP and Body KORPUS_OK
CP (-)PP and CP BZP APS KT_BZP_APS
CP (-)PP and CP (+) BU KT_PLUS_WU
CP (-)PP and CP (-)BU KT_MINUS_WU
CP (-)PP and bus (+)27V GPS NI_27V_PLUS
CP (-)PP and bus (-)27V GPS NI_27V_MINUS
25 Check the decoupling between KT_PLUS_PP Disconnection
CP (+)PP and CP (+)AMB KT_PLUS_AMB
CP (+)PP and CP (-)AMB KT_MINUS_AMB
CP (+)PP and CP +SEP1(A) KT_PLUS_BA_A
CP (+)PP and CP -SEP1(A) KT_MINUS_BA_A
CP (+)PP and Body KORPUS_OK
CP (+)PP and CP (+) BU KT_PLUS_WU
CP (+)PP and CP (-)BU KT_MINUS_WU
CP (+)PP and bus (+)27V GPS NI_27V_PLUS
CP (+)PP and bus (-)27V GPS NI_27V_MINUS
34 Check the decoupling between KT_PLUS_BA_A Disconnection
CP +SEP1(A) and CP (+)PP KT_PLUS_PP
CP +SEP1(A) and CP (-)PP KT_MINUS_PP

Confidential

DISCONNECTION
CP +SEP1(A) and CP (+) BU KT_PLUS_WU
CP +SEP1(A) and CP (-)BU KT_MINUS_WU
CP +SEP1(A) and bus (-)27V NI_27V_MINUS
GPS
CP +SEP1(A) and CP BZP APS KT_BZP_APS
CP +SEP1(A) and CP KT_BZP_TPS
BZP(TPS)
CP +SEP1(A) and CP (+)PP1- KT_PLUS_PP1_1_PP2_
1, PP2-1 1
CP +SEP1(A) and CP (-)PP1-1, KT_MINUS_PP1_1_PP2
PP2-1 _1
2, PP2-2 2
PP2-2 _2
3, PP2-3 3
PP2-3 _3
4, PP2-4 4
PP2-4 _4

Confidential

DISCONNECTION
CP +SEP1(A) and bus (+)PP PLUS_PP_AMB_A
AMB(А)
CP +SEP1(A) and bus (-)PP MINUS_PP_AMB_A
AMB(А)
CP +SEP1(A) and bus (+)PP PLUS_PP_AMB_B
AMB(B)
CP +SEP1(A) and bus (-)PP MINUS_PP_AMB_B
AMB(Б)
CP +SEP1(A) and bus (+)PP PLUS_PP_DBT_A
DBT(A)
CP +SEP1(A) and bus (-)PP MINUS_PP_DBT_A
DBT(A)
CP +SEP1(A) and bus (+)PP PLUS_PP_DBT_B
DBT(B)
CP +SEP1(A) and bus (-)PP MINUS_PP_DBT_B
DBT(B)
CP +SEP1(A) and bus (+)PP PLUS_PP_GGS_A
GGS(A)
CP +SEP1(A) and bus (-)PP MINUS_PP_GGS_A
GGS(A)
CP +SEP1(A) and bus (+)PP PLUS_PP_GGS_B
GGS(B)
CP +SEP1(A) and bus (-)PP MINUS_PP_GGS_B
GGS(B)
61 Check the decoupling between KT_PLUS_BA_B Disconnection

Confidential

DISCONNECTION
CP +SEP1(B) and CP BZP APS KT_BZP_APS
CP +SEP1(B) and CP KT_BZP_TPS
BZP(TPS)
CP +SEP1(B) and Body KORPUS_OK
CP +SEP1(B) and CP (+)PP1- KT_PLUS_PP1_1_PP2_
1, PP2-1 1
CP +SEP1(B) and CP (-)PP1-1, KT_MINUS_PP1_1_PP2
PP2-1 _1
2, PP2-2 2
PP2-2 _2
3, PP2-3 3
PP2-3 _3
4, PP2-4 4
PP2-4 _4
CP +SEP1(B) and bus (+)PP PLUS_PP_AMB_A
AMB(А)
CP +SEP1(B) and bus (-)PP MINUS_PP_AMB_A
AMB(А)

Confidential

DISCONNECTION
CP +SEP1(B) and bus (+)PP PLUS_PP_AMB_B
AMB(B)
CP +SEP1(B) and bus (-)PP MINUS_PP_AMB_B
AMB(Б)
CP +SEP1(B) and bus (+)PP PLUS_PP_DBT_A
DBT(A)
CP +SEP1(B) and bus (-)PP MINUS_PP_DBT_A
DBT(A)
CP +SEP1(B) and bus (+)PP PLUS_PP_DBT_B
DBT(B)
CP +SEP1(B) and bus (-)PP MINUS_PP_DBT_B
DBT(B)
CP +SEP1(B) and bus (+)PP PLUS_PP_GGS_A
GGS(A)
CP +SEP1(B) and bus (-)PP MINUS_PP_GGS_A
GGS(A)
CP +SEP1(B) and bus (+)PP PLUS_PP_GGS_B
GGS(B)
CP +SEP1(B) and bus (-)PP MINUS_PP_GGS_B
GGS(B)
84 Check the decoupling between KT_MINUS_BA_A Disconnection
CP -SEP1(A) and CP BZP APS KT_BZP_APS
CP -SEP1(A) and Body KORPUS_OK
CP -SEP1(A) and CP (+)PP KT_PLUS_PP

Confidential

DISCONNECTION
CP -SEP1(A) and CP (-)PP KT_MINUS_PP
CP -SEP1(A) and CP (+) BU KT_PLUS_WU
CP -SEP1(A) and CP (-)BU KT_MINUS_WU
90 Check the decoupling between KT_MINUS_BA_B Disconnection
CP -SEP1(B) and CP BZP APS KT_BZP_APS
91 Check the decoupling between KT_MINUS_WU Disconnection
CP (-)BU and CP (+)AMB KT_PLUS_AMB
CP (-)BU and CP (-)AMB KT_MINUS_AMB
CP (-)BU and CP (+)PP KT_PLUS_PP
CP (-)BU and CP (-)PP KT_MINUS_PP
CP (-)BU and CP +SEP1(A) KT_PLUS_BA_A
CP (-)BU and CP -SEP1(A) KT_MINUS_BA_A
CP (-)BU and bus (+)27V GPS NI_27V_PLUS
CP (-)BU and bus (-)27V GPS NI_27V_MINUS
CP (-)BU and Body KORPUS_OK
100 Check the decoupling between KT_PLUS_WU Disconnection
CP (+) BU and CP (+)PP KT_PLUS_PP
CP (+) BU and CP (-)PP KT_MINUS_PP
CP (+) BU and CP +SEP1(A) KT_PLUS_BA_A
CP (+) BU and CP -SEP1(A) KT_MINUS_BA_A
CP (+) BU and CP (-)BU KT_MINUS_WU

Confidential

DISCONNECTION
CP (+) BU and bus (+)27V GPS NI_27V_PLUS
CP (+) BU and bus (-)27V GPS NI_27V_MINUS
CP (+) BU and Body KORPUS_OK
108 Check the decoupling between KT_MINUS_PP1_1_PP2 Disconnection
CP (-)PP1-1, PP2-1 and CP _1
(+)PP1-1, PP2-1 KT_PLUS_PP1_1_PP2_
1
CP (-)PP1-2, PP2-2 and CP _2
2
CP (-)PP1-3, PP2-3 and CP _3
3
CP (-)PP1-4, PP2-4 and CP _4
4
112 Check the decoupling between KT_PLUS_PP1_1_PP2_ Disconnection
CP (+)PP1-1, PP2-1 and CP 1
2
CP (-)PP1-2, PP2-2 and CP _2
1
3
CP (-)PP1-3, PP2-3 and CP _3

Confidential

DISCONNECTION
1
4
CP (-)PP1-4, PP2-4 and CP _4
1
CP (-)PP1-1, PP2-1 and CP _1
2
CP (-)PP1-1, PP2-1 and CP _1
(-)PP1-2, PP2-2 KT_MINUS_PP1_2_PP2
_2
CP (-)PP1-1, PP2-1 and CP _1
3
CP (-)PP1-1, PP2-1 and CP _1
_3
CP (-)PP1-1, PP2-1 and CP _1
4
CP (-)PP1-1, PP2-1 and CP _1
_4

Confidential

DISCONNECTION
3
CP (-)PP1-3, PP2-3 and CP _3
2
4
CP (-)PP1-4, PP2-4 and CP _4
2
CP (-)PP1-2, PP2-2 and CP _2
3
CP (-)PP1-2, PP2-2 and CP _2
_3
CP (-)PP1-2, PP2-2 and CP _2
4
CP (-)PP1-2, PP2-2 and CP _2
_4
4
CP (-)PP1-4, PP2-4 and CP _4

Confidential

DISCONNECTION
3
CP (-)PP1-3, PP2-3 and CP _3
4
CP (-)PP1-3, PP2-3 and CP _3
_4
BZP APS KT_BZP_APS
BZP APS KT_BZP_APS
BZP APS KT_BZP_APS
BZP APS KT_BZP_APS
+SEP1(A) KT_PLUS_BA_A

Confidential

DISCONNECTION
+SEP1(B) KT_PLUS_BA_B
CP (-)PP1-1, PP2-1 and CP _1
CP (-)PP1-2, PP2-2 and CP _2
CP (-)PP1-3, PP2-3 and CP _3
CP (-)PP1-4, PP2-4 and CP _4
CP (-)PP1-1, PP2-1 and CP _1
CP (-)PP1-2, PP2-2 and CP _2
CP (-)PP1-3, PP2-3 and CP _3
CP (-)PP1-4, PP2-4 and CP _4
CP (+)PP1-1, PP2-1 and Body 1

Confidential

DISCONNECTION
KORPUS_OK
KORPUS_OK
KORPUS_OK
KORPUS_OK
CP (-)PP1-1, PP2-1 and Body _1
KORPUS_OK
KORPUS_OK
Check the decoupling between KT_MINUS_PP1_3_PP2 Disconnection
162 CP (-)PP1-3, PP2-3 and Body _3
KORPUS_OK
KORPUS_OK
164 Check the decoupling between KORPUS_OK Disconnection
Body and CP (+)PP1-1, PP2-1 KT_PLUS_PP1_1_PP2_
1
2
3
4
Body and CP (-)PP1-1, PP2-1 KT_MINUS_PP1_1_PP2
_1

Confidential

DISCONNECTION
_2
_3
_4
Body and CP (+)AMB KT_PLUS_AMB
Body and CP (-)AMB KT_MINUS_AMB
Body and CP +SEP1(B) KT_PLUS_BA_B
Body and CP (-) SEP1(B) KT_MINUS_BA_B
Body and CP (+)PP KT_PLUS_PP
Body and CP (-)PP KT_MINUS_PP
Body and CP (+) BU KT_PLUS_WU
Body and CP (-)BU KT_MINUS_WU
Body and bus (+)PP GGS(A) PLUS_PP_GGS_A
Body and bus (-)PP GGS(A) MINUS_PP_GGS_A
Body and bus (+)PP GGS(B) PLUS_PP_GGS_B
Body and bus (-)PP GGS(B) MINUS_PP_GGS_B
Body and bus (+)PP DBT(A) PLUS_PP_DBT_A

Confidential

DISCONNECTION
Body and bus (-)PP DBT(A) MINUS_PP_DBT_A
Body and bus (+)PP DBT(B) PLUS_PP_DBT_B
Body and bus (-)PP DBT(B) MINUS_PP_DBT_B
Body and bus (+)PP AMB(А) PLUS_PP_AMB_A
Body and bus (-)PP AMB(А) MINUS_PP_AMB_A
Body and bus (+)PP AMB(B) PLUS_PP_AMB_B
Body and bus (-)PP AMB(Б) MINUS_PP_AMB_B
Body and CP BZP APS KT_BZP_APS
Body and CP BZP(TPS) KT_BZP_TPS
194 Check decoupling between bus PLUS_PP_GGS_A Disconnection
(+)PP GGS(A) and bus (-)PP MINUS_PP_GGS_A
GGS(A)
(+)PP GGS(A) and bus (+)PP PLUS_PP_GGS_B
GGS(B)
196 Check the decoupling between PLUS_PP_GGS_A Disconnection
bus (+)PP GGS(A) and bus MINUS_PP_GGS_B
(-)PP GGS(B)
(+)PP GGS(A) and bus (+)PP PLUS_PP_DBT_A
DBT(A)
198 Decoupling of bus (+)PP PLUS_PP_GGS_A Disconnection
GGS(A) and bus (-)PP DBT(A) MINUS_PP_DBT_A
199 Check decoupling between PLUS_PP_GGS_A Disconnection
bus (+)PP GGS(A) and bus PLUS_PP_DBT_B
(+)PP DBT(B)
200 Check the decoupling between PLUS_PP_GGS_A Disconnection
bus (+)PP GGS(A) and bus MINUS_PP_DBT_B

Confidential

DISCONNECTION
(-)PP DBT(B)
201 Check decoupling between PLUS_PP_GGS_A Disconnection
bus (+)PP GGS(A) and bus PLUS_PP_AMB_A
(+)PP AMB(А)
(+)PP GGS(A) and bus (-)PP MINUS_PP_AMB_A
AMB(А)
(+)PP GGS(A) and bus (+)PP PLUS_PP_AMB_B
AMB(B)
(+)PP GGS(A) and bus (-)PP MINUS_PP_AMB_B
AMB(Б)
205 Check the decoupling between MINUS_PP_GGS_A Disconnection
bus (-)PP GGS(A) and bus PLUS_PP_GGS_B
(+)PP GGS(B)
bus (-)PP GGS(A) and bus MINUS_PP_GGS_B
(-)PP GGS(B)
207 Check decoupling between MINUS_PP_GGS_A Disconnection
bus (-)PP GGS(A) and bus PLUS_PP_DBT_A
(+)PP DBT(A)
bus (-)PP GGS(A) and bus MINUS_PP_DBT_A
(-)PP DBT(A)
bus (-)PP GGS(A) and bus PLUS_PP_DBT_B
(+)PP DBT(B)
bus (-)PP GGS(A) and bus MINUS_PP_DBT_B
(-)PP DBT(B)
211 Check decoupling between bus MINUS_PP_GGS_A Disconnection
(-)PP GGS(A) and bus (+)PP PLUS_PP_AMB_A
AMB(А)
(-)PP GGS(A) and bus (-)PP MINUS_PP_AMB_A

Confidential

DISCONNECTION
AMB(А)
(-)PP GGS(A) and bus (+)PP PLUS_PP_AMB_B
AMB(B)
(-)PP GGS(A) and bus (-)PP MINUS_PP_AMB_B
AMB(Б)
215 Check the decoupling between PLUS_PP_GGS_B Disconnection
bus (+)PP GGS(B) and bus MINUS_PP_GGS_B
(-)PP GGS(B)
216 Check decoupling between PLUS_PP_GGS_B Disconnection
bus (+)PP GGS(B) and bus PLUS_PP_DBT_A
(+)PP DBT(A)
bus (+)PP GGS(B) and bus MINUS_PP_DBT_A
(-)PP DBT(A)
218 Check decoupling between bus PLUS_PP_GGS_B Disconnection
(+)PP GGS(B) and bus (+)PP PLUS_PP_DBT_B
DBT(B)
bus (+)PP GGS(B) and bus MINUS_PP_DBT_B
(-)PP DBT(B)
(+)PP GGS(B) and bus (+)PP PLUS_PP_AMB_A
AMB(А)
(+)PP GGS(B) and bus (-)PP MINUS_PP_AMB_A
AMB(А)
222 Check decoupling between PLUS_PP_GGS_B Disconnection
bus (+)PP GGS(B) and bus PLUS_PP_AMB_B
(+)PP AMB(B)
(+)PP GGS(B) and bus (-)PP MINUS_PP_AMB_B
AMB(B)
224 Check the decoupling between MINUS_PP_GGS_B Disconnection
bus (-)PP GGS(B) and bus PLUS_PP_DBT_A

Confidential

DISCONNECTION
(+)PP DBT(A)
bus (-)PP GGS(B) and bus MINUS_PP_DBT_A
(-)PP DBT(A)
bus (-)PP GGS(B) and bus PLUS_PP_DBT_B
(+)PP DBT(B)
bus (-)PP GGS(B) and bus MINUS_PP_DBT_B
(-)PP DBT(B)
228 Check decoupling between bus MINUS_PP_GGS_B Disconnection
(-)PP GGS(B) and bus (+)PP PLUS_PP_AMB_A
AMB(А)
229 Check decoupling between bus MINUS_PP_GGS_B Disconnection
(-)PP GGS(B) and bus (-)PP MINUS_PP_AMB_A
AMB(А)
230 Check decoupling between MINUS_PP_GGS_B Disconnection
bus (-)PP GGS(B) and bus PLUS_PP_AMB_B
(+)PP AMB(B)
bus (-)PP GGS(B) and bus MINUS_PP_AMB_B
(-)PP AMB(Б)
232 Check decoupling between bus PLUS_PP_DBT_A Disconnection
(+)PP DBT(A) and bus (-)PP MINUS_PP_DBT_A
DBT(A)
(+)PP DBT(A) and bus (+)PP PLUS_PP_DBT_B
DBT(B)
234 Check decoupling between PLUS_PP_DBT_A Disconnection
bus (+)PP DBT(A) and bus MINUS_PP_DBT_B
(-)PP DBT(B)
235 Check decoupling between PLUS_PP_DBT_A Disconnection
bus (+)PP DBT(A) and bus PLUS_PP_AMB_A
(+)PP AMB(А)
(+)PP DBT(A) and bus (-)PP MINUS_PP_AMB_A

Confidential

DISCONNECTION
AMB(А)
(+)PP DBT(A) and bus (+)PP PLUS_PP_AMB_B
AMB(B)
(+)PP DBT(A) and bus (-)PP MINUS_PP_AMB_B
AMB(Б)
239 Check the decoupling between MINUS_PP_DBT_A Disconnection
bus (-)PP DBT(A) and bus PLUS_PP_DBT_B
(+)PP DBT(B)
bus (-)PP DBT(A) and bus (-)PP MINUS_PP_DBT_B
DBT(B)
241 Check decoupling between bus MINUS_PP_DBT_A Disconnection
(-)PP DBT(A) and bus (+)PP PLUS_PP_AMB_A
AMB(А)
242 Check decoupling between bus MINUS_PP_DBT_A Disconnection
(-)PP DBT(A) and bus (-)PP MINUS_PP_AMB_A
AMB(А)
243 Check decoupling between MINUS_PP_DBT_A Disconnection
bus (-)PP DBT(A) and bus PLUS_PP_AMB_B
(+)PP AMB(B)
244 Check decoupling between MINUS_PP_DBT_A Disconnection
bus (-)PP DBT(A) and bus (-)PP MINUS_PP_AMB_B
AMB(Б)
245 Check the decoupling between PLUS_PP_DBT_B Disconnection
bus (+)PP DBT(B) and bus MINUS_PP_DBT_B
(-)PP DBT(B)
246 Check decoupling between bus PLUS_PP_DBT_B Disconnection
(+)PP DBT(B) and bus (+)PP PLUS_PP_AMB_A
AMB(А)
247 Check decoupling between PLUS_PP_DBT_B Disconnection
bus (+)PP DBT(B) and bus MINUS_PP_AMB_A
(-)PP AMB(А)
248 Check decoupling between PLUS_PP_DBT_B Disconnection
bus (+)PP DBT(B) and bus PLUS_PP_AMB_B

Confidential

DISCONNECTION
(+)PP AMB(B)
249 Check decoupling between bus MINUS_PP_DBT_B Disconnection
(-)PP DBT(B) and bus (+)PP PLUS_PP_AMB_A
AMB(А)
250 Check the decoupling between MINUS_PP_DBT_B Disconnection
bus (-)PP DBT(B) and bus (-)PP MINUS_PP_AMB_A
AMB(А)
251 Check decoupling between MINUS_PP_DBT_B Disconnection
bus (-)PP DBT(B) and bus PLUS_PP_AMB_B
(+)PP AMB(Б)
bus (-)PP DBT(B) and bus (-)PP MINUS_PP_AMB_B
AMB(Б)
253 Check the decoupling between NI_27V_PLUS Disconnection
bus (+)27V GPS and CP (+)PP KT_PLUS_PP
bus (+)27V GPS and CP (-)PP KT_MINUS_PP
255 Decoupling of bus (+)27V GPS NI_27V_PLUS Disconnection
and CP (+) BU KT_PLUS_WU
256 Decoupling of bus (+)27V GPS NI_27V_PLUS Disconnection
and CP (-)BU KT_MINUS_WU
bus (+)27V GPS and CP KT_PLUS_BA_A
+SEP1(A)
bus (+)27V GPS and CP KT_MINUS_BA_A
-SEP1(A)
bus (+)27V GPS and CP KT_PLUS_BA_B
+SEP1(B)
bus (+)27V GPS and CP KT_MINUS_BA_B
-SEP1(B)
bus (+)27V GPS and CP KT_PLUS_AMB
(+)AMB

Confidential

DISCONNECTION
bus (+)27V GPS and CP KT_MINUS_AMB
(-)AMB
bus (+)27V GPS and bus (+)PP PLUS_PP_GGS_A
GGS(A)
bus (+)27V GPS and bus (-)PP MINUS_PP_GGS_A
GGS(A)
bus (+)27V GPS and bus (+)PP PLUS_PP_GGS_B
GGS(B)
bus (+)27V GPS and bus (-)PP MINUS_PP_GGS_B
GGS(B)
bus (+)27V GPS and bus (+)PP PLUS_PP_DBT_A
DBT(A)
bus (+)27V GPS and bus (-)PP MINUS_PP_DBT_A
DBT(A)
bus (+)27V GPS and bus (+)PP PLUS_PP_DBT_B
DBT(B)
bus (+)27V GPS and bus (-)PP MINUS_PP_DBT_B
DBT(B)
bus (+)27V GPS and bus (+)PP PLUS_PP_AMB_A
AMB(А)
bus (+)27V GPS and bus (-)PP MINUS_PP_AMB_A
AMB(А)
bus (+)27V GPS and bus (+)PP PLUS_PP_AMB_B
AMB(B)

Confidential

DISCONNECTION
bus (+)27V GPS and bus (-)PP MINUS_PP_AMB_B
AMB(Б)
bus (+)27V GPS and bus (+)PP PLUS_PP_DRK_A
DRK(A)
bus (+)27V GPS and bus (-)PP MINUS_PP_DRK_A
DRK(A)
bus (+)27V GPS and bus (+)PP PLUS_PP_DRK_B
DRK(B)
bus (+)27V GPS and bus (-)PP MINUS_PP_DRK_B
DRK(B)
279 Check the decoupling between NI_27V_MINUS Disconnection
bus (-)27V GPS and CP (+)PP KT_PLUS_PP
bus (-)27V GPS and CP (-)PP KT_MINUS_PP
bus (-)27V GPS and CP (+) BU KT_PLUS_WU
bus (-)27V GPS and CP (-)BU KT_MINUS_WU
283 Check decoupling between PLUS_PP_AMB_A Disconnection
bus (+)PP AMB(А) and bus MINUS_PP_AMB_A
(-)PP AMB(А)
284 Check decoupling between bus PLUS_PP_AMB_A Disconnection
(+)PP AMB(А) and bus (+)PP PLUS_PP_AMB_B
AMB(B)
285 Check the decoupling between PLUS_PP_AMB_A Disconnection
bus (+)PP AMB(А) and bus MINUS_PP_AMB_B
(-)PP AMB(Б)
286 Check the decoupling between PLUS_PP_AMB_A Disconnection
bus (+)PP AMB(А) and CP BZP KT_BZP_APS
APS
287 Check decoupling between bus PLUS_PP_AMB_B Disconnection

Confidential

DISCONNECTION
(+)PP AMB(Б) and bus (-)PP MINUS_PP_AMB_B
AMB(Б)
288 Check the decoupling between PLUS_PP_AMB_B Disconnection
bus (+)PP AMB(Б) and CP BZP KT_BZP_APS
APS
289 Check decoupling between bus MINUS_PP_AMB_A Disconnection
(-)PP AMB(А) and bus (+)PP PLUS_PP_AMB_B
AMB(Б)
290 Check decoupling between MINUS_PP_AMB_A Disconnection
bus (-)PP AMB(А) and bus MINUS_PP_AMB_B
(-)PP AMB(Б)
291 Check the decoupling between MINUS_PP_AMB_A Disconnection
bus (-)PP AMB(А) and CP BZP KT_BZP_APS
APS
292 Check the decoupling between MINUS_PP_AMB_B Disconnection
bus (-)PP AMB(Б) and CP BZP KT_BZP_APS
APS
293 Check the decoupling between PLUS_PP_DBT_A Disconnection
bus (+)PP DBT(A) and CP BZP KT_BZP_APS
APS
bus (-)PP DBT(A) and CP BZP KT_BZP_APS
APS
295 Check the decoupling between PLUS_PP_DBT_B Disconnection
bus (+)PP DBT(B) and CP BZP KT_BZP_APS
APS
bus (-)PP DBT(B) and CP BZP KT_BZP_APS
APS
297 Check the decoupling between KT_BZP_TPS Disconnection
CP BZP TPS and CP BZP APS KT_BZP_APS
CP BZP TPS and bus (+)PP PLUS_PP_GGS_A
GGS(A)
CP BZP TPS and bus (-)PP MINUS_PP_GGS_A

Confidential

DISCONNECTION
GGS(A)
CP BZP TPS and bus (+)PP PLUS_PP_GGS_B
GGS(B)
CP BZP TPS and bus (-)PP MINUS_PP_GGS_B
GGS(B)
302 Check decoupling between PLUS_PP_DRK_A Disconnection
bus (+)PP DRK(A) and bus PLUS_PP_AMB_A
(+)PP AMB(А)
bus (+)PP DRK(A) and bus MINUS_PP_AMB_A
(-)PP AMB(А)
304 Check decoupling between bus PLUS_PP_DRK_A Disconnection
(+)PP DRK(A) and bus (+)PP PLUS_PP_AMB_B
AMB(Б)
(+)PP DRK(A) and bus (-)PP MINUS_PP_AMB_B
AMB(Б)
(+)PP DRK(A) and bus (+)PP PLUS_PP_DBT_A
DBT(A)
bus (+)PP DRK(A) and bus MINUS_PP_DBT_A
(-)PP DBT(A)
(+)PP DRK(A) and bus (+)PP PLUS_PP_DBT_B
DBT(B)
(+)PP DRK(A) and bus (-)PP MINUS_PP_DBT_B
DBT(B)
bus (+)PP DRK(A) and bus PLUS_PP_GGS_A
(+)PP GGS(A)
(+)PP DRK(A) and bus (-)PP MINUS_PP_GGS_A

Confidential

DISCONNECTION
GGS(A)
(+)PP DRK(A) and bus (+)PP PLUS_PP_GGS_B
GGS(B)
313 Check the decoupling between PLUS_PP_DRK_A Disconnection
bus (+)PP DRK(A) and bus MINUS_PP_GGS_B
(-)PP GGS(B)
bus (+)PP DRK(A) and bus NI_27V_PLUS
(+)27V GPS
bus (+)PP DRK(A) and bus NI_27V_MINUS
(-)27V GPS
bus (+)PP DRK(A) and CP BZP KT_BZP_APS
APS
bus (+)PP DRK(A) and CP KT_BZP_TPS
BZP(TPS)
bus (+)PP DRK(A) and Body KORPUS_OK
bus (+)PP DRK(A) and CP BBA KT_BBA
bus (+)PP DRK(A) and CP KT_PLUS_BA_A
+SEP1(A)
bus (+)PP DRK(A) and CP KT_MINUS_BA_A
-SEP1(A)
bus (+)PP DRK(A) and bus MINUS_PP_DRK_A
-DRK(A)
bus (+)PP DRK(A) and bus PLUS_PP_DRK_B
+DRK(B)

Confidential

DISCONNECTION
bus (+)PP DRK(A) and bus MINUS_PP_DRK_B
-DRK(B)
325 Check the decoupling between MINUS_PP_DRK_A Disconnection
bus (-)PP DRK(A) and bus PLUS_PP_DRK_B
+DRK(B)
bus (-)PP DRK(A) and bus MINUS_PP_DRK_B
-DRK(B)
327 Check decoupling between MINUS_PP_DRK_A Disconnection
bus (-)PP DRK(A) and bus PLUS_PP_AMB_A
(+)PP AMB(А)
328 Check decoupling between bus MINUS_PP_DRK_A Disconnection
(-)PP DRK(A) and bus (-)PP MINUS_PP_AMB_A
AMB(А)
(-)PP DRK(A) and bus (+)PP PLUS_PP_AMB_B
AMB(Б)
(-)PP DRK(A) and bus (-)PP MINUS_PP_AMB_B
AMB(Б)
(-)PP DRK(A) and bus (+)PP PLUS_PP_DBT_A
DBT(A)
bus (-)PP DRK(A) and bus MINUS_PP_DBT_A
(-)PP DBT(A)
(-)PP DRK(A) and bus (+)PP PLUS_PP_DBT_B
DBT(B)
bus (-)PP DRK(A) and bus MINUS_PP_DBT_B
(-)PP DBT(B)
335 Check decoupling between MINUS_PP_DRK_A Disconnection
bus (-)PP DRK(A) and bus PLUS_PP_GGS_A
(+)PP GGS(A)

Confidential

DISCONNECTION
bus (-)PP DRK(A) and bus MINUS_PP_GGS_A
(-)PP GGS(A)
bus (-)PP DRK(A) and bus PLUS_PP_GGS_B
(+)PP GGS(B)
bus (-)PP DRK(A) and bus MINUS_PP_GGS_B
(-)PP GGS(B)
bus (-)PP DRK(A) and bus NI_27V_PLUS
(+)27V GPS
bus (-)PP DRK(A) and bus NI_27V_MINUS
(-)27V GPS
bus (-)PP DRK(A) and CP BZP KT_BZP_APS
APS
bus (-)PP DRK(A) and CP KT_BZP_TPS
BZP(TPS)
bus (-)PP DRK(A) and Body KORPUS_OK
bus (-)PP DRK(A) and CP KT_PLUS_BA_A
+SEP1(B)
bus (-)PP DRK(A) and CP KT_MINUS_BA_A
-SEP1(B)
346 Check decoupling between bus PLUS_PP_DRK_B Disconnection
(+)PP DRK(B) and bus (+)PP PLUS_PP_AMB_A
AMB(А)
347 Check decoupling between PLUS_PP_DRK_B Disconnection
bus (+)PP DRK(B) and bus MINUS_PP_AMB_A
(-)PP AMB(А)
(+)PP DRK(B) and bus (+)PP PLUS_PP_AMB_B

Confidential

DISCONNECTION
AMB(B)
(+)PP DRK(B) and bus (-)PP MINUS_PP_AMB_B
AMB(Б)
(+)PP DRK(B) and bus (+)PP PLUS_PP_DBT_A
DBT(A)
(+)PP DRK(B) and bus (-)PP MINUS_PP_DBT_A
DBT(A)
352 Check decoupling between PLUS_PP_DRK_B Disconnection
bus (+)PP DRK(B) and bus PLUS_PP_DBT_B
(+)PP DBT(B)
353 Check the decoupling between PLUS_PP_DRK_B Disconnection
bus (+)PP DRK(B) and bus MINUS_PP_DBT_B
(-)PP DBT(B)
(+)PP DRK(B) and bus (+)PP PLUS_PP_GGS_A
GGS(A)
bus (+)PP DRK(B) and bus MINUS_PP_GGS_A
(-)PP GGS(A)
(+)PP DRK(B) and bus (+)PP PLUS_PP_GGS_B
GGS(B)
bus (+)PP DRK(B) and bus MINUS_PP_GGS_B
(-)PP GGS(B)
bus (+)PP DRK(B) and bus NI_27V_PLUS
(+)27V GPS
bus (+)PP DRK(B) and bus NI_27V_MINUS
(-)27V GPS
bus (+)PP DRK(B) and CP BZP KT_BZP_APS

Confidential

DISCONNECTION
APS
bus (+)PP DRK(B) and CP KT_BZP_TPS
BZP(TPS)
bus (+)PP DRK(B) and Body KORPUS_OK
bus (+)PP DRK(B) and CP KT_PLUS_BA_A
+SEP1(A)
bus (+)PP DRK(B) and CP KT_MINUS_BA_A
-SEP1(A)
bus (+)PP DRK(B) and bus MINUS_PP_DRK_B
-DRK(B)
366 Check decoupling between bus MINUS_PP_DRK_B Disconnection
(-)PP DRK(B) and bus (+)PP PLUS_PP_AMB_A
AMB(А)
(-)PP DRK(B) and bus (-)PP MINUS_PP_AMB_A
AMB(А)
368 Check decoupling between MINUS_PP_DRK_B Disconnection
bus (-)PP DRK(B) and bus PLUS_PP_AMB_B
(+)PP AMB(B)
369 Check the decoupling between MINUS_PP_DRK_B Disconnection
bus (-)PP DRK(B) and bus MINUS_PP_AMB_B
(-)PP AMB(Б)
(-)PP DRK(B) and bus (+)PP PLUS_PP_DBT_A
DBT(A)
bus (-)PP DRK(B) and bus MINUS_PP_DBT_A
(-)PP DBT(A)
bus (-)PP DRK(B) and bus PLUS_PP_DBT_B
(+)PP DBT(B)

Confidential

DISCONNECTION
bus (-)PP DRK(B) and bus MINUS_PP_DBT_B
(-)PP DBT(B)
bus (-)PP DRK(B) and bus PLUS_PP_GGS_A
(+)PP GGS(A)
bus (-)PP DRK(B) and bus MINUS_PP_GGS_A
(-)PP GGS(A)
bus (-)PP DRK(B) and bus PLUS_PP_GGS_B
(+)PP GGS(B)
bus (-)PP DRK(B) and bus MINUS_PP_GGS_B
(-)PP GGS(B)
bus (-)PP DRK(B) and bus NI_27V_PLUS
(+)27V GPS
bus (-)PP DRK(B) and bus NI_27V_MINUS
(-)27V GPS
bus (-)PP DRK(B) and CP BZP KT_BZP_APS
APS
bus (-)PP DRK(B) and CP KT_BZP_TPS
BZP(TPS)
bus (-)PP DRK(B) and Body KORPUS_OK
bus (-)PP DRK(B) and CP KT_PLUS_BA_A
+SEP1(B)
bus (-)PP DRK(B) and CP KT_MINUS_BA_A
-SEP1(B)

Confidential
11. If attribute “RPP” is present, go to Step 12.
STEP STEP DESCRIPTION CHECK POINTS CONNECTION /
NO. DISCONNECTION
CP (+)AMB and CP BZP2 НО(А1) KT_BZP2_NO_A1
(РСЗ)
CP (+)AMB and CP BZP3 NO(А2) KT_BZP3_NO_A2
(РСЗ)
CP (+)AMB and CP KT_BZP5A_NO_A3
BZP5A(NO)A3 (РСЗ)
CP (+)AMB and CP BZP2 F3(А1) KT_BZP2_F3_A1
(РСЗ)
(РСЗ)
CP (+)AMB and CP BZP3 F3(А2)
(РСЗ) KT_BZP3_F3_A2
(РСЗ)
CP (+)AMB and CP BZP3 KT_BBA
SRS(А2) (РСЗ)
CP (+)AMB and CP BZP3 KT_BZP3_SRS_A2
SRS(А2) (РСЗ)
CP (+)AMB and CP BZP3 KT_BZP3_SRS_A3
SRS(A3) (РСЗ)
CP (+)AMB and CP BZP5 KT_BZP5A_SRS_A1
SRS(A1) (РСЗ)

Confidential

NO. DISCONNECTION
CP (+)AMB and CP BZP7 ВНО KT_BZP7_WNO
(РСЗ)
CP (-)PP and CP +AMD (РСЗ) KT_PLUS_AMD
CP (-)PP and CP -AMD(РСЗ) KT_MINUS_AMD
CP (+)PP and CP +AMD (РСЗ) KT_PLUS_AMD
CP (+)PP and CP –AMD (РСЗ) KT_MINUS_AMD
CP +SEP1(A) and CP BZP2 KT_BZP2_NO_A1
НО(А1) (РСЗ)
CP +SEP1(A) and CP BZP3 KT_BZP3_NO_A2
NO(А2) (РСЗ)
CP +SEP1(A) and CP KT_BZP5A_NO_A3
BZP5A(NO)A3 (РСЗ))
CP +SEP1(A) and CP BZP2 KT_BZP2_F3_A1
F3(А1) (РСЗ)
F3(А3) (РСЗ)
F3(А2) (РСЗ)
F3(А4) (РСЗ)
CP +SEP1(A) and CP BBA (РСЗ) KT_BBA
CP +SEP1(A) and CP BZP3 KT_BZP3_SRS_A2
SRS(А2) (РСЗ)

Confidential

NO. DISCONNECTION
CP +SEP1(A) and CP BZP3 KT_BZP3_SRS_A3
SRS(A3) (РСЗ)
CP +SEP1(A) and CP BZP5A KT_BZP5A_SRS_A1
SRS(А1) (РСЗ)
CP +SEP1(A) and CP BZP7 ВНО KT_BZP7_WNO
(РСЗ)
CP +SEP1(B) and CP BZP2 KT_BZP2_NO_A1
НО(А1) (РСЗ)
CP +SEP1(B) and CP BZP3 KT_BZP3_NO_A2
NO(А2) (РСЗ)
CP +SEP1(B) and CP KT_BZP5A_NO_A3
CP +SEP1(B) and CP BZP2 KT_BZP2_F3_A1
F3(А1) (РСЗ)
F3(А3) (РСЗ)
F3(А2) (РСЗ)
F3(А4) (РСЗ)
CP +SEP1(B) and CP BBA (РСЗ) KT_BBA
CP +SEP1(B) and CP BZP3 KT_BZP3_SRS_A2
SRS(А2) (РСЗ)

Confidential

NO. DISCONNECTION
CP +SEP1(B) and CP BZP3 KT_BZP3_SRS_A3
SRS(A3) (РСЗ)
CP +SEP1(B) and CP BZP5A KT_BZP5A_SRS_A1
SRS(А1) (РСЗ)
CP +SEP1(B) and CP BZP7 ВНО KT_BZP7_WNO
(РСЗ)
Body and CP BBA (РСЗ) KT_BBA
Body, BZP3 SRS(А2) (РСЗ) KT_BZP3_SRS_A2
Body and CP BZP3 SRS(A3) KT_BZP3_SRS_A3
(РСЗ)
Body and CP BZP5A SRS(А1) KT_BZP5A_SRS_A1
(РСЗ)
Body and CP BZP2 НО(А1) KT_BZP2_NO_A1
(РСЗ)
Body and CP BZP3 NO(А2) KT_BZP3_NO_A2
(РСЗ)
Body and CP BZP5A(NO)A3 KT_BZP5A_NO_A3
(РСЗ)
Body and CP BZP2 F3(А1) (РСЗ) KT_BZP2_F3_A1

Confidential

NO. DISCONNECTION
Body and CP BZP7 ВНО (РСЗ) KT_BZP7_WNO
bus (+)27V GPS and CP BBA KT_BBA
(РСЗ)
440 Check decoupling between bus NI_27V_PLUS Disconnection
(+)27V GPS and CP BZP3 KT_BZP3_SRS_A2
SRS(А2) (РСЗ)
(+)27V GPS and CP BZP3 KT_BZP3_SRS_A3
SRS(A3) (РСЗ)
(+)27V GPS and CP BZP5A KT_BZP5A_SRS_A1
SRS(А1) (РСЗ)
bus (+)27V GPS and CP +AMD KT_PLUS_AMD
(РСЗ)
bus (+)27V GPS and CP -AMD KT_MINUS_AMD
(РСЗ)
bus (+)27V GPS and CP BZP7 KT_BZP7_WNO
ВНО (РСЗ)
bus (-)27V GPS and CP BZP2 KT_BZP2_NO_A1
НО(А1) (РСЗ)
bus (-)27V GPS and CP BZP3 KT_BZP3_NO_A2
NO(А2) (РСЗ)
448 Check decoupling between bus NI_27V_MINUS Disconnection
(-)27V GPS and CP KT_BZP5A_NO_A3
bus (-)27V GPS and CP BZP2 KT_BZP2_F3_A1
F3(А1) (РСЗ)

Confidential

NO. DISCONNECTION
F3(А3) (РСЗ)
F3(А2) (РСЗ)
F3(А4) (РСЗ)
bus (-)27V GPS and CP BBA KT_BBA
(РСЗ)
(-)27V GPS and CP BZP3 KT_BZP3_SRS_A2
SRS(А2) (РСЗ)
(-)27V GPS and CP BZP3 KT_BZP3_SRS_A3
SRS(A3) (РСЗ)
(-)27V GPS and CP BZP5A KT_BZP5A_SRS_A1
SRS(А1) (РСЗ)
bus (-)27V GPS and CP BZP7 KT_BZP7_WNO
ВНО (РСЗ)
458 Check the decoupling between KT_BBA Disconnection
CP BBA and CP +SEP1(A) (РСЗ) KT_PLUS_BA_A
CP BBA and CP +SEP1(B) (РСЗ) KT_PLUS_BA_B
CP BBA and Body (РСЗ) KORPUS_OK
CP BBA and bus (+)27V GPS NI_27V_PLUS
(РСЗ)
462 Check the decoupling between KT_BZP3_SRS_A2 Disconnection
CP BZP3 SRS(А2) and CP KT_PLUS_BA_A
+SEP1(A) (РСЗ)
CP BZP3 SRS(А2) and CP KT_PLUS_BA_B

Confidential

NO. DISCONNECTION
+SEP1(B) (РСЗ)
464 Check decoupling between CP KT_BZP3_SRS_A2 Disconnection
BZP3 SRS(А2) and Body (РСЗ) KORPUS_OK
BZP3 SRS(А2) and bus (+)27V NI_27V_PLUS
GPS (РСЗ)
CP BZP3 SRS(А3) and CP KT_PLUS_BA_A
+SEP1(A) (РСЗ)
CP BZP3 SRS(А3) and CP KT_PLUS_BA_B
+SEP1(B) (РСЗ)
CP BZP3 SRS(А3) and Body KORPUS_OK
(РСЗ)
BZP3 SRS(А3) and bus (+)27V NI_27V_PLUS
GPS (РСЗ)
470 Check the decoupling between KT_BZP5A_SRS_A1 Disconnection
CP BZP5A SRS(А1) and CP KT_PLUS_BA_A
+SEP1(A) (РСЗ)
CP BZP5A SRS(А1) and CP KT_PLUS_BA_B
+SEP1(B) (РСЗ)
CP BZP5 SRS(A1) and CP KT_MINUS_BA_A
-SEP1(A) (РСЗ)
CP BZP5A SRS(А1) and Body KORPUS_OK
(РСЗ)
474 Check decoupling between CP KT_BZP5A_SRS_A1 Disconnection
BZP5A SRS(А1) and bus (+)27V NI_27V_PLUS
GPS (РСЗ)
bus (-)PP DRK(A) and CP BBA KT_BBA
(РСЗ)

Confidential

NO. DISCONNECTION
bus (+)PP DRK(B) and CP BBA KT_BBA
(РСЗ)
bus (-)PP DRK(B) and CP BBA KT_BBA
(РСЗ)
478 Check the decoupling between KT_PLUS_AMD Disconnection
CP +AMD and CP -SEP1(A) KT_MINUS_BA_A
(РСЗ)
CP +AMD and Body (РСЗ) KORPUS_OK
CP +AMD and bus (+)27V GPS NI_27V_PLUS
(РСЗ)
CP +AMD and bus (-)27V GPS NI_27V_MINUS
(РСЗ)
CP +AMD and CP (+)PP (РСЗ) KT_PLUS_PP
CP +AMD and CP (-)PP (РСЗ) KT_MINUS_PP
484 Check the decoupling between KT_MINUS_AMD Disconnection
CP -AMD and CP (+)PP (РСЗ) KT_PLUS_PP
CP -AMD and CP (-)PP (РСЗ) KT_MINUS_PP
CP -AMD and Body (РСЗ) KORPUS_OK
CP -AMD and bus (+)27V GPS NI_27V_PLUS
(РСЗ)
488 Check the decoupling between KT_BZP7_WNO Disconnection
CP BZP7 ВНО and CP +SEP1(A) KT_PLUS_BA_A
(РСЗ)
CP BZP7 ВНО and CP -SEP1(A) KT_MINUS_BA_A
(РСЗ)

Confidential

NO. DISCONNECTION
CP BZP7 ВНО and bus (+)27V NI_27V_PLUS
GPS (РСЗ)
CP BZP7 ВНО and bus (-)27V NI_27V_MINUS
GPS (РСЗ)
CP BZP7 ВНО and CP BZP2 KT_BZP2_NO_A1
НО(А1)(РСЗ)
CP BZP7 ВНО and CP BZP3 KT_BZP3_NO_A2
NO(А2)(РСЗ)
CP BZP7 ВНО and CP БЗП5А KT_BZP5A_NO_A3
CP BZP7 ВНО and CP BZP2 KT_BZP2_F3_A1
F3(А1) (РСЗ)
F3(А3) (РСЗ)
F3(А2) (РСЗ)
F3(А4)
(РСЗ)
CP BZP7 ВНО and CP BBA KT_BBA
(РСЗ)
CP BZP7 ВНО and CP BZP3 KT_BZP3_SRS_A2
SRS(А2)
(РСЗ)
CP BZP7 ВНО and CP BZP3 KT_BZP3_SRS_A3

Confidential

NO. DISCONNECTION
SRS(A3)
(РСЗ)
502 Check decoupling between CP KT_BZP7_WNO Disconnection
BZP7 ВНО and CP BZP5A KT_BZP5A_SRS_A1
SRS(А1) (РСЗ)
BZP7 ВНО and bus (+)PP PLUS_PP_DRK_A
DRK(A) (РСЗ)
BZP7 ВНО and bus (-)PP DRK(A) MINUS_PP_DRK_A
(РСЗ)
BZP7 ВНО and bus (+)PP PLUS_PP_DRK_B
DRK(B) (РСЗ)
BZP7 ВНО and bus (-)PP DRK(B) MINUS_PP_DRK_B
(РСЗ)
CP BZP7 ВНО and CP +AMD KT_PLUS_AMD
(РСЗ)
CP BZP7 ВНО and CP -AMD KT_MINUS_AMD
(РСЗ)
509 Check the decoupling between KT_BZP_APS Disconnection
CP BZP APS and CP BZP7 ВНО KT_BZP7_WNO
(РСЗ)
CP BZP APS and CP BZP2 KT_BZP2_NO_A1
НО(А1) (РСЗ)
CP BZP APS and CP BZP3 KT_BZP3_NO_A2
NO(А2) (РСЗ)
CP BZP APS and CP KT_BZP5A_NO_A3

Confidential

NO. DISCONNECTION
CP BZP APS and CP BZP2 KT_BZP2_F3_A1
F3(А1) (РСЗ)
F3(А3) (РСЗ)
F3(А2) (РСЗ)
F3(А4) (РСЗ)
CP BZP APS and CP BBA (РСЗ) KT_BBA
CP BZP APS and CP BZP3 KT_BZP3_SRS_A2
SRS(А2)(РСЗ)
CP BZP APS and CP BZP3 KT_BZP3_SRS_A3
SRS(А3)(РСЗ)
CP BZP APS and CP BZP5A KT_BZP5A_SRS_A1
SRS(А1)(РСЗ)
12. The insulation between the 27V GPS and Body will be verified.
S. STEP DESCRIPTION CHECK POINTS CONNECTIVITY /
NO. DISCONNECTION
1 Decoupling of +PP PLUS_PP_DRK_A Disconnection
DRK(А) and BBA KT_BBA
13. If the work mode is “Self Control”, go to Step 549.

14. The continuity between the following check points will be verified.
STEP STEP DESCRIPTION CHECK POINTS CONNECTIVITY /
NO. DISCONNECTION
1 Check of messages between KT_MINUS_AMD Connectivity
CP (-)AMD, (+) BA(А) KT_MINUS_BA_A
2 Message BZP7 WNO, BZP KT_BZP7_WNO Connectivity
APS KT_BZP_APS

Confidential
STEP STEP DESCRIPTION CHECK POINTS CONNECTIVITY /

NO. DISCONNECTION
3 Message BBA, BZP APS KT_BBA Connectivity
KT_BZP_APS
4 Message BZP3 SRS(А2), BZP KT_BZP3_SRS_A2 Connectivity
APS KT_BZP_APS
5 Message BZP3 SRS(А3), BZP KT_BZP3_SRS_A3 Connectivity
APS KT_BZP_APS
6 Message BZP5А SRS(А1), KT_BZP5A_SRS_A1 Connectivity
BZP APS KT_BZP_APS
7 Message BZP2 NO(А1), BZP KT_BZP2_NO_A1 Connectivity
APS KT_BZP_APS
8 Message BZP3 NO(А2), BZP KT_BZP3_NO_A2 Connectivity
APS KT_BZP_APS
9 Message BZP5 NO(А3), BZP KT_BZP5A_NO_A3 Connectivity
APS KT_BZP_APS
10 Message BZP2Т F3(А1), BZP KT_BZP2_F3_A1 Connectivity
APS KT_BZP_APS
APS KT_BZP_APS
APS KT_BZP_APS
APS KT_BZP_APS
14 Message (+)АМD and (+) KT_PLUS_AMD Connectivity
BA(А) KT_PLUS_BA_A
15 Message (-) АМD and (-) BA(А) KT_MINUS_AMD Connectivity
KT_MINUS_BA_A
15. The “Dangerous Circuits Normal” will be set only if insulation of all the signals
are normal.
16. Remove voltage from bridge and disconnect the diagonals from meter.
17. Remove the command “Disconnect shunt network”.
3.1.2.27 CHECKING THE INSULATION RESISTANCE AND SUPPLY CIRCUITS (4)

Description
Refer Section 3.1.3.12.

Confidential
3.1.2.28 CHECKING THE PYRO SOURCES ON COMMANDS OF СК341-43 (30)

Description
Refer Section 3.1.3.13

Description
3.1.2.30 CHECKING THE PYRO SOURCES ON COMMANDS OF КPA СК351.1 (34)

Description
3.1.2.31 CHECKING BZP ON COMMANDS К310-61МЭ (35)

Description
3.1.2.32 CHECKING OF ON-BOARD AUTOMATION BLOCK (36)

Description
3.1.2.33 CHECK PRESSURE RESTORATION SIGNALING DEVICE (37)

Description
3.1.2.34 CHECK OF CIRCUITS OF WARHEAD (50)

Description
3.1.2.35 CHECK OF INCLINED LAUNCH( КПМРК2) (52)


Confidential
Description

Description
3.1.2.37 CHECK OF КПМРК1 (60)

Description

Description
3.1.2.39 CHECKING THE CONNECTION OF AMB TO SEP1 BUS(64)

Description
3.1.2.40 CHECKING OF LAUNCH CIRCUITS ON COMMAND РС (66)

Description

SWITCHING ELEMENTS AND CIRCUITS OF ARTICLE (72)
Description

Confidential

The SEP2 run programs related to On-Board Control System. SEP2 undergo testing of
SEP2 units with in DUT using 1553B modules, Digital IO modules and Analog
measurement modules. Panel computer will initiate the execution of checks in SEP2
through Ethernet and SEP2 will send the status of parameter obtained via Ethernet. SEP2
communicates with other SEP's for accessing the remote port data through Ethernet.
Requirement ID : DP_COE_SEP2_REQ
CHECK NO
REQUIREMENT
SYSTEM)
1. DP_COE_SEP2_REQ_01 Process the remote request -

received from Panel
Computer and other SEP's
(SEP1 and SEP3) and send
response to the respective
system.
2. DP_COE_SEP2_REQ_02 Checking temperature in -
instrument bay.
3. DP_COE_SEP2_REQ_03 Startup check for SEP2. 302
SELF-CHECK
4. DP_COE_SEP2_REQ_04 Checking SEP2 in mode of 315
exchange with SEP3 along
with mainlines М1, М2, M3
and M4 (1553B Self check)
5. DP_COE_SEP2_REQ_05 Checking the Fin Simulator 316
Block.
6. DP_COE_SEP2_REQ_06 Checking the functionality of 322
Temperature Monitoring
Circuit.
7. DP_COE_SEP2_REQ_07 Checking the device RF 324
Seeker Testing Complex
(ИК1), ИК1С.
8. DP_COE_SEP2_REQ_08 Discrete I/O Loop Back -
Check.
TYPE B CHECKS
9. DP_COE_SEP2_REQ_09 Checking external 1010
commands of device
MIU(СК314-43)
10. DP_COE_SEP2_REQ_10 Checking “OBC Faulty” 1011

Confidential
CHECK NO
REQUIREMENT
SYSTEM)
command issued by
MIU(СК314-43).
11. DP_COE_SEP2_REQ_11 Checking the integrity of 1012
actuator circuits.
12. DP_COE_SEP2_REQ_12 Checking actuator 1014
deflection as per MIU
signals.
13. DP_COE_SEP2_REQ_13 Checking RGP sensor 1016
device.
14. DP_COE_SEP2_REQ_14 Checking Radio Altimeter 1019
device.
15. DP_COE_SEP2_REQ_15 Checking Russian 1020
Telemetry device
16. DP_COE_SEP2_REQ_16 Checking of device 1022
АСОНД-Ц through M1 & M3
buses.
17. DP_COE_SEP2_REQ_17 INS integrated check. 1024
18. DP_COE_SEP2_REQ_18 Checking INS. 1025
19. DP_COE_SEP2_REQ_19 Checking OBC. 1026
20. DP_COE_SEP2_REQ_20 Checking GPS. 1027
21. DP_COE_SEP2_REQ_21 Checking command 1046
receiving unit of MIU.
22. DP_COE_SEP2_REQ_22 Checking PLP mode. 1202
23. DP_COE_SEP2_REQ_23 Loading program in to OBC. 1500
24. DP_COE_SEP2_REQ_24 Reading and checking sum 1505
of the executable programs
in CK315-1.
25. DP_COE_SEP2_REQ_25 Loading Passport Data of 1503
“type B” article in to OBC.
26. DP_COE_SEP2_REQ_26 Reading the Passport Data 1504
of the “type B” article from
OBC.
27. DP_COE_SEP2_REQ_27 Program loading in to the 1501
devices К312-10В.
28. DP_COE_SEP2_REQ_28 Program loading in to the 1502
devices К312-10A.
29. DP_COE_SEP2_REQ_29 Program for Counting and 1506
Checking sum of the
executable Program in

Confidential
CHECK NO
REQUIREMENT
SYSTEM)
K312-10B.
30. DP_COE_SEP2_REQ_30 Program for Counting and 1507
Checking sum of the
executable Program in
K312-10B.
31. DP_COE_SEP2_REQ_31 Writing data and Program in 1508
to the device CK314-1
32. DP_COE_SEP2_REQ_32 Loading of program or 1509/1510
almanac in to the device
K323-1.
SEEKER
33. DP_COE_SEP2_REQ_33 Check of antenna device 1100
K312.
34. DP_COE_SEP2_REQ_34 Check receiving channel of 1102
K312.
35. DP_COE_SEP2_REQ_35 Check support signals, 1110
issued by system К312.
36. DP_COE_SEP2_REQ_36 Check of transmitting device 1112
K312.
37. DP_COE_SEP2_REQ_37 Check of modes «О», «З» 1150
and «С» of system К312.
38. DP_COE_SEP2_REQ_38 Check telemetry signals of 1160
system К312.
TYPE A CHECKS
39. DP_COE_SEP2_REQ_39 Checking external 10
command of device MIU.
40. DP_COE_SEP2_REQ_40 Check the integrity of 12
actuator circuits.
41. DP_COE_SEP2_REQ_41 Checking actuator 14
deflection as per MIU
signals
42. DP_COE_SEP2_REQ_42 Checking RGP sensor 16
device
43. DP_COE_SEP2_REQ_43 Checking Radio Altimeter 19
device
44. DP_COE_SEP2_REQ_44 Checking Russian 20
Telemetry device
45. DP_COE_SEP2_REQ_45 INS integrated check 24
46. DP_COE_SEP2_REQ_46 Checking command 46
receiving unit of MIU

Confidential
CHECK NO
REQUIREMENT
SYSTEM)
47. DP_COE_SEP2_REQ_47 Checking PLP mode 202

48. DP_COE_SEP2_REQ_48 Loading “type A” article 503
Passport Data in to OBC
49. DP_COE_SEP2_REQ_49 Reading “type A” article 504
Passport Data from OBC
50. DP_COE_SEP2_REQ_50 Loading program in to OBC 500
51. DP_COE_SEP2_REQ_51 Loading program in to 501
device Seeker(K312-10B)
52. DP_COE_SEP2_REQ_52 Loading program in to 502
device Seeker(K312-10A)
53. DP_COE_SEP2_REQ_53 Executable program 505
checksum verification in
OBC
Seeker (K312-10B)
Seeker(K312-10A)
3.1.3.1 PROCESSING REMOTE REQUESTS

Description
The SEP2 has to process the request received from Panel Computer/SEP1/SEP3. The
SEP2 will process the request and send response to the respective system.
Inputs
NA
Processing
1. The following are the conditions that SEP2 can send/receive request to/from Panel
Computer respectively.
(a) SEP2 will send temperature measurement value to PC.
(b) SEP2 issue emergency off message to PC when temperature in instrument bay
exceeds the limit.
(c) SEP2 will send the parameter status(Normal/Not normal) to PC while executing
the test.
(d) PC will initiate the link check for SEP2.
(e) PC will initiate the execution of Start-up test for SEP2.

Confidential
(f) PC will initiate the execution of test(DUT test) in SEP2.
(g) PC will send the user inputs to SEP2.
(h) PC will Initiate, start, pause, continue and stop the test execution in SEP2 .
2. The following are condition that the SEP2 can send / receive the request from
SEP3.
(a) The DIO channel status of SEP2 is sent to SEP3 whenever a request is
received from SEP3.
(b) SEP2 will send the emergency OFF to SEP3 when the the temperature in
instrument bay exceeds the limit.
(c) SEP3 can request SEP2 to switch ON / OFF its DOP signal.
3. The following are condition that the SEP2 can send / receive request from SEP1.
(a) SEP2 will send the emergency OFF to SEP1 when the temperature in
instrument bay exceeds the limit.
(b) SEP2 will send the result of 1553B exchange to SEP1.

(c) SEP1 will send request SEP2 for reading its ADC signals.
(d) SEP1 will send send command to initiate 1553B transfer from SEP2.
(e) SEP1 will send request SEP2 to Switch ON/OFF its DOP signals.
(f) SEP1 will send issue emergency OFF to SEP2.
3.1.3.2 CHECKING TEMPERATURE IN INSTRUMENTAL BAY

Description
The temperature monitoring is carriedout in control mode with periodicity of 50 ms. The
temperature measurement is carriedout by reading analog signal B_U_T_DIT for 20
sample and checking its limit (MinLimit>15 and MaxLimit < 45). If it exceeds its limit then
send emergency stop messages to other SEP'S(1,3) and panel computer.
Inputs
NA
Processing
The following operations are carried out with periodicity of 50 milliseconds.
1. Check whether the work Type is "Control Mode", time is greater than 15 second and
attribute "power supply switch ON" is absent.
2. Read the analog signal B_U_T_DIT for 20 samples with delay of 15 milliseconds in
between successive read.
3. Arrange above read 20 analog sample values in ascending order.
4. Calculate average analog value by discarding first and last 4 sample.

Confidential
5. If temperature is less than 15ºC or greater than 45ºC, go to Step vi else go to Step
xiii.
6. Send emergency stop message to Panel Computer, SEP 1 and SEP 3.
7. Send temperature value to the Panel Computer.
8. Digital out signal (B_SOUND) for alarm indication (Buzzer for 2 seconds) and switch
off after 2 seconds.
9. Check the signal “TM Switch ON” for its presence and if it is present,
(a) Remote ouput the following signal in SEP3(C_OTKL_TM_R, C_OTKL_TM_I) for
its presence
(b) Remote ouput the following signal in SEP3(C_TM_WKL_IND, C_TM_I_WKL,
C_TM_R_WKL)for its absence
10. Check the signal “SEP2 Switch ON” for its presence and if it is present,
(a) Remote ouput the signal in SEP3(C_WKL_BASU) for its absence
(b) Remote ouput the signal in SEP3(C_WKL_UPU_1) for its absence
(c) Remote ouput the signal in SEP3(C_WKL_UPU)for its absence
11. Check the signal “ SEP1 Switch ON“ for its presence and if it is present,
(a) Remote output the signal in SEP3(C_WKL_BA,C_ISHODHOE_OK) for its
absence.
12. Check the signal ” GS” “for its presence and if it is present,
(a) Remote output the signal in SEP3(E_RAZBL_KPA_SEP1, C_NORMA_CB,
C_WKL_NI) for its absence.
(b) Remote output the signal in SEP1(E_SHINA_MINUS27_W_NI,
E_SHINA_PLUS27_W_NI) for its absence.
(c) Remote output the signal in SEP1(E_CORPUS_B_2) ) for its absence.
13. Send temperature value to panel computer.
Outputs

Confidential
3.1.3.3 STARTING TEST OF SEP2 (CHECK 302)
Description
This requirement will verify the initial condition of the discrete signals.
Inputs
NA
Processing
The steps to verify the signal status are,
1. Read and analyze the input port signal shown in Table 3.35 for its absence.
Table 3.35: INPUT PORT SIGNAL
S.NO SIGNAL NAME STATUS

1 B_REZERW_SIGNAL_BA_1 OFF
3 B_TM_I_WKL OFF
4 B_TM_P_WKL OFF
6 B_KWIT_WKL_GEN_SH_1 OFF
7 B_KWIT_WKL_GEN_SH_2 OFF
8 B_KWIT_AWTOMAT_REVIM OFF
9 B_KWIT_WKL_US1 OFF
10 B_KWIT_WKL_US2 OFF
11 B_KWIT_WKL_S_PC OFF
12 B_GOTOWNOCT OFF
13 B_KWIT_1_DB_ATT1 OFF
15 B_KWIT_4_DB_ATT1_1 OFF
21 B_NEISPR_BCWM_WH OFF
22 B_REZERW_KM_14 OFF
25 B_KWIT_WKL_IK1 OFF
26 B_KWIT_WKL_MOD OFF

Confidential

31 B_KWIT_5_ATT3_WH OFF
36 B_KWIT_WKL_F_PC_Z OFF
37 B_KWIT_WKL_GS_PC OFF
38 B_KWIT_WKL_GK OFF
39 B_KWIT_PACHKA(STEP 39) OFF
40 B_KWIT_IST_NORMA OFF
41 B_KWIT_WKL_F_SK OFF
42 B_KWIT_WKL_IZM_PR OFF
43 B_LC_138 OFF
44 B_LC_139 OFF
45 B_LC_140 OFF
46 B_LC_141 OFF
47 B_LC_142 OFF
48 B_LC_143 OFF
49 B_LIK_TM_SK1 OFF
50 B_RAZR_LIK_TM_SK1 OFF
51 B_NORMA_SS_SK3 OFF
52 B_NORMA_SEA_SK4 OFF
53 B_NORMA_DG1_SK5 OFF
54 B_NORMA_DG2_SK6 OFF
55 B_NORMA_T_SK7 OFF
56 B_NORMA_N2_SK8 OFF
62 B_27V_BA2_STI OFF
64 B_LC_160 OFF

Confidential

65 B_LC_161 OFF
66 B_LC_162 OFF
67 B_LC_163 OFF
68 B_LC_164 OFF
69 B_LC_165 OFF
70 B_LC_166 OFF
71 B_LC_167 OFF
72 B_LC_168 OFF
73 B_LC_169 OFF
74 B_LC_170 OFF
75 B_LC_171 OFF
76 B_LC_172 OFF
77 B_LC_173 OFF
78 B_LC_174 OFF
79 B_LC_175 OFF
80 B_LC_176 OFF
81 B_LC_177 OFF
82 B_LC_178 OFF
83 B_LC_179 OFF
84 B_LC_180 OFF
85 B_LC_181 OFF
86 B_LC_182 OFF
87 B_LC_183 OFF
88 B_LC_184 OFF
89 B_LC_185 OFF
90 B_LC_186 OFF
91 B_LC_187 OFF
92 B_LC_188 OFF
93 B_LC_189 OFF
94 B_LC_190 OFF
95 B_LC_191 OFF
Outputs
In case of presence of signal, the status Not OK of parameter will be printed.
3.1.3.4 1553B SELF CHECK (CHECK 315)
Description

Confidential
This requirement will verify the functionality of SEP2 1553B modules (M1, M2, M3 and M4)
with SEP3 by data exchange between them. The SEP2 acts as a controller(BC) and SEP3
acts as Remote Terminal.
Inputs
NA
Processing
The following operation will be carried out during the execution of CHECK 315.
1. Configure SEP2 as Bus Controller.
2. Issue BC to RT message for sub-address (1 to 30) (data transfer).
3. Issue RT to BC message for sub-address (1 to 30) (data receive).
4. Verify data transmitted and received.
5. Repeat the Step 1 to Step 4 for1553B channels (M2, M3 and M4).
Output
Individual channel test status will be sent to panel computer.
3.1.3.5 TESTING OF FIN SIMULATOR BLOCK (CHECK 316)

Description
This requirement will monitor the efficiency of fin actuator simulator.
Inputs
NA
Processing
The following operation will be carried out during the execution of CHECK 316.
1. Set digital out signal B_UPR1_WIH1_IRA as high.
2. Set digital out signal B_OBN_1_IRA as zero.
3. Remove signal B_OBN_1_IRA after 500 ms.
4. Measure the ADC value for the signal (B_URT1_I).
5. Set digital out signal B_SK1_IRA as High to connect fin simulator to +divider and
introduce the delay. (0, 0125* t sec) where (t=8).
6. Set digital out signal B_SK1_IRA as low to disconnect the input of fin simulator from
+ divider.
7. Measure the ADC value for the signal (B_URT1_I) and store the average result as
X1.
8. Repeat the Step 4 to Step 7 and store the average result as X2(t(8)).
9. Repeat the Step 4 to Step 7 and store the average result as X3(t(240))
10. X4 = X2-X1.
11. Analyze the measurement X4, X3 and X1.

Confidential
12. Disconnect the signal B_UPR1_WIH1_IRA.
13. Repeat Step 1 to Step 12 for remaining three channels.
Output
Send the status of parameter X1, X3 and X4 as NORM/NONORM (Normal/Not Normal).
3.1.3.6 CHECK THE FUNCTIONALITY OF TEMPERATURE MONITORING CIRCUIT

(CHECK 322)
Description
This requirement will verify the temperature monitoring circuit functionality in self control
mode.
Inputs
NA
Processing
The following operation will be carried out during the execution of the CHECK 322.
1. Check the presence of self check mode.
2. Check the presence of signal C_SIGNAL_DR_SOSTIK.
3. Read the analog signal B_U_T_DIT to measure the fixed resistance value.
4. If resistance value is within range, go to Step 8 else go to Step 5.
5. Issue the signal B_SOUND.
6. Wait for 1.5 second.
7. Switch off the Buzzer.
8. Check the output of the parameter P1.
Output
Output the parameter P1.

Confidential
3.1.3.7 CHECKING THE DEVICE RF SEEKER TESTING COMPLEX (ИК1), ИК1С
(CHECK 324)
Description
This requirement will find the efficiency of one of the devices RF Seeker Testing
complex(ИК1) or ИК1С depending on the configuration in additional information. The
device ИК1 (С) efficiency will be measured by issuing control command and analyzing the
response.
Inputs
Addition information contain the attribute ИК1.
1. If seeker Testing complex (ИК1== 1), checking of ИК1 will be performed.
2. Else ИК1С will be performed.
Processing
1. Check the initial condition of the device ИК1(С) and It will be transferred to
automatic mode by issuing command and the response will be monitored.
SIGNAL NAME DESCRIPTION
B_GOTOWNOCT Check the docking of device ИК1
B_AWTOMAT_REVIM Set the digital out signal as High
C_AWTOMAT_REVIM Read the remote port of SEP3 and declare the parameter
P1
B_KWIT_AWTOMAT_REVIM Check the signal status and declare the Parameter P2
2. Issue the command in to the device ИК1(С).

B_WKL_IK1 Set the digital out signal as High
B_KWIT_WKL_IK1 Check the signal status and declare the parameter P3
3. Switch ON ГШ1.
B_WKL_GEN_SH_1 Set the digital out signal as High.
C_WKL_GASHENIE_1 Read the remote port of SEP3 and declare the parameter P4.
B_KWIT_WKL_GEN_SH_1 Check the signal status and declare the parameter P5.
B_KNTR_GH1 Read the analog input signal and declare the parameter P6.

Confidential
4. Issue the command to Switch ON УС1.
B_WKL_US1 Set the digital out signal as High.
C_WKL_US1 Read the remote port of SEP3 and declare the parameter P7.
B_KWIT_WKL_US1 Check the signal status and declare the parameter P8.
5. Issue the command to Switch ON УС2.

B_WKL_US2 Set the digital out signal as High.
C_WKL_US2 Read the remote port of SEP3 and declare the parameter P9.
B_KWIT_WKL_US2 Check the signal status and declare the parameter P10.
6. Issue the command for switch ON ГШ2.

B_WKL_GEN_SH_2 Set the digital out signal as High.
C_WKL_GASHENIE_2 Read the remote port of SEP3 and declare the parameter
P11
B_KWIT_WKL_GEN_SH_2 Check the signal status and declare the parameter P12
B_KNTR_GH2 Read the analog input signal and declare the parameter
P13
7. Issue the command packet.

B_PACHKA Set the digital out signal as High.
C_PACHKA Read the remote port of SEP3 and declare the parameter P14
B_KWIT_PACHKA Check the signal status and declare the parameter P15
B_PACHKA Set the digital out signal as Low.
8. Issue the command ON modulation.

B_WKL_MOD Set the digital out signal as High.
C_WKL_MOD Read the remote port of SEP3 and declare the parameter
P16
B_KWIT_WKL_MOD Check the signal status and declare the parameter P17

Confidential
9. Disconnects all switched on generators and amplifiers.
B_WKL_MOD Digital out the signal Low
B_PACHKA Digital out the signal Low
B_WKL_GEN_SH_2 Digital out the signal Low
B_WKL_US2 Digital out the signal Low
B_WKL_US1 Digital out the signal Low
B_WKL_GEN_SH_1 Digital out the signal Low
B_WKL_IK1 Digital out the signal Low
B_AWTOMAT_REVIM Digital out the signal Low
3.1.3.8 DISCRETE I/O LOOP BACK CHECK

Description
The discrete outputs from the SEP2 will be looped back to the discrete input modules and
verified by using the external harness loop back cables.
Inputs
NA
Processing
1. Configure all the input channels.
2. Enable/Disable digital output.
3. Read the corresponding digital input.
4. Repeat the Step 2 to Step 3 for all digital input channels.
output
Status of the signal.
3.1.3.9 CHECKING EXTERNAL COMMANDS OF DEVICE MIU(СК314-43)(CHECK

1010)
Description
This requirement will check the stand alone check of device MIU(СК314-43) with the help of
COE.
Inputs
NA
Processing
The following operation will be carried out during execution of check 1010.
1. Check for the presence of attribute for type “A article”. If it is present, stop the
check.
2. Check whether connector X2 is connected. If X2 is not connected, stop the check.

Confidential
3. Configure 1553B channel(1) as controller on M1.
4. Verify the СК314-43 self check result.
5. Ensure number of CK314-43 device is either “0” or “1” else stop the check..
6. Initiate the check for the device УПК and УВК. Check the majorized logic
activation of executing relays (14 combination) for each command (k1 to k27) by
scheduling 1553B message. The correspondence between the step number, name
of command and parameter number are given in table below.
STEP NO NAME OF COMMAND PARAMETER
2 Command К1 СК314-43 P4
3 Command К СК314-43 P5
15 Reserved -
26 Reserved -
7. Initiate the test for МПКН and МПНК.

8. Check issue of command "Faulty БЦВМ".
9. Switch OFF the SEP2 power supply and switch ON after 10 seconds.

Confidential
10. Set the input voltage of МПНК as 4.49V. Check output voltage of МПНК and
МПНК – ТМ. The output voltage of МПНК should be within the range 4.43 to 4.56 V
and the output voltage of МПНК - ТМ should be within the range 4.41 to 4.51V.
11. Disconnect the 1553B-channel 1.
Output
Display the status of parameter P1 TO P34.
3.1.3.10 CHECKING “OBC FAULTY” COMMAND ISSUED BY MIU (СК314-43)

(CHECK 1011)
Description
This requirement will check the timer independently in the device MIU(СК314-43) with help
of COE with frequency of 200HZ.This check will include the following steps,
1. Initial installation of device MIU
2. Checking the circuit for generating “Faulty БЦВМ".
Processing
The following operation will be carried out during execution of check 1011.
1. Check for the presence of attribute for type “A article”. If it is present, stop the
check.
2. Check whether the connector X2 is connected. If X2 is not connected, stop the
check.
3. Configure the 1553B (channel(1)) as controller on М1 and set the frequency of
operation as 200HZ.
4. Verify the MIU self check result.
5. Ensure number of MIU device is either “0” or “1”, else stop the check.
6. Check the Issue of faulty command “faulty БЦВМ”.
7. Check output voltage of МПКН, МПКН -ТМ and monitor in the absence of “Faulty
БЦВМ” command.
8. Switch OFF the SEP2 power supply and switch it ON after 10 seconds.
9. Set the input voltage of МПНК as 4.49V. Check output voltage of МПНК and МПНК
– ТМ. The output voltage of МПНК should be within the range 4.43 to 4.56 V and
the output voltage of МПНК - ТМ should be within the range 4.41 to 4.51V.
10. Disconnect the 1553B channel.
Output
Display the status of parameter P1 to P5.

Confidential
3.1.3.11 CHECK THE INTEGRITY OF ACTUATOR CIRCUITS(CHECK 1012)
Description
This requirement will check the integrity of checking windings of РА and ПОС circuits. This
check will be carried out only in the absence of hydro system.
Input
NA
Processing
1. Check will be carried out only in the absence of attribute “presence of hydro
system”.
2. Set Fin simulator as zero.
3. Connect the output of fin simulator to input of УРТ and input of fin simulator to out of
УРТ through signal (B_UPR1_WIH1_IRA, B_UPR1_WH1_IRA)
4. Initialize the device К314-43 and blocking timers.
5. Issue 1553B command containing ПКН to К314-43.
6. Measure the ПНК by reading message through 1553B.
7. Measure the angle of deflection of ИРА from input УРТ_И through signal B_URT1_I
and store result as delta.
8. Analyze the measurement.
9. Disconnect the Fin Simulator from input and output of УРТ.
10. Issue ПКН of compensating deviation (-delta) through 1553B command to К314-43.
11. Measure the voltage from output of УРТ.
12. Measure ПНК.
13. Issue the command to К314-43 with following angles (1.0, -1.0, 15.0, -15.0) by
subtracting delta.
14. Introduce the time delay {80, 80, 64, 64} after issuing the input angle to К314-43.
15. Measure ПНК.
16. Measure the voltage from output of УРТ.
17. Analyze the measurement. Repeat Step 11 to Step 15.
18. Repeat Step 1 to Step 18 for channels (0, 1, 2, 3) of fin simulator.
19. Initialize the device К314-43 and blocking timers.
Output
Display the status of parameter P1 to P20 and TP1 to TP20.

Confidential
3.1.3.12 CHECKING ACTUATOR DEFLECTION AS PER MIU SIGNALS (CHECK 1014)
Description
This requirement will check the deflection of fin actuator as per signals ПКН of device
CК314-43. In absence of hydro system, the measurement of a fin positions will be carried
out with the help of Fin simulator in the checkout system.
Input
NA
Processing
1. Check the article type. If article type is “Type A”, stop the check.
2. Send query for the signal X2 connected and if it is absent exit from check.
3. Configure the 1553B channel(1) as controller(BC).
4. Initialize К314-43.
5. Check the attribute for absence of hydro system.
6. If attribute hydro system is absent, connect the output of fin simulator to input and
output of УРТ.
7. Check the initial deflection of Fin actuator(PA) and analyze the measurement of
parameter (TP1, TP2, TP3, TP4 (0.0±3.0)).
8. Check the deflection of PA1 for input angles (0.0, 12.5, 25.0, 0.0, -12.5, -25.0) and
analyze the measurement (B_URT1_I, B_URT2_I, B_URT3_I, B_URT4_I).
DEFLECTION INPUT ANGLES ADC SIGNAL CHECKED

PARAMETER PARAMETER
PA1 (0.0,12.5, 25.0, 0.0, (B_URT1_I,B_URT2_I, P1, P2, P3, P4,
-12.5, -25.0) B_URT3_I,B_URT4_I) P5, P6

PARAMETER PARAMETER
PA2 (0.0,12.5, 25.0, (B_URT1_I, B_URT2_I, P7, P8,P9, P10,
0.0, -12.5, -25.0) B_URT3_I, B_URT4_I) P11,P 12

Confidential

PARAMETER PARAMETER
PA3 (0.0,12.5, 25.0, (B_URT1_I, B_URT2_I, P13, P14, P15,
0.0, -12.5, -25.0) B_URT3_I, B_URT4_I) P16, P17, P18
11. Check the deflection of PA4 for input angles (0.0,12.5, 25.0, 0.0,-12.5, -25.0) and
DEFLECTIO INPUT ANGLES ADC SIGNAL CHECKED
N PARAMETER
PARAMETER
PA4 (0.0, 12.5, 25.0, 0.0, (B_URT1_I, B_URT2_I, P19, P20, P21,
-12.5, -25.0) B_URT3_I, B_URT4_I) P22, P23, P24
12. If work mode is “factory tests with К311”, analyze the ТМ signals.
ADC SIGNAL
B_FNC41_STI
B_FNC42_STI
B_FNC43_STI
B_FNC44_STI
B_WIH1_STI
B_WIH2_STI
B_STI3_WIH
B_STI4_WIH
B_MPNK1_STI
13. Initialize К314-43.
14. Check the presence of command «Ликв».
15. Check the deflections of fin actuator and analyze the measurement of initial
deflections (parameters TP1, TP2, TP3, TP4).
16. If work type is “factory tests with К311”, send the command “the permission of
liquidation” (B_RAZRESH_L), else analyze the measurement after sending
command «permission of liquidation» (accordingly parameters Р38, Р39, Р40,
Р41).
17. Check the presence of signal "Error OBC" (B_NEISPR_BCWM_WH).
18. Remove command «permission of liquidation»(B_RAZRESH_L) if work type is
“factory tests with К311”.
19. Analyze the measurement of deflections of РА (parameters Р42, Р43, Р44, Р45).
20. Check the absence of signal "Error OBC".
21. Set the device СК314-43 in initial condition.
22. Switch OFF the Fin simulator from input and output of УРТ.
Output

Confidential
Not Applicable
3.1.3.13 CHECKING RGP SENSOR DEVICE (CHECK 1016)

Description
This requirement will check the functionality of RGP. In absence of hydro system the
measurements of fine positions will be carried out with the help of(Fin simulator) ИРА in
the Checkout.
Input
NA
Processing
1. Check the article type. If article type is type A, stop the check.
2. Send query for the signal X2 connection and if the signal is absent, exit from check.
3. Configure the 1553B channel(1) as controller and initialize К314-43.
4. Check the attribute for the absence of hydro system.
5. If attribute hydro system is absent, connect the output of fin simulator to input and
output of УРТ.
6. Check the initial deflection of Fin actuator(PA) and analyze the measurement of
Parameter (TP1,TP2,TP3,TP4(0.0±3.0)).
7. Send request for transfer of angular velocities from К314-47 (receive parameters
P1, P2, P3).
8. Measure deflections of Fin actuator PA (ИРА) and analyze the parameter (P4, P5,
P6 and P7).
9. Send the command УРВ (К9).
10. Corrective action in initial position of fin on sending command УРВ in a mode
К314-47 will be carried out.
11. Measure РА and estimation of results (parameters P10, P11, P12, P13).
12. Measure and estimate ТМ signals (P50).
13. Set the command to establish the mode К314-47 «simulation 1».
14. Receive the parameter P14, P15, P16.
15. Measure the deflections of РА (ИРА) parameters (P21, P22, P17, P20)
16. Set the command to establish the mode К314-47 « simulation 2 ».
17. Receive the parameter P23, P24, P25.
18. Measure the deflections of РА (ИРА) parameters (P30, P31, P26, P27)
19. Command УРВ will be removed.
20. Measure the deflections of РА (ИРА) parameters (P44, P45, P46, P47).
21. Initialize К314-43 and disconnect the 1553B channel(1) from mainline.
Output

Confidential
Not Applicable

Confidential
3.1.3.14 CHECKING RADIO ALTIMETER DEVICE(CHECK 1019)
Description
The requirement will check the serviceability of a unit К313, interaction with the СК314-43
and telemetering device of a article СК310-000000.
Input
NA
Processing
The following operation will be carried out in the check 1019.
1. Configure the 1553B channel-1 as Controller on M1.
2. Initialize the device СК314-43(ui314 _ 43 function not available).
3. Check К313 in mode "CHECKING".The checking will be carried out on 400
recurrences within 5 seconds of frequency 80.
4. On successful completion of check for 400 times, the status of Parameter P1
(NORM) will be displayed for print.
5. Check the output of TM signals ВИП РВ ", "НРВ", "ДД".
6. Check the attribute “presence of tester antenna”.
7. If the tester antenna is connected, the command "OPERATION" will be given
through the device СК314-43.
8. Checking of К313 will be carried out in "OPERATION " mode. The checking will be
carried out on 400 recurrences.
9. On successful completion of check (i.e) 400 times, the status of Parameter P2
10. Measure and analyze the TM signals.
11. Issue the command for K14-OPERATION.
12. Checking of К313 will be carried out in a mode "CHECKING". The checking will be
carried out on 400 recurrences within 5 seconds of frequency 80.
Output
Not Applicable

Confidential
3.1.3.15 CHECKING RUSSIAN TELEMETRY DEVICE (CHECK 1020)

Description
This requirement will check the serviceability of unit К313, interaction with the СК314-43
and telemetering device of a article СК310-000000.
Input
NA
Processing
The following operation will be carried out in check 1020.
1. Send query for the connection of signal X2 and if it is absent, exit from the check.
2. Configure the 1553B channel(1) as Controller on M1.
3. Initialize the device СК314-43(ui314 _ 43 function not available).
carried out on 400 recurrences within 5 seconds of frequency 80 Hz.
5. On successful completion of check 400 times NORM of Parameter P1 is displayed
for print.
6. The output of TM signals “ВИП РВ", "НРВ", "ДД" will be checked and the
appropriate message will be displayed on the screen.
7. Check the presence of attribute tester antennas and if the tester antenna are not
connected, check in a mode the OPERATION is not made, on the screen the
message is deduced.
8. If tester antenna is connected, send the command "OPERATION" through the
device СК314-43.
9. Checking of К313 will be carried out in a mode " OPERATION ". The checking
will be carried out on 400 recurrences.
10. On successful completion of check (I.e) 400 times, the status of Parameter P2
11. Measure and analyze the TM signals.
12. Issue the command for K14-OPERATION.
carried out on 400 recurrences within 5 seconds of frequency 80 HZ.
Output
Not Applicable

Confidential
3.1.3.16 CHECKING OF DEVICE АСОНД-Ц THROUGH M1 AND M3 BUSES
(CHECK 1022)
Description
Test the device АСОНД-Ц(ТСУ-Р) on mainline М1
Input
NA
Processing
1. Check the connection of signal X2.
2. Initialize the test array for transferring along M1 and M2.
3. Switch ON SEP2 power supply.
4. Issue test array on M1.
5. Issue test array on M2.
6. Switch off SEP2 power supply.
Output
Not Applicable
3.1.3.17 INS INTEGRATED CHECK (CHECK 1024)

Description
This requirement will check the device СК315-1 using checkout within 500 seconds of
frequency 80 Hz and it will be carried out only after issuing unlocking command in check
1202.
Input
NA
Processing
1. Check the time at which unblocking command was issued. If unblocking was not
issued, switch off the INS,SEP2 power supply.
2. Configure the channel(2) as controller on M2.
3. Cyclic checking for absence of analog signal “Error OBC” will be done. At
occurrence of the signal, stop the check.
4. Read data through M2 and analyze the information. After every reading, determine
the time Ткпа = Ттек(current Time)-Тразбл(unlock Time).
5. Store the read data in buffer.
6. Calculate the deflection from face value for all nine checking lable parameters.
7. Verify the status word of the device СК314-1. If the status word is not equal to
expected word, stop the check.

Confidential
8. Verify the divergence of times Тбцвм (in a array of an exchange) and Ткпа. At
divergence of times, stop the check.
9. The exchanges stop in the following cases:
(a) At achievement of 500 seconds - regular stopping.
(b) Occurrence of two successive failure in reading M2 bus.
(c) In presence of attribute " Faulty БЦВМ ".
(d) inauthenticity of the data.
(e) Divergence of time БЦВМ and time КПА (tp2).
Output
1. Display the time Ткпа value in screen on every 10 second interval.
2. Write the buffer data in file Pхххх _ xx.dat.
3.1.3.18 CHECKING INS (CHECK 1025)

Description
This requirement will check the stand alone check of device СК314-1 along mainline М1.
Input
NA
Processing
The following operation will be carried out in this check.
1. Switch ON the INS and SEP2 power supply.
2. Perform self check and verify the result.
3. Load the data in to device СК314-1(value of breadth, longitude, the heights and
azimuth from additional information).
4. After 6.2 seconds of data loading, check the sensor in the device.
5. Check the test of positioning.
6. Check exhibition and drift insitu.
7. Check performance of static navigation.
8. Disconnect the INS and SEP2 power supply.
Output
Not Applicable

Confidential
3.1.3.19 CHECKING OBC (CHECK 1026)
Description
This requirement will check the stand alone check of device СК315-1 along mainline М2.
Input
NA
Processing
1. Check the article type. If it is type “A”, stop the check.
2. Switch on the SEP2 supply.
3. Perform express-test of device СК315-1 and verify the result. Evaluate parameters
P2-Р8 based on read out results.
4. After 25ms of reading the results of express train-test, send the command to
conduct the integrated check.
5. Wait for 6 minutes and 40 seconds.
6. Read the results of integrated checks. Evaluate parameters P10-Р22 on the basis
of read out results.
7. Switch off the SEP2 supply.
Output
Not Applicable
3.1.3.20 CHECKING GPS(K323)(CHECK 1027)

Description
This requirement will check the initial data (ID21, ID22, ID25 and ID26) and target data in to
device k323(GPS).
Input
Initial data and target data.
Processing
2. Issue 1553B command to start initial data loading.
3. Load the initial data ID21and verify initial data loading(ID21) by reading checksum.
4. Load initial data ID22 and verify the loading by reading checksum value.
7. Load the target data and issue end of initial data loading.
Output
Not Applicable

Confidential
3.1.3.21 CHECKING COMMAND RECEIVING UNIT OF MIU(CHECK 1046)
Description
This requirement will check the functionality of СК314-43 input circuit by issuing command
from checkout. The device СК314-43 functionality will be verified by consecutive distribution
of commands С1 - С10 with Checkout and subsequent check of answer-back signal into
device СК314-43.
3.1.3.22 CHECKING PLP MODE(CHECK 1202)

Description
This requirement will check the mode pre-launch preparation of the system СК311. In this
check SEP2 will interact with the system СК311 on a mainline М2 and its frequency of
operation will be 40 HZ.
Input
Get FM1, FM2, FM3 and MINS data from additional information.
Processing
The following operation will be carried out during the execution of the check 1202.
1. Switch off the SEP2 power supply.
2. Configure the 1553B channel M2 as controller.
3. Frame the FM1, FM2 and MINS array data from additional information.
4. Calculate the checksum for FM1, FM2, FM3 and MINS data.
5. Send the FM1, FM2, FM3 and MINS data to panel computer (for display).
6. Switch ON the INS power supply.
7. Switch ON the SEP2 power supply.
8. Wait for 2.05 ms from removing of Switch off SEP2.
9. Read the passport data of device СК315-1. Analyze the content of first word of
array and generate “Readiness1” attribute in presence of "1" in the analyzed
categories.
10. If failure passport data reading results failure, repeat the reading one more time.
11. Load the FM1 data and end of FM1 input.
12. After 25ms read out the array(Array of Document parameter), analyze the norm of
FM1 input and generate “Readiness 2" attribute.
13. If failure happen during “FM1 data loading”, repeat the loading.
14. Issue sync, MINS data, End of MINS and read ADP every 25 ms interval.
15. After reading ADP, analyze the content of NORM register and sync count. Repeat
this operation until 119ms.
16. After 1119ms, check the NORM “INS in inertial Mode”.

Confidential
17. Send the command “Rise of the container” instead of sync command.
18. Send the FM2 data and end of FM2.
19. Repeat the FM2 data loading if failure happen during the exchange.
20. After input of FM2, read ADP array, analyze NORM for “FM2 loading OK” and
attribute " Readiness 3 " is formed.
21. Send FM3 data and end of FM3.
22. Read ADP data.
23. Issue unlock command.
Output
Store the ADP data in file.
3.1.3.23 LOADING PROGRAM IN TO OBC (CHECK 1500)

Description
This requirement will check the loading of program (nuclei OS QNX and filing system with
Software) in to the device OBC(CK315-1) from SEP2 through 1553B interface along
mainline M2.
Inputs
1. Select the Device for program loading (CK315-1).
2. Select the Device type for reading the input program (CD or Floppy).
3. Display the checksum of the program in the panel computer.
RT to BC Messages
S.NO CHANNAL RT- SUB- WORDCOUNT BUFFER
ADDRESS ADDRESS
1 1 1 1 2 buf2[0]==0xAAAA
buf2[1]==0x007F
2 1 1 20 32

Confidential
BC to RT Message
S.NO CHANNEL RT-ADDRESS SUB-ADDRESS WORD COUNT BUFFER
1 1 1 3 3 buf1[0]=0x2222
;
buf1[1]=0x1111
;
buf1[2]=0xAAA
A;
2 1 1 1 8 buf1[0] =
0xAAAA
buf1[1] = 1
buf1[2] =
0x1111
buf1[3] =
0x11DD
buf1[4]=0
buf1[5]=0xFFC0
buf1[6]=0
buf1[7]=0xFFDC
3 1 1 1 5 buf1[0] =
0xAAAA
buf1[1] = 2
buf1[2] =
0x1111
buf1[3] =
0x11AA
buf1[4]=
num_block
(block number)
4 1 1 (2,3,4......17) 32 Block Data.
5 1 1 1 5 buf1[0] =
0xAAAA
buf1[1] = count(increment count)
buf1[2] =
0x1111
buf1[3] =
0x11BB
buf1[4]=

Confidential

csumBlock(ch
ecksum of the
block)
6 1 1 1 5 buf1[0] =
0xAAAA
buf1[1] =
count(increme
nt count)
buf1[2] =
0x1111
buf1[3] =
0x11CC
buf1[4]=
num_block
(block number)
7 1 1 1 8 buf1[0] =
0xAAAA
buf1[1]=count(incr
ement count)
buf1[2] =0x222
buf1[3] =0x22AA
buf1[4]=0
buf1[5]=0xFFC0
buf1[6]=0
buf1[7]=0xFFDC
8 1 1 1 3 buf1[0]=0xAAAA
;
buf1[1]=count(i
ncremental
count);
buf1[2]=0x5555
;
9 1 1 1 8 buf1[0] =
0xAAAA
buf1[1]=count(in
crement
count)

Confidential

buf1[2] =0x222
buf1[3] =0x22AA
buf1[4]=0
buf1[5]=0xFFC0
buf1[6]=0
buf1[7]=0xFFE0
Processing
Step 1
1. Switch ON the SEP2 power supply.
2. Read the input file and compute the check sum (addition method).
3. Wait for 3 second after switching ON the SEP2 supply.
Step 2
4. Configure the 1553B channel(2) as Controller and disconnect Channel(1) from main
line.
5. Read express-diagnostic result of CK315-1 by scheduling the 1553B message
format (Table RT to BC Messages S.NO 1) and validate the message execution
status. If message execution status results failure, go to Step 4.
6. Analysis the received status(buf2[1] == 7F). If the status is success, send NORM
message. Else send NONORM message for respective NOT OK bit position.
Step 3
7. Issue the command for transfer into technological mode by scheduling 1553B
message format (Table BC to RT Messages S.NO1).
8. Wait for 5.5 second.
Step 4
9. Send the command containing following information (Mode of operation of flash,
Higher Order initial address, Higher Order final Address etc.) by scheduling 1553B
message(Table BC to RT Message S.No 2) to CK315-1. If the status is NOT OK
repeat this step one more time. If again status is NOT OK go end step.
10. Introduce the delay for 8 second.
11. Send query for the result of previous exchange by scheduling 1553B message
(Table RT to BC Message S.No 2).

Confidential
Step 5
12. Identify the number of block(blocksize =1024, NoofBlock = fsize/blocksize).
13. Before sending every block of data, send the command indicating the start of block
transfer(Table BC to RT Message S.NO 3)to CK315-1.
15. Each block contains 1024 byte of data. Send 32 word data at a time with message
format (Table BC to RT Message S.No 4). After sending, check the message status.
Repeat this step to transfer entire block of data(16 * 64 = 1024) with sub address
varies from (2, 3....17).
16. After transferring every block of data (1024 bytes), send the command to indicate
the end of Block (Table BC to RT 5 ).
(Table RT to BC Message S.No 2). Check the received checksum with calculated
checksum.
18. Repeat Step 13 to Step 17 untill entire block of data is transferred completely.
Step 6
19. Transfer remaining data (non multiple of block size) by scheduling the message
indicating the start of block transfer(Table BC to RT Message S.NO 6)to CK315-1.
20. Send query for the result of previous exchange by scheduling 1553B
message(Table RT to BC Message S.No 2).
21. Transfer the remaining data block with message format (Table BC to RT Message
S. No 4).
22. After transferring every block of data, send the command to indicate the end of
Block (Table BC to RT 5).
23. Send query for the result of previous exchange by scheduling 1553B
message(Table RT to BC Message S. No 2).
24. After transferring entire data, send the command to read the checksum of
Flash-memory in CK315-1 device (Table BC to RT S.NO 7).
25. Introduce the delay for 20 seconds.
27. Compare the received checksum with computed checksum.
28. Issue the command (Table BC to RT S.No 9) to calculate the checking sum of area
of Flash-memory of the programs and ПД(passport Data).
Step 7

Confidential
29. Issue the command to indicate the completion of technological mode by
scheduling1553B message format (Table BC to RT Messages S.NO 8).
Step 8
30. Disconnect the 1553B channel(2) from mainline.
31. Switch off the supply to SEP2.
Output
1. Check Sum of the Block will be computed and displayed.
2. Checksum of area of the program will be displayed.
3. At NONORM(Not Normal) condition, the loading of program will be stopped and a
message will appear in the screen stating ”Block ...” and parameter tp7 _ 1(Loading
block of program in CK315-1) will be deduced.
4. At NORM (Normal) condition, the parameter tp7 _ 1 will be displayed.
3.1.3.24 READING AND CHECKING SUM OF THE EXECUTABLE PROGRAMS IN

OBC(CK315-1)(CHECK 1505)
Description
This requirement will verify the existing program checksum(already available in flash) with
the computed checksum of the flash memory content(0xFFC00000 – 0xFFDBFFFF) in the
device CK315-1. 1553B interface is used for communication purpose(SEP2-Bus Controller,
CK315-1-Remote Terminal(1)). This check will read and check the sum of the executable
program of type-B article.
Inputs
1. Article type B
2. Type of operation (“Control”)
RT to BC
S.NO CHANNEL RT- SUB- WORDCOUNT DESCRIPTION
ADDRESS ADDRESS
1 1 1 1 2 Express-diagnostic
result of CK315-1
2 1 1 20 32 Read checksum of
field Flash-memory
3 1 1 20 32 Status checking
command for reading
flash memory
4 1 1 20 32 Status checking for

Confidential

ADDRESS ADDRESS
block number
command
BC to RT
ADDRESS ADDRESS
1 1 1 3 3 Start of
Technological Mode
2 1 1 1 8 Command to read
existing checksum in
Flash-memory
3 1 1 1 8 Command for
identifying field
Flash-memory for
reading
4 1 1 1 5 Command to
identifying the
current block number
(varies from1 to
1792) for reading
5 1 1 (2,3...17) 32 Data (Flash memory
content)
6 1 1 1 3 End of Technological
Mode
Processing
The following operation are carried out in Check 1505.
2. Configure 1553B channel(2) as Bus Controller(become Controller on M2).
3. Wait for 3 second after switching ON SEP2 power supply.
4. Read the express-diagnostic result of CK315-1 through 1553B.
5. Issue the command(1553B) for transfer into technological mode.
6. Issue the command(1553B) for reading the checksum of the loaded program.
7. Issue the command(1553B) for reading the checksum of the loaded program
8. Before reading flash memory content, identify the block number. it should vary from
1 to 1792.

Confidential
9. Compute the checksum (by addition) of the loaded program by reading the flash
memory content (block by block where block varies from 1 to 1792).
10. Repeat Step 8 to Step 9 for block number varies from 1 to 1792.
11. Verify the computed checksum with actual checksum(read from flash).
12. Issue the command(1553B) to indicate the completion of technological mode.
14. Switch OFF the supply to SEP2.
Output
1. Checksum for block will be displayed.
2. Checksum for area of the program will be displayed.
3.1.3.25 LOADING PASSPORT DATA OF “TYPE B” ARTICLE IN TO OBC(СК315-1)

(CHECK 1503)
Description
This requirement will load the passport data in to the device OBC(CK315-1(Type B article))
through 1553B interface along with M2. The SEP2 acts as BC(Bus Controller)of M2 and
CK315-1 acts as Remote Terminal(1) of M2.The passport data contains 64 words.
Input
1. Type B Article
2. User input passport data stored in the panel computer
RT to BC
ADDRESS ADDRESS
result of CK315-1
command “start of
Flash-memory
location for write
passport data”
command
“identifying the
current block number
for writing passport
data”

Confidential

ADDRESS ADDRESS
command
identifying the end of
block
command
“identifying the last
block number 256”
command
“identifying the end
of last block”
command
“read check sum of
field Flash-memory “
BC to RT
S.NO CHANNEL RT- SUB- WORDCOU DESCRIPTION
ADDRESS ADDRESS NT
1 1 1 3 3 Start of Technological
Mode
2 1 1 1 8 Identify start of Flash-
memory location for
write passport data
3 1 1 1 5 Command to identifying
the current block
number( varies from1 to
255 ) for writing
passport data
4 1 1 (2,3...17) 32 Passport data
5 1 1 1 5 Command identifying
the end of block
the start of last block
number 256

Confidential

ADDRESS ADDRESS NT
7 1 1 (2,3...17) 32 Last block of data
the end of last block
9 1 1 1 8 read check sum of field
Flash-memory
Mode
Processing
3. Wait for 3 seconds after switching ON the SEP2 power supply.
4. Read the express-diagnostic result of CK315-1 through 1553B.
5. Read the Passport data stored in file(from panel computer).
6. Issue the command(1553B) for transfer in to technological mode
7. Issue the command indicating start of flash write(starting and ending address etc)
to CK315 .
8. Before sending every block of data, send the command indicating the start of block
transfer.
9. Send query for the result of previous exchange.
10. Each Block contains 1024 byte of data. Send 32 word data at a time.
11. After transferring every block of data (1024 bytes), send the command to indicate
the end of Block.
13. Repeat Step 8 to Step 12 until entire block(255) of passport data transfer is
completed.
14. Send the command indicating the start of last block(256) transfer.
15. Send the last block data.
16. Send the command indicating end of last block.
17. Send the command to read the checksum of the flash memory(0xFFDC to 0xFFE0).
18. Send the command to read the checksum of the flash memory
(0xFFC0 to 0xFFE0).
19. Issue the command to indicate the completion of technological mode.

Confidential
Output
Check results will be printed out.
3.1.3.26 READING THE PASSPORT DATA OF THE “TYPE B” ARTICLE FROM OBC
(CHECK 1504)
Description
This requirement will read the passport data of “type B” Article from the device CK315-1
through 1553B interface along M2. The passport data will be read from the Flash memory
location(0xFFDC0000 to 0xFFDFFFFF) and display the ten words of first block in the
screen. The SEP2 acts as a BC (Bus Controller) of M2, CK315-1 acts as Remote
Terminal(1).
Input
Type B Article
RT to BC
ADDRESS ADDRESS NT
result of CK315-1
2 1 1 20 32 Status command
for(reading checksum,
passport data, block
command)
BC to RT
ADDRESS ADDRESS NT
1 1 1 3 3 Start of Technological
Mode
2 1 1 1 8 Read checksum of
flash memory.
3 1 1 1 8 Read passport data
from flash memory
the current block
number (varies from1 to

Confidential

ADDRESS ADDRESS NT
255)
5 1 1 2 32 First portion of passport
data
6 1 1 3 32 Second portion of
passport data
Mode
Processing
The following operation will be carried out during the execution of the check AP 1504.

3. Wait for 3 second after switching ON SEP2 power supply.
4. Read the express-diagnostic result of CK315-1 through 1553B
5. Issue the command(1553B) for transfer in to technological mode
6. Delay for 5.5 second.
7. Issue the command to read check sum of field Flash-memory.
9. Issue the command to read passport data from Flash-memory of device СК315-1.
11. Issue the command to indicate block number of passport data to read
12. Read passport data.
13. Issue the command to indicate the completion of technological mode.
Outputs
Display the ten words in the first block of passport data.

Confidential
3.1.3.27 PROGRAM LOADING IN TO THE DEVICES К312-10В(CHECK 1501)

Requirement ID:DP_COE_SEP2_REQ_27
Description
This requirement will load programs in to the device К312-10В along mainline М1 with
frequency of 400 HZ. The SEP2 is the controller of M1 and device К312-10В will operate
as RT(1). The following files are loaded in to K312-10B,
1. Programmer flash under the name(prg_flsh.com) is loaded in RAM with address

(0913000)
2. Nucleus ОS QNX under the name oszagr or os (on to flash - disc
0*FFE1000)
3. File System with name img... (on to flash - disc 0*FFE9000)
Input
1. Select the device К312-10В for program loading.
2. Input of additional informations.
3. Read the input file that has to be loaded in to the device K312-10B.
Processing
Determine Mode for loading(Kod())

2. If the Work Type is not factory tests with К312 and stand for factory check of К312,
realizing the initialization of program into device СК315-1 and determine the
presence of “readiness 1”.
3. Configure the 1553B channel(1) as controller.
4. Read the express-diagnostic status and validate the status.
5. Transfer into technological mode.
6. Read Programmer flash file (prg_flsh.com) and load it with (RAM Address
(0x09130000), Flash adrress (0), checksum(0))
7. If loading the file is NOT OK, repeat the process one more time. If failure occur in
repeated loading, disconnect the M1 and switch OFF SEP2 supply.
8. Check the availability for next loadable file (QNX OS or file system image). If the
files are not available, disconnect the M1 and switch OFF SEP2 supply.
9. Accomplishes loading of nucleus QNX or of filing system. Loading is done in
portions along 32 Kb
10. Compute the file checksum (addition of bytes).
Confidential
11. If Loadable file is QNX OS, load it with RAM Address(0x20000000), Flash
Address(0xFFE10000, block size(32K), device number,checksum)). File loading
should be repeated if error occurs during loading.
12. If Loadable file is QNX File System, load it with RAM Address(0x20000000), Flash
Address(0xFFE90000, block size(32K),device number,checksum). File loading
should be repeated if error occurs during loading.
13. Repeat the Step 8 to Step 12 until all loadable file entry are loaded.
15. Switch OFF the SEP2 power supply.
Output
1. The check sum of file will be displayed.
2. If the second trial in loading the file is unsuccessful, a message “not ok of entry
of programmer flash” will be issued.
3. The results of entry of portion will be displayed after monitoring the logical
parameter tp3_1 or tp3_2. On receiving negative result, a message “not ok of entry
of portion into flash” will be issued.

Confidential
3.1.3.28 PROGRAM LOADING IN TO THE DEVICES К312-10A(CHECK 1502)

Description
This requirement will load programs into the device К312-10A along with mainline М1 with
frequency of 400 HZ. The SEP2 will act as the controller of M1 and К312-10A device will
operate as RT(1). The following files are loaded in to К312-10A,
1. Programmer flash under the name (prg_flsh.com) is loaded in RAM with address
(0913000).
2. Nucleus ОS QNX under the name oszagr or os (on to flash - disc 0*FFE1000)
3. File system with name img... (on to flash - disc 0*FFE9000)
Inputs
1. Select the device К312-10A for loading of program.
2. Input of additional informations.
3. Read the input file that has to be loaded in to the device K312-10A.
Processing
Determine Mode for loading(Kod()).
1. Switch ON the power supply of SEP2.

2. If the WorkType is not factory tests with К312 and stand for factory check of К312,
realize the initialization of program into device СК315-1 and determine the
presence of “readiness 1”.
3. Configure the channel(1) as controller.
4. If work type is factory test with К312, issue the command «ON. Обр» for feeding
the supply to device К312-10А. Else issue the command «ON. Обр» into device
К314-43.(per_com_maj43(K24_43,1)).
7. Read Programmer flash file (prg_flsh.com) and load it with (RAM Address
(0x09130000), Flash adrress(0), checksum(0)).
8. If loading the file results NOT OK, repeat the process one more time. If failure
occurs in repeated loading, disconnect the M1 and switch off SEP2 supply.
9. Check the availability for next loadable file (QNX OS or file system image). If the file
is not available, disconnect the M1 and switch OFF SEP2 supply.
10. Accomplishes loading of nucleus QNX or of filing system. Loading is done in
portions along 32 Kb.
Confidential
11. Compute the file checksum (addition of bytes).
12. If Loadable file is QNX OS, load it with (RAM Address(0x20000000), Flash Address
(0xFFE10000, block size(32K), device number, checksum)). File loading should be
repeated if error occurs in loading.
13. If Loadable file is QNX File System, load it with (RAM Address(0x20000000), Flash
Address (0xFFE90000, block size(32K), device number, checksum). File loading
should be repeated if occurs error in loading.
14. Repeat Step 9 to Step 13 until all loadable file entry are loaded.
Output
1. The check sum of file will be calculated and displayed.
2. If the second trial in file loading is not successful, a message “not ok of entry of
programmer flash” will be issued for the information.
3. The results of entry portion will be displayed to the operator after monitoring the
logical parameter tp3_1 or tp3_2.
4. On receiving negative result, a message “not ok of entry of portion into flash” will
be issued.

Confidential
3.1.3.29 PROGRAM FOR COUNTING AND CHECKING SUM OF EXECUTABLE
PROGRAM IN K312-10B(CHECK 1506)
Description
This requirement will count the checksum and signature of program loaded into device
К312-10B. The exchange of information is done along with mainline М1. The SEP2 is the
controller of M1 and device К312-10B operates as the RT(1)
Inputs
1. Program for counting the signatures under the name Csign_fls.com; is loaded in
RAM with address 0x0913000.
2. The file monitored for the checksum verification.
a) Nucleus ОS QNX oszagr (on to flash - disc of address 0xFFE1000).
b) File system img (on to flash - disc 0xFFE9000).
Processing
The following operation will be carried out during the execution of the check 1506

realize the initialization of program into device СК315-1, and determine the
presence of “readiness 1”
6. Read Programmer flash file (csign_fl.com) and load it with (RAM Address
7. If loading of file results NOT OK, repeat the process one more time. If failure occurs
in repeated loading, disconnect the M1 and switch SEP2 supply.
8. Check whether the nucleus QNX is accomplished by the function Load_csg
(adres_flash, fsize,pribor,cs,&zgr.a[1].path,&zgr.a[0].path).
9. Check whether file system is accomplished by the function Load_csg
(adres_flash,fsize,pribor,cs,&zgr.a[2].path,&zgr.a[0].path).
Output
1. The checksum is displayed on the screen.
2. If error occur during successive loading of program Csign_fl.dat then switch off the
SEP2 supply and issue the Error message

Confidential
3.1.3.30 PROGRAM FOR COUNTING AND CHECK SUMMING OF THE EXECUTABLE
PROGRAM IN K312-10A(CHECK 1507)
Description
This requirement will count the checksum and signature of programs loaded into device
К312-10A. The exchange of information will be done along with mainline М1. The SEP2 is
the controller of M1 and device К312-10A operates as RT(1).
Input
3. Program for counting the signatures under the name Csign_fls.com; is loaded in
RAM with address 0x0913000.
4. The file monitored for the checksum verification
a) Nucleus ОС QNX oszagr (on to flash - disc of address 0xFFE1000).
b) File system img (on to flash - disc 0xFFE9000).
Processing
realize the initialization of program into device СК315-1 and determine the presence
of “readiness 1”.
4. If the work type is (factory tests with К312), issue the command «ON. Обр» for
feeding the supply to device К312-10А, else issue the command «ON. Обр» into
device К314-43.(per_com_maj43(K24_43,1)).
6. Transfer in to technological mode.
7. Read Programmer flash file(csign_fl.com) and load it with (RAM Address
8. If loading of file results NOT OK, repeat the process one more time. If failure occurs
in repeated loading, disconnect the M1 and switch SEP2 supply.
9. Check whether the nucleus QNX is accomplished by the function
Load_csg(adres_flash,fsize,pribor,cs,&zgr.a[1].path,&zgr.a[0].path).
10. Check whether the file system is accomplished by the function
Load_csg(adres_flash,fsize,pribor,cs,&zgr.a[2].path,&zgr.a[0].path).
11. Accomplish removal of command «ON. Обр» if the type of operation is СЗК К312 or
remove СВК through СЯ or through device СК314-43 and switch OFF the supply to
БАСУ.
12. Switch OFF the supply to БАСУ.
Confidential
Output
1. The checksum will be displayed on the screen.
2. If error occurs during successive loading of program Csign_fl.dat, switch OFF the
SEP2 supply and issue the Error message.
3.1.3.31 WRITING DATA AND PROGRAM IN TO THE DEVICE CK314-1 (CHECK1508)

Description
This requirement will load data and program into the device ck314-1 which is the part of
system СК311. It is also a part of the Article СК310 of type B. The SEP2 is controller of M1
and CK314-1 operates as RT(1).
Input
1. Select the device СК314-1 for loading of program.
2. Check AP 1508 is executed in selective mode.
3. The following files are loaded into the device CK314-1.
a) Sensor data in to the device CK314-1.
b) Programming of loadable image.
c) Checksum of given sensor and software under a name jvxxxchk.dat
corresponding to the device with serial number № xxx (the file from two
words, first word represents the check sum of the given sensor and second
word represents check sum of the software of device СК314-1.
Processing
The following operation will be carried out during the execution of the check 1508
(NIT_MKIO() ; initialization of types of exchange)
1. Switch ON INS and SEP2 supply.

2. Issue the command for loading the program in to the device CK314-1.
3. Read the data, program and checksum content into the respective file
(“data.bin”,”app.bin”,”chk.dat”).
4. Compute the checksum of data and program file and compare it with the checksum
file. Monitor the Parameter P2 and P4 . If any NONORM (Not Normal) condition
occurs, switch OFF the INS and SEP2 supply and disconnect the channel M1.
5. Load data into the device СК314-1 in block of 256 bytes.
6. Disconnect the supply of INS and SEP2.
Output

Confidential
1. If the result of loading of the block is not success, deduce NONORM (Not Normal) of
parameter р1.
2. At norm condition (Normal) input of all blocks with data, the norm of parameter р1 is
formed
3.1.3.32 LOADING OF PROGRAM OR ALMANAC IN TO THE DEVICE K323-1 (CHECK

1509 OR AP1510)
Description
This requirement will load the program or almanacs in to the device K323-1 which is
located as a part of type B article СК310.
3.1.3.33 CHECK OF ANTENNA DEVICE K312 (CHECK 1100)

Description
This requirement will check the drives of antenna device of system K312.
Input
1. Operational mode
2. Additional inputs
Processing
1. Perform initial and switch ON SEP2 bus.
a) Switch ON “SEP2 bus”
b) Send command “On Rev” to start the program of device К312-10В and
К312-10А.
Note : In case of any failure in the above steps, this check should not be continued.
2. Check the operation of antenna for direct controlling - testing and stabilization in the
given angular positions.
a) Give the control angles sequentially.
b) Read 30 measurement of angular position. Compute average, maximum
positive deflection and maximum negative deflection from the average to be
observed. The control angles to be verified and expected range of values for
each angular position are given in below table.

Confidential
AVG POSITION MAX +VE MAX -VE

VALUE DEFLECTION FROM DEFLECTION FROM
POSITION ANGLE EXPECTED AVERAGE AVERAGE
MAX MIN MAX MIN MAX MIN
Horizontal 0 0.20 -0.20 0.28 -0.28 0.28 -0.28
Vertical 0 0.20 -0.20 0.28 -0.28 0.28 -0.28
Horizontal 20 18.00 22.00 0.28 -0.28 0.28 -0.28
Horizontal 40 38.00 42.00 0.28 -0.28 0.28 -0.28
Horizontal -20 -18.00 -22.00 0.28 -0.28 0.28 -0.28
Horizontal -40 -38.00 -42.00 0.28 -0.28 0.28 -0.28
Vertical 12 10.00 14.00 0.28 -0.28 0.28 -0.28
Vertical -30 -28.00 -32.00 0.28 -0.28 0.28 -0.28
Vertical -12 -10.00 -14.00 0.28 -0.28 0.28 -0.28
3. Check the boundaries of narrow and wide sectors of scanning.

a) Check the angular position for narrow and wide sectors.
DIRECTION SECTOR EXPECTED POSITION VALUE
MAX MIN
Left Narrow 18.00 22.00
Right Narrow -18.00 -22.00
Left Wide 38.00 42.00
Right Wide -38.00 -42.00
4. Check the rate of scanning and stabilization of vertical angle in the process of
scanning while assigning the mode of scanning: sector – wide, direction – to left.
a) Read status image of device К312-10А. On the appearance of signal
ON.Обн in status word of system К312 (3 bit), which signals about the start
of zones of constant velocity of movement of antenna, memorizes the
number of cycle (start), where the ON.Обн. has appeared and the value of
horizontal angle Ψ1.
b) Get the value of end angle Ψ2, calculate and analyze the scanning rate as
per formula (Ψ2 –Ψ1)/0.025*(15-start) and evaluate the scanning rate of
antenna. It should be between 145-25 to 145+25.
c) The average value of vertical angle of antenna, its deviation from tolerance,
max positive and negative deviation from average are verified.

Confidential
POSITION ANGLE AVG POSITION MAX +VE MAX -IVE

VALUE DEFLECTION FROM DEFLECTION FROM
EXPECTED AVERAGE AVERAGE
MAX MIN MAX MIN MAX MIN
Vertical 0 -0.40 0.40 0.28 -0.28 0.28 -0.28
5. Check the testing of drive of antenna for sinusoidal action.

a) Sequentially it issues a series of 13 values. The value is taken as controlling
angles Ψ and Θ, which is obtained from the initial series by multiplying on
coefficient 0.46875 and the extrapolating correction is obtained as the
different of n+1 and n-th values, multiplied by the coefficient 0.031831
b) The calculated values are issued during this the series is issued twice and
the current value of dynamic error (ДО) is obtained as the difference
between the given series and current value of angle of antenna
c) The dynamic error (ДО) is evaluated for the 26 points.
d) The maximum positive and negative shall be evaluated from the last 13
points.
6. End of check
a) Remove command “On Rev” to stop the programs on devices К312-10В and
К312-0А
b) Switch OFF of “SEP2 bus”
Output
The test results will be displayed, logged and printed in panel computer (if required). The
1553B message transferred along channel 1 to be logged.
3.1.3.34 CHECK RECEIVING CHANNEL OF K312 (CHECK 1102)

Description
This requirement checks the receiving device of system K312.
Input
1. Operational mode
3. Presence of ИК1
Processing
1. Perform initial and switch ON of SEP2 bus.
a) Check the signal for readiness of device ИК1 “RF testing complex”. If the
signal is not present, the test should not be performed.
S.NO. SIGNAL NAME SIG TYPE STATU DESCRIPTION

Confidential
S
1. B_GOTOWNOCT DIP ON Readiness of ИК1
b) Remove commands from ИК1 and ИК1С

1. B_WKL_MOD DOP OFF Switch ON module
2. B_PACHKA DOP OFF Remove signal “Packet”
3. B_WKL_GEN_SH_1 DOP OFF Switch ON noise generator
1
4. B_WKL_GEN_SH_2 DOP OFF Switch ON noise generator
2
5. B_WKL_US1 DOP OFF Switch ON signal AMP 1
6. B_WKL_US2 DOP OFF Switch ON signal AMP 2
7. B_WKL_IK1 DOP OFF Switch ON IK1
8. B_AWTOMAT_REVIM DOP OFF Automatic mode
c) If the attribute for “RF testing complex” is present, issue the signal Fпчз and
check for the presence of “Perm.Вкл.f пч-з“.
1. B_WKL_F_PC_Z DOP ON Issue signal Fпчз
2. B_KWIT_WKL_F_PC_Z DIP ON presence of “Perm.Вкл.f пч-з“
d) If the “work mode” is selective then the noise is to be analyzed.

CHANNEL STATUS
S.NO SIGNAL NAME SIG TYPE DESCRIPTION
NO. MIN MAX
1 B_SUM_SIN_H_ ADC - - Sum Sin ш
1
2 B_D_SIN_H ADC - - D Sin ш
e) Switch ON “SEP2 bus”.

f) Send command “On Rev” to start the program of device К312-10В and
К312-10А.
g) To set antenna into zero position the following values are to be written into
the registers of device К312-10А.
Ψa = Ψsc = Θm = dΘm = Θs = Θa = Ψm = dΨm = Ψs = dTd = 0
h) Issue and remove the “Switch OFF of УВЧ and ДО”
i) If the test is not involve ИК1 “RF testing complex” Step 7 shall be performed

Confidential
2. Switch ON auto mode and IK1.
a) Issue command to switch ON “Auto mode” and check for the “Permission for
auto mode”
S.NO SIGNAL NAME SIGNAL TYPE STATUS DESCRIPTION
1 B_AWTOMAT_REVIM DOP ON switch ON of “Auto mode”
2 B_KWIT_AWTOMAT_REVI DIP ON Permission for “Auto
M mode”
b) Issue command to switch ON “IK1” and check for the “Permission for switch
ON of IK1”.
1 B_WKL_IK1 DOP ON switch ON of “IK1”
2 B_KWIT_WKL_IK1 DIP ON Permission for switch ON of
“IK1”
c) Issue command "ON.прив.", "КЧ", "Signal1" and "СК=1" into К312-10А.

Measure average value of natural noise along with channel "Sum sin Ш"
from КЧ – UsrKch.
STATUS
S.NO SIGNAL NAME SIG TYPE DESCRIPTION
MIN MAX
1 B_SUM_SIN_H_1 ADC - - Sum Sin ш
d) Switch ON ГШ1(Noise Generator), check the current ГШ and measure the

average value of natural noises along with channel "Sum sin Ш" from КЧ
and ГШ
1. B_WKL_GEN_SH_1 DOP ON Switches ON of
ГШ1(Noise Generator)
2. B_KWIT_WKL_GEN_S DIP ON Permission for Switches
H_1 ON of ГШ1(Noise
Generator)
S.NO SIGNAL NAME SIG TYPE STATUS DESCRIPTION

MIN MAX
1 B_KNTR_GH1 ADC 0.8 1.8 Measurement of
checking signal ГШ
2 B_SUM_SIN_H_1 ADC - - Sum Sin ш

Confidential
e) Check the ratio of measured Sum Sin ш in 3 and 4 (i.e., 3 / 4) and check
whether it is in range 3.8 with ±1.8 tolerance.
f) Switch OFF the Noise Generator.
S
1 B_WKL_GEN_SH_1 DOP OFF Switches ON of ГШ1(Noise
Generator)
2 B_KWIT_WKL_GEN_SH_1 DIP OFF Permission for Switches ON
of ГШ1(Noise Generator)
3. Check the operation of BARU.

a) Issue command "ON.прив.", "КЧ", "Signal1" and "СК=1" into К312-10А.
from КЧ.
b) Remove the command КЧ in К312-10А. Measure average value of natural
noise along with channel "Sum of sin Ш" without КЧ.
c) Switch ON УС1 and УС2 in ИК1. Measure average value of natural noise
along with channel "Sum sin Ш" from КЧ, УС1 and УС2.
d) The ratio of 2 and 3 is verified for 1.7 with ±0.5 tolerance.
e) Switch OFF УС1 and УС2.
4. Check the pass of command ДУ1 and ДУ2 (angle sensor).

a) Issue the command "ON. прив.", "КЧ", " Signal 1" and "СК=1" into К312-10А.
Measure average value of natural noise along with channel "Sum sin Ш" with
КЧ.
b) Switch ON УС1 and УС2 in ИК1. Measure average value of natural noise
along with channel "Sum sin Ш" with КЧ and УС1.
c) Issue command "ON. прив.", "КЧ", "Signal 1", "СК=1" and "ДУ1" into
К312-10А. Measure average value of natural noise along with channel "Sum
sin Ш" from КЧ, УС1 and ДУ1.
d) Verify the ratio of measurement 2 and 1, 2 and 3 for 6 with ±4.8 tolerance.
e) If the measurement 2 and 1, 2 and 3 are with in range, ratio of measurement
1 and 3 will be verified for 2 with ±2.5 tolerance.
f) If the ratio of measurement verified in 4 does not satisfy to the specified limit,
switch OFF УС1 and issue command "ON. прив.", "КЧ", "Сигнал 1", "СК=1"
and "ДУ1" into К312-10А. Measure average value of natural noise along with
channel "Sum sin Ш" from КЧ and ДУ1.

Confidential
g) Verify the change in the noise for access of ДУ1 and the ratio of
measurement 1 and 6 for 50 with ±48.8. If it is not with in the range, switch
ON YC1 using command “Switches on УС1”.
h) Issue command "ON.прив.", "КЧ", "Сигнал1", "СК=1" and "ДУ2" into К312
-10А. Measure average value of natural noise along with channel "Sum sin
Ш" with КЧ, УС1 and ДУ2.
i) Verify the ratio of measurement 1 and 8 for 1.5 with ±1.3 tolerance.
5. Check for the pass of command OFF PK.

a) Perform this step only if the work mode is “СЗК К311” or “СЗК К312” with
СВК.
b) Issue signal "ON.прив.", "КЧ", "Сигнал1" и "СК=1". Measure average value
of natural noises along with channel "Sum sin Ш" from КЧ.
c) Issue command "ON.прив.", "КЧ", "Сигнал1", "СК=1" и "OFF РК" into К312-
10А. Measure average value of natural noise along with channel "Sum sin
Ш" from КЧ and OFF РК.
d) Verify the ratio of measurement 2 and 3 for 4 with ±2 tolerance.
6. Check for the pass of command OFF УВЧ and ДО.

a) Issue command "ON.прив.", "КЧ", "Сигнал1" and "СК=1" into К312-10А.
from КЧ.
b) Switch on УС1. Measure average value of natural noises along with channel
"Sum sin Ш" from КЧ and УС1.
c) Issue command "ON.прив.", "КЧ", "Сигнал1", "СК=1" and "OFF.УВЧ" into
К312-10А. Measure average value of natural noise along with channel "Sum
sin Ш" from КЧ, УС1 and OFF УВЧ.
d) Verify the ratio of measurement 1 and 3 for 3 with ±1.5 tolerance.
e) Issue command "ON.прив.", "КЧ", "Сигнал1", "СК=1", "ДО" and "OFF УВЧ"
into К312-10А. Measure average value of natural noise along with channel
"Sum sin Ш" from КЧ, УС1, ДО and OFF УВЧ.
f) Verify the ratio of measurement 1 and 5 for 1.8 with ±1.0 tolerance.
g) Switch OFF of УС1.
7. Check for the pass of command “Signal 3”.

a) Issue command for switch ON of “Auto mode” and check for the “Permission
for auto mode”.

Confidential

S
2 B_KWIT_AWTOMAT_REVIM DIP ON Permission for “Auto mode”
b) Issue command for switch ON of “IK1” and check for the “Permission for
switch ON of IK1”.
2 B_KWIT_WKL_IK1 DIP ON Permission for switch ON of “IK1”
c) Issue command "ON.прив.", "Сигнал1", "СК=1" into К312-10А. Measure

average value of natural noise along with channel "Sum sin Ш".
d) Issue command "ON.прив.", "С3", "Сопр.Ц" и "СК=1" into К312-10А.
from УС1 and С3. The measurement should be ranging 3.2 with ±2.6
tolerance.
e) Verify the ratio of measurement 3 and 4 for 1.8 with ±1.0 tolerance.
8. Set ИК1 into initial condition.

a) Remove command “On Rev” to stop the program on devices К312-10В and
К312-0А.
b) Switch OFF “SEP2 bus”.
Output
1553B message transferred along with channel 1 will be logged.
3.1.3.35 CHECKING SUPPORT SIGNALS, ISSUED BY SYSTEM К312 (CHECK 1110)

<will be updated in next version>

Confidential
3.1.3.36 CHECKING TRANSMITTING DEVICE K312 (CHECK 1112)

Description
This requirement will transmit the device as per the currents of control detector (КД) and
power amplifier (УМ) of system K312.
Input
1. Operational mode
Processing
1. Verify the “Code of frequency number”
a) The should not be performed if the “Code of frequency number” is not 0066
or 1435
a) Switch ON “SEP2 bus”.
b) Send command “On Rev” to start the program of device К312-10В and
К312-10А.
3. Set antenna into the initial position.
a) To set antenna into zero position, write the following values into registers of
device К312-10А.
b) The value of start and width of zone of search (Dn=4266 and Dшз=192),
Ткор=3072 and accomplish zeroing of elements of RAM and registers К312-
0А. Issue command “ON.прив.", "Signal1", "СК=1", "OFF.УВЧ", "OFF. ПЧ",
"Ч2", "Обзор" into К312-10А.
c) Issue command "OFF. УМ" and issue the command "ON. ВН".
4. Check the current flow in Control detector(КД) and Power Amplifier(УМ) at С1 on

frequency 2.

Confidential
S.NO SIGNAL NAME SIG TYPE AVERAGE EXP DESCRIPTION

MIN MAX
1 B_K_I_KD ADC 0.2 2.8 Control detector
2 B_K_I_UM ADC 1.0 2.4 Power Amplifier
5. Check the current flow in Control detector(КД) and Power Amplifier(УМ) on С1 +

РМ-4 on frequency 2
MIN MAX
6. Measure current flow in Control Detector and Power Amplifier at С1 on different

frequencies.
a) If the “Code of frequency number” is not 1435, perform Step 10.
b) Issue the command "OFF.УВЧ", " Signal 1", "Ч1", "OFF ПЧ" are issued into
К312-10А. Measure the current in Control detector(КД) and Power
Amplifier(УМ).
MIN MAX
7. Measure current flow in Control Detector and Power Amplifier on С1 on

frequency 3.
a) Issue the command "OFF.УВЧ", " Signal 1", "Ч3", "OFF ПЧ" into К312-10А.
b) Measure the current flow in Control detector(КД) and Power Amplifier(УМ).
MIN MAX
8. Measure current flow in Control Detector and Power Amplifier on С1 on frequency 4.

a) Issue the commands "OFF.УВЧ", "Signal 1", "Ч4", "OFF ПЧ" in К312-10А.
b) Measure current flow in Control detector(КД) and Power Amplifier(УМ).

Confidential

MIN MAX
9. Measure current flow in Control Detector and Power Amplifier on С1 by retuning

frequency.
a) Issue command "OFF.УВЧ", "Signal 1" into К312-10А.
b) Measure current flow in Control detector(КД) and Power Amplifier(УМ).
MIN MAX
10. Measure the current flow in КД and УМ at С2 at frequency 2.

a) Issue the command "OFF. УВЧ", "Signal 2", "Ч2", "OFF ПЧ", "Захват",
"СК=1", "ON.прив." into К312-10А.
MIN MAX
11. Measure the current flow in КД and УМ at С3 at frequency 2.

a) Issue the command "OFF. УВЧ", "Signal 3", "Ч2", "OFF ПЧ", "Захват",
"СК=1.
MIN MAX
12. In initial condition install antenna for mode СЗК К312 or СВК.
a) If work mode is not СЗК К312 or СВК, the test should not be performed.

Confidential
b) Enter the following values in the register of device К312-10А for installing the
antenna into zero position.
Ψa=Ψsc=Θm=dΘm=Θs=Θa=Ψm=dΨm=Ψs=dTd=0
c) Issue the command "ON.прив.", "СК=1", "Захват" into К312-10А.
Accomplish zeroing of elements of RAM and writing of the initial values.
d) Issue and remove the command “Switch OFF of УВЧ and ДО”.
13. Issue the command "Signal 1", "СК=1", "Нач. обн.", "Обзор" and "OFF. ПК" into
К312-10А.
14. Measure the current flow in Iум ТМ и
15. Measure the current flow in Iкд Пик и
16. Remove the command "ON. Обр." and switch OFF SEP2.
a) Remove the command "ON. ВН." and issue the command "Switch off УМ".
b) Remove the command "ON. Обр".
c) Switch OFF SEP2.
Output
1553B message transferred along with channel 1 will be logged.

Confidential
3.1.3.37 CHECK OF MODES «О», «З» AND «С» OF SYSTEM К312 (CHECK 1150)
Description
This requirement will check the modes «О», «З» and «С» of system К312 with the help of
inbuilt elements for checking without switching on ВН.
Input
1. Operational mode
Processing
1. Switch ON OBCS and activate the transparency program. If any failure occurs, stop
the test.
2. Verify the number of detected targets in mode О.
3. Verify the presence of det sim. targets in given quant of range in mode О and verify
the bearing of sim. targets in mode О (with range -2.5 to 2.5).
4. Verify the detected targets in mode З.
5. Verify the increment of range in mode С high quality factor and Increment of Ac in
mode С.
6. Verify the increment of range in mode С low quality factor and Increment of Ac in
mode С.
7. Verify the tracking velocity of PSY(pos.) (with range 23.0 to 93.0) and tracking
velocity of PSY(neg.) (with range -23.0 to -93.0) at high quality factor.
8. Verify the tracking velocity of PSY(pos.) (with range 6.0 to 24.0) and tracking
velocity on PSY(neg.) (with range -6.0 to -24.0) at low quality factor.
9. Verify the tracking velocity of TETA(pos.) (with range 23.0 to 93.0) and tracking
velocity of TETA(neg.) (with range -23.0 to -93.0) at high quality factor.
10. Verify the tracking velocity of TETA(pos.) (with range 6.0 to 24.0) and tracking
velocity of TETA(neg.) (with range -6.0 to -24.0) at low quality factor.
11. Verify the ratio of tracking rates as per PSY at high and low Quality factors (with
range 2.5 to 5.5).
12. Verify the ratio of tracking rates as per TETA at high and low Quality factors (with
range 2.5 to 5.5).
Output

Confidential
3.1.3.38 CHECKING TELEMETRY SIGNALS OF SYSTEM К312 (CHECK 1160)

Description
This requirement will check the telemetry signals of system К312.
Input
1. Operational mode
Processing
1. Check for presence of attribute ИК1С
a) Check for presence of attribute ИК1С
a) The test should be performed only if the work type is СЗК К312.
b) Switch ON “SEP2 bus”.
c) Send command “On Rev” to start the programs of devices К312-10В and
К312-10А.
3. Switch ON auto mode and IK1.
a) Issue command to switch ON the “Auto mode” and check for the “Permission
for auto mode”.
2 B_KWIT_AWTOMAT_REVIM DIP ON Permission for “Auto mode”
b) Issue command to switch ON the “IK1” and check for the “Permission for
switch ON of IK1”.
2 B_KWIT_WKL_IK1 DIP ON Permission for switch ON of
“IK1”
c) Issue command to “Switch ON the f пч-з” and check for the “Perm. Switch
ON of f пч-з”.
1 B_WKL_F_PC_Z DOP ON Switch ON of f пч-з
2 B_KWIT_WKL_F_PC_Z DIP ON Perm. Switch ON of f пч-з

Confidential
4. Installing the antenna into zero position.
a) To install the antenna into zero position, enter the following values in the
registers of device К312-10А.
b) Accomplishe zeroing of elements of RAM and register К312-10А.
d) Issue the command "ON. прив.", "КЧ", "Signal 1" and "СК=1" into К312-10А.
e) Measure average value of natural noises along with channel "Sum sin Ш".
f) Remove the commands issued and measures the average value of natural
noises along with channel "Sum sin Ш"
5. Measure with Noise Generator.
a) Issue the commands "ON.прив.", "Сигнал1" and "СК=0" into К312-10А.
Measure average value of natural noise along with channel "Sum sin Ш".
6. Read the signals given in below table and verify the expected values
MIN MAX
1 B_SUM_SIN_H_1 ADC 0.20 2.80 Sum sin Ш
2 B_SUM_COS_H ADC 0.20 0.6 Sum сos Ш

3 B_D_SIN_H ADC 0.10 1.9 D sin Ш
4 B_D_COS_H ADC 0.10 1.9 D cos Ш
5 B_WSP1_H ADC 0.10 5.1 ВСП1 Ш
6 B_FP4_STI ADC 0.40 1.8 Fпч СТИ
7. Set the antenna into zero position.

b) To install the antenna into zero position enter the following values into the
registers of device К312-10А.
c) Issue the command "ON. прив.", "Сигнал 1" and "СК=0". Measure the
average value of natural noise along with channel "Sum sin С".
8. Read the signals given in below table and verify the expected values.
MIN MAX
1 B_SUM_SIN_S_1 ADC 0.05 3.15 "Sum Sin С"
2 B_D_SIN_S ADC 0.05 3.15 "D Sin С"
3 B_WSP1 ADC 0.05 3.15 "ВСП1- С"
4 B_BARU_STI ADC 0.50 2.50 "Напр.БАРУ СТИ"
5 B_K312_STI2 ADC 0.00 1.00 "K312 СТИ2"
6 B_K312_STI3 ADC 0.00 1.00 "К312 СТИ3"

Confidential

MIN MAX
7 B_K312_STI4 ADC 0.00 1.00 "К312 СТИ4"
8 B_K312_10_STI_1 ADC 0.00 1.00 "К312-10 СТИ1"
9 B_TI_STI ADC 1.00 5.00 " ТИ СТИ"
9. Switch OFF the noise generator

10. Issue command to switch OFF the “IK1” and check for the “Permission for switch
ON of IK1”.
1. B_WKL_IK1 DOP OFF switch ON of “IK1”
2. B_KWIT_WKL_IK1 DIP OFF Permission for switch ON of
“IK1”
11. Issue command to switch OFF the “Auto mode” and check for the “Permission for
auto mode”.
S.NO. SIGNAL NAME SIG STATUS DESCRIPTION
TYPE
1. B_AWTOMAT_REVIM DOP OFF switch ON of “Auto mode”
2. B_KWIT_AWTOMAT_REVIM DIP OFF Permission for “Auto
mode”
12. Remove the command "ON. Обр."

13. Switch OFF the SEP2.
Output

Confidential
3.1.3.39 CHECKING EXTERNAL COMMAND OF DEVICE MIU(K314-43)(CHECK 10)
Description
This requirement will perform the stand alone check of device MIU(К314-43) with the help
of COE.
Input
NA
Processing
The following operation will be carried out during execution of check.
2. Perform self check in k314-43 and analyze the result.
3. Check the majority activation schematic of actuating relay while executing the
command (k1, k2,..k9, k11,...k13, k15,...k18,k20,..k23, k25).
4. Check the majority schematic on issue of command (k1, k2,..k9, k11,...k13,
k15,...k18, k20,..k23, k25)
5. Check the operation of ПКН(1,2,3,4).
6. Check the “Liquidation” command issue time.
7. Check the majority schematic on issue of command “Failure of OBC”
8. Check the majority schematic on issue of command “program failure”
Output
Display the status of parameter.
3.1.3.40 CHECKING INTEGRITY OF ACTUATOR CIRCUITS(CHECK 12)

Note:This requirement is similar to the requirement DP_COE_SEP2_REQ_12 as given in
Section 3.1.3.12.
3.1.3.41 CHECKING ACTUATOR DEFLECTION AS PER MIU SIGNALS(CHECK 14)

Section 3.1.3.13.
3.1.3.42 CHECKING RGP SENSOR DEVICE(CHECK 16)

Section 3.1.3.14.

Confidential
3.1.3.43 CHECKING RADIO ALTIMETER DEVICE(CHECK 19)
Section 3.1.3.15.
3.1.3.44 CHECKING RUSSIAN TELEMETRY DEVICE(CHECK 20)

Section 3.1.3.16.
3.1.3.45 INS INTEGRATED CHECK(CHECK 24)

Section 3.1.3.17.
3.1.3.46 CHECKING COMMAND RECEIVING UNIT OF MIU (CHECK 46)

Description
This requirement will test the functionality of input circuit of К314-43 by issuing command
from checkout equipment. The device К314-43 functionality will be verified by consecutive
distribution of commands С1-С10 with Checkout and subsequent checking of
answer-back signal into device СК314-43.
Input
NA
Processing
1. Configure 1553B channel (1) as controller (BC).
2. Issue mode code message for synchronization.
3. Receive mode code message and analysis the result.
4. Issue the signal (C1).
5. Verify the status through 1553B message (RT to BC).
6. Removal of signal (C1).
7. Continue the above steps(ii to vi) for signal (C2...c10).
Output
Display the status of parameter checked.

Confidential
3.1.3.47 CHECKING PLP MODE(CHECK 202)
Description
This requirement will check the mode Pre-Launch preparation of the system СК311. In this
check SEP2 interacts with the system СК311 on a mainline М2, with frequency of operation
as 40 HZ.
Input
Get FM1, FM2 and MINS data.
Processing
1. Frame FM1, FM2 and MINS data from additional input (latitude).
2. Compute the checksum for FM1, FM2 and MINS data.
3. Send FM1, FM2 and MINS data to panel computer.
4. Configure 1553B channel(2) as controller.
5. Issue Initialization of БЦВМ command through1553B.
6. Read ADP data and analyze the data. If successful, generate readiness1 attribute.
7. Send FM1 data and analyze its result by reading ADP data. If FM1 data loading is
successful then generate readiness2 attribute.
8. Transfer sync, MINS, END of MINS data and analyze the result by reading ADP
data.
9. Verify THO above norm and norm register content.
10. Send FM1 data and analyze its result by reading ADP data.
11. Issue unlock command.
Output
ADP data will be stored in the file.

Confidential
3.1.3.48 LOADING “TYPE A” ARTICLE PASSPORT DATA IN TO OBC (K315-1)
(CHECK 503)
Description
This requirement will load the passport data into the device OBC (K315-1(Type A article))
through 1553B interface along M2. The SEP2 acts as BC (Bus Controller) of M2 and K315-
1 acts as Remote Terminal(1).
Input
1. Type A Article
2. User input passport data stored in the panel computer.
RT to BC
S.NO RT- SUB-ADDRESS WORD DESCRIPTION
ADDRESS COUNT
1 1 5 1 Self check result
2 1 5 1 Result of exchange
BC to RT
S.NO RT- SUB- WORD MESSAGE
ADDRESS ADDRESS COUNT DESCRIPTION
1 1 4 1 Main mode operation.
2 1 5 10 Passport data
3 1 5 1 Interrupt code
Processing
1. Check the article type. If it is type “B” stop the check.
4. Wait for 1 second after switching ON SEP2.
5. Read self check result.
6. Issue command to transfer into main mode operation.
7. Read passport data input file and transfer 10 word to panel computer.
8. Issue command to transfer passport data to k315.
9. Issue command to transfer interrupt code to k315.
10. Read the result of exchange.
11. If error occurs during loading, repeat the loading process one more time.
12. Disconnect the 1553B channel(2).
13. switch OFF SEP2 power supply.

Confidential
Output
10 words of passport data will be sent to panel computer.
3.1.3.49 READING “TYPE A” ARTICLE PASSPORT DATA FROM OBC (K315-1)

(CHECK 504)
Description
This requirement will read the passport data from OBC (K315-1(Type A article)) through
1553B interface along with M2. The SEP2 acts as BC(Bus Controller) of M2 and K315-1
acts as Remote Terminal(1).
Input
Type A Article.
RT to BC
S. NO RT-ADDRESS SUB-ADDRESS WORD COUNT DESCRIPTION
2 1 5 32 Passport data
BC to RT
S.NO RT-ADDRESS SUB-ADDRESS WORD COUNT DESCRIPTION
1 1 4 1 Main mode operation.
Processing
1. Switch ON SEP2.
4. Read passport data from K315-1.
5. Analyze the passport data content. If the passport data content are not OK, repeat
the reading up to 12.5 seconds.
6. Switch OFF SEP2.
8. Transfer 10 word of passport data to panel computer.
Output
10 words of passport data will be sent to panel computer.

Confidential
3.1.3.50 LOADING PROGRAM IN TO OBC(CHECK 500)
Description
This requirement will load programmer flash (prg_flsh.com), QNX OS (oszagr or os) and file
system (img, img1 etc) programs into the device k315-1 through 1553B M2 bus. The COE
SEP2 acts as Bus Controller and K315-1 Remote Terminal(1).
Input
1. Type A article.
2. Input file for loading(programmer flash(prg_flsh.com), QNX OS(oszagr or os) and
file system (img,img1 etc)).
RT to BC
BC to RT
1 1 3 1 Technological mode
Processing
1. Identify the mode for loading.(Kod()).
2. Switch ON SEP2.
3. Wait for 3 seconds after switching ON SEP2.
6. Issue 1553B command to transfer operation mode in to technological mode
7. Load the program programmer flash (prg_flsh.com) to K315-1. If failure occurs
during loading, repeat the loading process one more time. On successive failure in
loading switch OFF power supply and stop the check.
8. Load the program QNX OS or file system to K315-1. Depending on user input
repeat the loading of program one after another. If failure occurs in loading, repeat
the loading process one more time. On successive failure in loading switch OFF
power supply and stop the check.
10. Switch off the SEP2 power supply.
Output
Display the parameter status tp1_1, tp1_3,tp1, p001, tp3_1 and tp3_2.

Confidential
3.1.3.51 LOADING PROGRAM INTO DEVICE SEEKER(K312-10B)(CHECK 501)
Description
This requirement will load the programs programmer flash(prg_flsh.com), QNX OS(oszagr
or os and file system(img,img1 etc) in to device K312-10B through 1553B bus М2 in the
presence of device К315-1 in configuration, М1 in the absence.
Input
1. Type A article.
2. Input file for loading programmer flash(prg_flsh.com), QNX OS(oszagr or os) and file
system (img,img1 etc).
RT to BC
BC to RT
Processing
1. If Work type is “Factory test with K312”, load data with M1 otherwise M2.
2. Identify the mode for loading.(Kod())
3. Switch ON SEP2.
5. Configure 1553B-channel as controller based on Work type configuration.
7. Issue 1553B command to transfer operation mode in to technological mode.
8. Load the program programmer flash (prg_flsh.com) to K312-10B. If failure occurs
loading display error message, switch OFF power supply and stop the check.
9. Load the program QNX OS or file system to K312-10B. Before loading the program,
compute the checksum of OS or file system and display to the user. Depending on
user input, repeat the loading program one after another. If failure occurs during
loading of program, repeat the loading process one more time. On successive
failure in loading display error message, switch OFF power supply and stop the
check.
10. Disconnect the 1553B channel based on configuration.

Confidential
11. Switch OFF SEP2.
Output
Display the parameter status tp1_1, tp1_4, checksum value, tp3_1, tp3_2.
3.1.3.52 LOADING PROGRAM IN TO DEVICE SEEKER (K312-10A) (CHECK 502)

Description
This requirement will load the programs programmer flash(prg_flsh.com), QNX OS (oszagr
or os) and file system (img, img1 etc) into device K312-10A through 1553B bus М2 in the
presence of device К315-1 in configuration, М1 in the absence.
Input
1. Type A article.
2. Input file for loading programmer flash(prg_flsh.com), QNX OS(oszagr or os) and file
system(img,img1 etc).
RT to BC
BC to RT
Processing
The following operation are carried out during the execution of the check 502
1. If the Work type is “Factory test with K312”, load data with M1, else M2.
2. Identify the mode for loading.(Kod())
3. Switch ON SEP2.
4. If the Work type is “Factory test with K312”, digital ou the signal B_WKL_OBR(high)
else configure 1553B channel(1) as controller, initialize the device k314-43 and
issue command «ON. Обр» to it.
6. Configure 1553B-channel as controller based on work type configuration.
8. Issue 1553B command to transfer operation mode in to technological mode.
9. Load the program programmer flash(prg_flsh.com) to K312-10A. If failure occurs
loading display error message, switch OFF power supply and stop the check.

Confidential
10. Load the program (QNX OS or file system) to K312-10A. Before loading the
program compute the checksum of OS or file system and display to the user.
Depending on user input, repeat the loading of program one after another. If failure
occurs during loading of program, repeat the loading process one more time. On
successive failure in loading display error message, switch OFF power supply and
stop the check.
11. If Worktype is “ Factory test with K312“, Digital out the signal B_WKL_OBR(low)
else release the command «ON. Обр» through device К314-43.
13. Switch OFF SEP2.
Output
Display the parameter status tp1_1,tp1_3, checksum of Os and file system, tp3_1, tp3_2,
p001, tp1_2.
3.1.3.53 EXECUTABLE PROGRAM CHECKSUM VERIFICATION IN OBC(CHECK 505)

Description
This requirement will verify the executable program checksum in k315-1.
Input
1. Csign_fl.dat,OS,img(file system)
Processing
1. Switch ON SEP2.
3. Read express-diagnostic test result.
5. Load the program csign_fl.com into k315-1. If error occurs during loading, repeat
the loading process one more time.
6. Verify QNX and file system checksum.
7. Switch OFF SEP2.
Output

Confidential
3.1.3.54 EXECUTABLE PROGRAM CHECKSUM VERIFICATION IN SEEKER (K312-

10B) (CHECK 506)
Description
This requirement will verify the executable program checksum in k312-10B.
Input
Csign_fl.dat,OS,img(file system)
Processing
1. Switch ON SEP2.
3. Read express-diagnostic test result.
5. Load the program csign_fl.com into k315-1. If error occurs during loading, repeat
the loading process one more time.
6. Verify QNX and file system checksum.
7. Switch OFF SEP2.
3.1.3.55 EXECUTABLE PROGRAM CHECKSUM VERIFICATION IN SEEKER(K312-

10A)(CHECK 507)
Note:This check is similar to DP_COE_SEP2_REQ_53 as explained in Section 3.1.3.53.

Confidential
Requirement ID: DP_COE_SEP3_REQ

The SEP3 will be used to process the input/output of control panel (power supply switch
ON/OFF) and perform self check of COE. The self check will be carried out based on the
command PC schedules through Ethernet. SEP3 will send details about test data and
results. The SEP3 will communicate with other SEP's for accessing their hardware through
Ethernet.
S. NO REQUIREMENT REQUIREMENT EXISTING
IDENTIFICATION NUMBER CHECK NO.
1 DP_COE_SEP3_REQ_01 Switch ON/OFF of power -
supplies.
2 DP_COE_SEP3_REQ_02 Processing of remote requests -
3 DP_COE_SEP3_REQ_03 Starting test of SEP3 AP 300
4 DP_COE_SEP3_REQ_04 Self check SEP3 AP 303
5 DP_COE_SEP3_REQ_05 Checking the indicating display AP 319
of device IK8
6 DP_COE_SEP3_REQ_06 1553B loop-back check -
7 DP_COE_SEP3_REQ_07 Discrete I/O Loop back test -
8 DP_COE_SEP3_REQ_08 DUT Power Loop back test -
3.1.4.1 SWITCH ON/OFF OF POWER SUPPLIES

Description
The distribution of power to DUT and COE will be done through Power Distribution
Unit(PDU). The power ON/OFF of SP, GPS, SEP1 and SEP2 are controlled by SEP3.
Input
Switching ON/OFF of power supply button in control panel
Processing
The following sequence will be followed for switching ON/OFF the power supplies,
1. Power ON Sequence
a) Switch ON of SP
b) Switch ON of GPS
c) Switch ON of SEP1
d) Switch ON of SEP2
2. Power OFF Sequence
a) Switch ON of SEP2
b) Switch ON of SEP1
c) Switch ON of GPS
d) Switch ON of SP

Confidential
3. If any DUT power ON/OFF not met then the particular DUT shall not be powered
ON.
Initial Step
1. The unblocking of following signals will be verified,
a) Unblocking of “Electrical equipment”
b) Unblocking of “Warhead simulator”
c) Docking of “KPA”
d) Docking of “RF Seeker test complex(IK1)”
e) Docking of IK7
f) Docking of IK8
S.NO. SIGNAL NAME SIG TYPE SIGNAL DESCRIPTION

STATUS
1. C_RAZBLOK_SEP1_1 DIP - Unblocking of “Electrical
equipment”
2. C_RAZBLOK_BS_1 DIP - Unblocking of “Warhead
simulator”
3. C_KONTR_STIK_KPA DIP - Docking of “KPA”
4. C_KNTR_STIC_IK1 DIP - Docking of “RF Seeker
test complex(IK1)”
5. C_KNTR_STIC_IK7 DIP - Docking of IK7
6. C_KNTR_STIC_IK8 DIP - Docking of IK8
2. Switching-ON of following signals will be carried out,

a) Switch ON of “KPA-C35E”
b) Switch ON of “KPA docked A20E”
STATUS
1. C_LC_189 DOP ON Switch ON of “KPA-C35E”
2. C_KPA_SOSTIK DOP ON Switch ON of “KPA docked
A20E”
Switching ON of LED in control panel

1. Based on the work type selected (control, self-check, self-check with external
connection) respective LED in control panel should be enabled.
a) If the mode is “Control”, set the following signals given in below table.
S.NO. SIGNAL NAME SIG TYPE SIGNAL STATUS DESCRIPTION
1 C_SAMOKONTROL DOP OFF Indication for

Confidential
Self-check mode
2 C_KONTROL_OCP DOP ON Indication for control
mode
b) If the mode is “Control” set the following signals given in below table.
S.NO. BOARD CHANNEL SIGNAL NAME SIG SIGNAL DESCRIPTION
NO NO TYPE STATUS
1. C_KONTROL_ DOP OFF Indication for control
OCP mode
2. C_SAMOKONT DOP ON Indication for
ROL Self-check mode
c) If the mode is “Control” set the following signals of SEP3 (Self-check).

S.NO. SIGNAL NAME SIG SIGNAL DESCRIPTION
TYPE STATUS
1. C_SAMOKONTROL DOP ON Indication for Self-check
mode.
2. C_KONTROL_OCP DOP OFF Indication for control
mode.
d) If the mode is “Control” set the following signals of SEP1.

STATUS
1. E_REZ_SK DOP ON Indication for Self-check
mode
2. E_REZ_SK_K DOP ON Indication for Self-check
with external connection
mode
2. The Power button in control panel is used to switch ON the power supplies. The
software will read the status of the button through DIO interface and based on the
status the respective supply will be switched ON/OFF.
Switch ON of SP bus
1. If the work mode is self-check, the SP power supply should not be switched ON.
2. In the absence of signal C_SIGNAL_OHL_OK(Cooling OK + 27V), the SP power
supply should not be switched ON.
3. The permission for SP power should be provided after providing additional
information.
4. Switch ON the following signals given in below table.

Confidential
S. SIGNAL NAME SIG SIGNAL DESCRIPTION

NO TYPE STATUS
1 C_WKL_ENI DOP ON Switch ON of “Heating of INS “
2 C_WKL_SP DOP ON Switch ON of SP
3 C_SIGNAL_SP1 DIP ON Check for the presence of signal SP1.
If it is not present, Switching ON of
power supply signals should not be
proceeded.
4 C_SIGNAL_DR_SO DIP ON Check for the presence of signal “DR
STIK docked(Bottom connector connected)”.
If it is not present, Switching ON of
proceeded.
5 C_WKL_SP_PLUS DOP ON Switch ON of + SP
6 C_SIGNAL_PLUS_ DIP ON Check for the presence of signal “+
SP SP”. If it is not present, Switching ON
of power supply signals should not
be proceeded.
5. Read the signal C_X2_SOSTIK(X2 is docked). If the attribute for “X2 is docked” and
signal “X2 is docked” are not equal, the power supply signals should not be
switched ON.
6. If signal “X2 is docked” then perform the following steps,
a) Indication for “OK is docked”
S.NO SIGNAL NAME SIG TYPE SIGNAL STATUS DESCRIPTION
1. C_OK_SOSTIK DOP ON Indication for “OK is docked”
b) If the work mode is not “self-check with loop back” and attribute for “X2 is
docked” and signal “X2 is docked” are not equal, the power supply signals
should not be switched ON.
c) The signals given in below table are verified.
NO. TYPE STATUS
1 C_SIGNAL_KON DOP ON Check for presence of “Docking of SEP1”.
TR_STIK If it is not present, Switching ON of
proceeded.
2 C_KNTR_STIC_B DOP ON Check for presence of “Docking of BASU”.
ASU If it is not present, Switching ON of

Confidential

NO. TYPE STATUS
proceeded.
7. Switch ON the signals given in below table,

S.NO SIGNAL NAME SIG SIGNAL DESCRIPTION
TYPE STATUS
1 C_WKL_SP_MINUS DOP ON Switch ON of - SP
2 C_PLUS_27V_SP DIP ON Check for presence of signal “+ 27V
SP”. If it is not present, Switching
ON of power supply signals
should not be proceeded.
8. Send the power supply status to PC and other SEP's indicating switched ON of “SP
bus”.
Switch ON of NI(GPS) bus

1. If the work mode is self-check, the SP power supply should not be switched ON.
2. The GPS supply should be switched ON only if the “SP bus” is switched ON.
3. Check for the presence of signal “Permission of program” of Warhead simulator. If it
is not present, the switching ON of power supply signals will not be proceeded.
S.NO SIGNAL NAME SIG TYPE SIGNAL DESCRIPTION
STATUS
1. E_RAZR_PR_U DIP ON “Permission of program” of
KBS Warhead simulator
4. If the insulation check(AP4, AP72, AP1004, AP1072 – dangerous circuits) is not OK,
the switching ON of power supply signals will not be proceeded.
5. If the check for dangerous circuits is normal, the indication for “Dangerous circuits -
Normal” will be enabled.
TYPE STATUS
1. C_NORMA_CB DOP ON Indication for “Dangerous circuits
Normal”
6. Analyze the attribute article type and the presence of signal for the article type.
a) If signal for the article type A is present and the attribute for article type A is
not selected, check the attribute “presence of seeker”. If seeker is not
present, the switching ON of power supply signals will not be proceeded.

Confidential
b) If signal for the article type B is present and the attribute for article type A is
not selected, the switching ON of power supply signals will not be
proceeded.

TYPE STATUS
1 C_PRZN_SK310_0A DIP ON Signal for the present of article type A
2 C_PRZN_SK310 DIP ON Signal for the present of article type B
7. Switch ON the following signals of SEP1,

TYPE STATUS
1. E_RAZBL_KPA_SE DOP ON Unblocking of KPA SEP1
P1
8. Switch ON the following signals of SEP1,

STATUS
1. C_WKL_NI DOP ON Switch ON of NI bus
2. C_OTKL_BASU DOP ON Check for presence of signal
“Switch OFF of SEP2”. If it is not
present, Switching ON of power
supply signals should not be
proceeded.
9. Disconnect MD bus of SEP1 ,

S. CHANNEL SIGNAL NAME SIG SIGNAL DESCRIPTION
NO NO TYPE STATUS
1 E_OTKL_MD DOP ON Disconnection of MD bus
10. If the work mode is “Self-check with loop-back”, check for the presence of signal
“Disconnect of MD bus” of SEP1.
S.NO CHANNEL SIGNAL NAME SIG SIGNAL DESCRIPTION
NO TYPE STATUS
1 E_OTKL_S_MD DOP ON Check for presence of signal
“Disconnect of MD bus”. If it
is not present, Switching

Confidential
“Disconnect of MD bus” of SEP1. If not present, the switching ON of power supply
signals will not be proceeded.
12. Switch ON the signal “Disconnection the bus PP1-2” of SEP1.
“Disconnection the bus PP1-2” of SEP1. If it is not present, the switching ON of
power supply signals will not be proceeded.
TYPE STATUS
1 E_OTKL_S_MD DIP ON Check for the presence of signal
“Disconnect of MD bus”. If it is not
proceeded.
2 E_OTKL_PP1_PP2 DOP ON Switch ON the signal “Disconnection
the bus PP1-2”.
3 E_OTKL_S_PP_1_ DIP ON Check for presence of signal
2 “Disconnection the bus PP1-2”. If it is
not present, Switching ON of power
proceeded.
14. Read the status of signals given in below table.

STATUS
1 C_OTKL_UM DIP ON Check for presence of signal “Switch
OFF of UM”. If it is not present,
Switching ON of power supply
signals should not be proceeded.
2 C_OTKL_UPU DIP ON Check for presence of signal “Switch
OFF of UPU”. If it is not present,
3 C_OTKL_INS DIP ON Check for presence of signal “Switch
OFF of INS”. If it is not present,
4 C_PLUS_27_V DIP ON Check for presence of signal “+ 27V NI”.

Confidential

STATUS
_NI If it is not present, Switching ON of
proceeded.
15. If signal “+ 27V NI” is present, the following signals of SEP1 will be set.
TYPE STATUS
1 E_SHINA_MINUS27_W_NI DOP ON Switch ON the signal “Bus -27V
NI”
2 E_SHINA_PLUS27_W_NI DOP ON Switch ON the signal “Bus +27V
NI”
3 E_CORPUS_B_2 DOP ON Switch ON the signal “Body B”
4 E_AMB_PROGR_WH DIP ON Check for presence of signal
“AMB is heated”
16. If signal “AMB is heated” is present, set the indication in the control panel.
TYPE STATUS
1 C_AMB_PROGREW DOP ON Indication for “AMB is heated”
17. If the article type is B and the work type is not “Factory test of seeker”(СВК) or “IGI
of seeker”(СЗК К312), perform the following steps.
a) Remove command INS heating from BA.

NO TYPE STATUS
1 C_OTKL_OBOGREW DOP ON Switch OFF INS heating.
2 C_OTKL_OBOGREW DOP OFF
3 C_OBOG_INS_NI DIP ON Check for the presence of signal “INS
heating from NI”. If it is not present,
4 C_WKL_OBOGR_IN DOP OFF Remove indication “Switch ON of
C_BA heating” from SEP1 bus.
5 C_OBOGREW DOP ON Switch ON indication “INS heating”.
18. If work type is “Control”, the presence of attributes for “Simulation of SD” and
“Simulation of SD1” is verified.

Confidential
a) If the attribute “Simulation of SD” is present, set the signal (refer table given
below) for simulation of SD. If it is absent, remove the signal for simulation of
SD.
S. SIGNAL SIG TYPE SIGNAL DESCRIPTION

NO NAME STATUS
1 E_IMIT_SD DOP ON Issue “Simulation of SD” is present
2 E_IMIT_SD DOP OFF Remove “Simulation of SD” is not
present
b) If the attribute “Simulation of SD1” is present, set the signal (refer table given
below) for simulation of SD1. If it is absent, remove the signal for simulation
of SD1.
S. SIGNAL SIG TYPE SIGNAL DESCRIPTION

NO NAME STATUS
1 E_IMIT_SD1 DIP ON Issue “Simulation of SD1” is present
2 E_IMIT_SD1 DOP OFF Remove “Simulation of SD1” is not
present.
19. Read the following signals of SEP1.

TYPE STATUS
1 E_KNTR_SD_1_WH DIP - “Simulation of SD” is present
2 E_KNTR_SD_WH DIP - “Simulation of SD1” is present
20. Send intimation to user if any of SD or SD1(pressure sensors) is simulated.

21. Send the power supply status to PC and other SEP's indicating “NI bus” is switched
ON.

Confidential
Switch ON of BA (SEP1) bus
1. If the work type is self-test, SEP1 bus and GPS (NI) bus will not be switched ON.
2. If the work type is self-test with loop-back, the presence of following signals will be
verified.

TYPE STATUS
1 C_OTKL_BASU_05 DIP ON Check for the presence of “Switch
A OFF of BASU”. If it is not
proceeded.
2 C_OTKL_UM_01A DIP ON Check for the presence of “Switch
OFF of UM”. If it is not present,
signals should not be
proceeded.
3 C_OTKL_UPU_05A DIP ON Check for the presence of “Switch
OFF of UPU”. If it is not present,
proceeded.
4 C_OTKL_INS_05A DIP ON Check for the presence of “Switch
OFF of INS”. If it is not present,
proceeded.
3. If the article type is type B and work type is not СВК(IGI of seeker), wait for INS
heating upto 115 * 1000 milliseconds .
4. Switch ON and verify the following signals,

STATUS
1. C_WKL_BA DOP ON Switch ON of BA
2. C_PLUS_27_V_BA DIP ON Voltage on bus BA
3. C_PLUS_BA_B DIP ON Presence of +BA
4. C_OTKL_TM_R DOP ON Issue command “Switch off of
TM-R” (Russian)
5. C_OTKL_TM_R DOP ON Issue command “Switch off of

Confidential

STATUS
TM-I” (Indian)
6. C_OTKL_TM_R DOP OFF Remove command “Switch off
of TM-R” (Russian)
7. C_OTKL_TM_R DOP OFF Remove command “Switch off
of TM-I” (Indian)
5. If the work mode is “Control” and the signal of “X2 is docked” is present, perform the
following steps,
a) Read the following signals of SEP1.
1. E_ISHODHOE_2 DOP ON Switch ON of BA
b) If signal “Initial 2” is absent and attribute “RPP” is present, read the following
signals of SEP1 and send the status to PC.
1. E_KNTR_WENT_WH DOP - Monitoring fans
2. E_KNTR_SD_1_WH DOP - Pressure sensors 1
3. E_KNTR_SD_WH DOP - Pressure sensors
6. Send the power supply status to PC and other SEP's indicating the “BA bus” is
switched ON.
Switch ON of SEP2 bus

1. If the work mode is self-test, SEP2 bus should not be switched ON.
2. The SEP2 bus should not be switched ON if SEP1 bus is not switched ON.
3. Issue the command “Switch ON of SEP2 bus”.
1 C_WKL_BASU DOP ON Switch ON of SEP2 bus
4. If the work mode is “Control”, then perform the following steps,

a) Read the signal “Initial of article”. If it is present, switch ON indication for
“initial of article”.
1 C_ISHODNOE_OK DIP ON Initial of article
2 C_ISHODHOE_OK DOP ON Indication for “initial of article”
b) If “initial of article” is not present, perform the following steps,

Confidential
i. Check for the presence of “TM switched ON”. If it is absent, send
message to PC indicating “ TM switched not ON”.
ii. Check for the “presence of Fin sensors”. If it is absent, send message to
PC indicating “Fin sensors not present”.
iii. If attribute for “Fin sensors” is present, set the following signal of SEP1.
STATUS
1 E_COM_STOP DOP ON Issue “Command STOP”
2 E_COM_STOP DOP OFF Remove “Command STOP”
5. Read the signal “Initial of article”. If it is present, switch ON the indication for “initial
of article”.
1 C_ISHODNOE_OK DIP ON Signal “Initial of article”
2 C_ISHODHOE_OK DOP ON Indication for “initial of article”
6. Check for the presence of “Switch ON of SEP2 bus”. If it is not present, remove the
signal “Switch ON of SEP2 bus” and stop the switching On process of power supply
signals.
1 C_WKL_BASU_PLUS DIP ON Presence of “Switch ON of
SEP2 bus(+)”
2 C_WKL_BASU DOP OFF Remove “Switch ON of
SEP2 bus”
7. Check for the presence of “Switch ON of SEP2 (+)”. If it is not present, remove the
signal “Switch ON of SEP2 bus” and stop the switching On process of power supply
signals.
8. Set the following signals,
STATUS
1 C_WKL_UPU_1 DOP ON Switch ON of ACD
2 C_OTKL_UPU DIP ON Check for the presence of “Switch
ON of ACD”. If it is not present,
Remove “Switch ON of SEP2 bus”
3 C_WKL_UPU DOP ON Indication for “Switch ON of ACD”

Confidential
9. If work mode is “Self-check with loop-back”, check for the presence of “Switch ON of
ACD 0.5 A”. If it is present, remove “Switch ON of SEP2 bus” and stop the switching
On process of power supply signals.
1 C_OTKL_UPU_05A DIP OFF “Switch ON of ACD 0.5 A”
2 C_WKL_BASU DIP ON “Switch ON of SEP2 bus”
10. Switch on the signal “connection of M1” of SEP2(SEP2)

1 B_PDKL_M1 DOP ON Command “Connection of M1”
11. Read the following signal,

1 C_PDKL_M1 DIP ON Check for the presence of
“Connection of M1”. If it is not
present, Switching ON of
power supply signals should
not be proceeded. Remove
“Switch ON of SEP2 bus”
12. Send the power supply status to PC and other SEP's indicating “SEP2 bus” is
switched ON.
Switch ON of SEP2 Sub-System

1. The “Operation Work” indication on Control Panel should not be enabled if the SEP2
bus is not switched ON.
2. Set the indication “Operation enabled”.
1 C_RABOTA_IND DOP ON Indication “Operation enabled”

Confidential
Switch ON of Telemetry(Indian/Russian)
1. Check for the presence of “Initial of article” signal
STATUS
1 C_ISHODNOE_OK DIP ON Check for the presence of
“Initial of article”. If it is not
power supply signals
2. Check the attribute for “presence of TM”. If it is not present, stop the switching On
process of power supply signals.
3. The TM should not be switched ON if the BA bus is not switched ON.
4. If signal “X2 is docked” is not present, perform the following steps,
a) If signal “X2 is docked” and attribute for “X2 is docked” are not equal, stop
the switching On process of power supply signals.
b) If signal “X2 is docked” and attribute for “X2 is docked” are equal, proceed
the switch ON process.
STATUS
1 C_WKL_TM_WIH DOP ON Issue command “switch ON TM”
2 C_WKL_TM_WIH DOP OFF Remove command “switch ON TM”
(a) Perform Step 6

5. If signal “X2 is docked” is present, perform the following steps,
a) If signal “X2 is docked” and attribute for “X2 is docked” are not equal, stop
the switching On process of power supply signals.
b) If signal “X2 is docked” and attribute for “X2 is docked” are equal, proceed
the switch ON process.
1 C_WKL_TM_WIH DOP ON Issue command “switch ON TM”
2 C_WKL_TM_WIH DIP ON Check for the presence of “switch
ON TM”. If it is not present,
proceeded.
3 C_WKL_TM_WIH DOP OFF Remove command “switch ON TM”
c) Check for the presence of Russian telemetry.

Confidential
TYPE STATUS
1 C_WKL_TM_R_WH DIP ON Check for the presence of “switch
ON TM-R”. If it is not present,
d) If the article type is type B, check for the presence of signal “switch ON of
Indian Telemetry” and set the indication for “Indian Telemetry” in Control
Panel.
1 C_WKL_TM_I_ DIP ON Check for the presence of
WH “switch ON TM-I”. If it is not
power supply signals should
not be proceeded.
2 C_TM_I_WKL DOP ON Indication for “switch ON TM-I”
e) Switch ON “Russian Telemetry”.

1 C_TM_R_WKL DOP ON Command “switch ON TM-R”.
If it is not present, Switching
2 C_TM_WKL_IND DOP ON Indication for “switch ON TM”
6. Send the power supply status to PC and other SEP's indicating the “Telemetry” is
switched ON.
Switch ON of INS heating from SEP1 bus

1. The “Heating of INS from SEP1 bus” should be performed only if the article is
Type B.
2. The “Heating of INS from SEP1 bus” should not be performed if the SEP2 bus is not
switched ON.
3. Issue command to switch ON “Heating of INS from SEP1 bus”.

STATUS
1 C_WKL_OBOGREW DOP ON Command to switch ON “Heating of
INS from SEP1 bus”.

Confidential

STATUS
2 C_WKL_OBOGREW DOP OFF Command to switch ON “Heating of
INS from SEP1 bus”.
3 C_OBOG_INS_NI DIP OFF Check for the absence of “Heating
of INS from NI(GPS) bus”. If it is
not present, Switching ON of
power supply signals should not
be proceeded.
4 C_WKL_OBOGR_IN DOP ON Indication for “Heating of INS from
C_BA SEP1 bus”.
5 C_OBOGREW DOP OFF Remove indication for “Heating of
INS”.
4. Send the power supply status to PC and other SEP's indicating the “Heating of INS
from SEP1 bus”.
Switch OFF SP
1. Check for the presence of attribute “STOP”(STOP button of Control Panel). If it is
present, switch OFF process should not be proceeded.
2. Check for the presence of “Switch ON of SEP2”. If it is present, switch OFF process
4. Check for the presence of “Switch ON of NI(GPS)”. If it is present, switch OFF
process should not be proceeded.
5. Check for the presence of “Switch ON of SP”. If it is not present, send abnormal in
SP switch OFF to PC.
6. Issue “End of checks” signal of SEP1.
1 E_KNC_PROW_K DOP ON Signal “End of checks”
7. Perform the following steps given in below table.

STATUS
1 C_WKL_ENI DOP OFF Signal “Switch OFF of ENI”
2 C_WKL_SP_MINUS DOP OFF Signal “Switch OFF of -SP”
3 C_SIGNAL_PLUS_SP DIP OFF Check for the presence of “Switch

Confidential

STATUS
OFF of +SP”. If it is present,
Switching OFF of power supply
4 C_WKL_SP_PLUS DOP OFF “Switch OFF of +SP”
5 C_PLUS_27V_SP DIP OFF Check for the presence of “SP+27
V”. If it is present, Switching OFF
of power supply signals should
not be proceeded.
6 C_WKL_SP DOP OFF “Switch OFF of SP”
7 C_SIGNAL_SP1 Check for the presence of “Switch
OFF of SP”. If it is present,
8. Remove “End of checks” signal of SEP1.

STATUS
1 E_KNC_PROW_K DOP OFF Signal “End of checks”
9. Remove indication for “Article is docked”.

STATUS
1 C_OK_SOSTIK DOP OFF Indication for “Article is docked”
10. Send the power supply status to PC and other SEP's indicating the “Switch OFF of
SP bus”.

Confidential
Switch OFF of NI
1. Check for the presence of “STOP”. If it is not present, switch OFF process should
not be proceeded.
4. Check for the presence of “Switch ON of NI”. If it is not present, send the message
“abnormal in NI switch OFF” to PC
5. Remove command “Unblocking of SEP1” signal.

STATUS
1 E_RAZBL_KPA_SE DOP OFF Remove command “Unblocking of
P1 SEP1”
6. Remove the signals given in below table.

STATUS
1 C_NORMA_CB DOP OFF Remove indication “Dangerous
circuits - Normal”
2 C_WKL_NI DOP OFF “Switch OFF of NI”
7. Check for the presence of “NI +27V”. If it is not present, remove the signals of
SEP1.
TYPE STATUS
1 C_PLUS_27_V_NI DIP OFF Check for the presence of “NI
+27V”. If it is present, Switching
OFF of power supply signals
2 E_SHINA_MINUS27_W_NI DOP OFF “Remove -27V of NI” of SEP1
3 E_SHINA_PLUS27_W_NI DOP OFF “Remove +27V of NI” of SEP1
4 E_CORPUS_B_2 DOP OFF Remove “Switch ON of Body B” of
SEP1
5 C_OBOGREW DOP OFF Remove indication “Heating of INS”
8. Send the power supply status to PC and other SEP's indicating “Switch OFF of NI
bus”.

Confidential
Switch OFF of BA
1. Check for the presence of attribute “STOP”(STOP button of Control Panel). If it is
not present, switch OFF process should not be proceeded.
2. Check for the presence of attribute “Switch ON of SEP2”. If it is present, switch OFF
process should not be proceeded.
3. Check for the presence/absence of attribute “Switch ON of SEP1”. If it is not
present, send the message “abnormal in NI switch OFF” to PC .
4. Check for the following,
STATUS
1 C_WKL_BA DOP OFF Command “Switch OFF of SEP1”
2 C_PLUS_27_V_BA DIP OFF Check for the presence of “+27V of
BA”. If it is present, Switching
OFF of power supply signals
3 C_PLUS_BA_B DIP OFF Check for the presence of “Connect
GPS to SEP1”. If it is present,
4 C_ISHODHOE_OK DOP OFF Remove indication for “Initial of
article”
5. If the article type is type B and work mode is not “IGI of seeker” then
STATUS
1 C_WKL_INS_1 DOP OFF Remove “Switch ON of INS”
2 C_OTKL_INS DIP OFF Check for the presence of “Switch
OFF of INS”. If it is present,
3 C_WKL_INS DOP OFF Command “Switch OFF of INS”
SEP1 bus”.

Confidential
Switch OFF of SEP2
1. Check for the presence of attribute “STOP” (STOP button of Control Panel). If it is
not present, switch OFF process should not be proceeded.
2. Check for the presence of attribute “SEP2 auto ON”. If it is not present, check for the
presence of attribute “switch ON of SEP2”. If not present, send message “Not OK of
Switch OFF of SEP2” to PC.
3. If the article is type B, remove “Switch ON of INS”.
STATUS
1 C_WKL_INS_1 DOP OFF Remove “Switch ON of INS”
2 C_WKL_INS_1 DIP OFF Check for the presence of “Switch
ON of INS”. If it is present,
3 C_WKL_INS DOP OFF Command “Switch OFF of INS”.
4. Switch OFF SEP2 and amplifier conversion device.

STATUS
1 C_WKL_BASU DOP OFF Remove “Switch ON of SEP2”
2 C_WKL_BASU DIP OFF Check for the presence of “Switch
ON of SEP2”. If it is present,
3 C_WKL_UPU_1 DOP OFF Indication for “Switch-off of Amplifier
conversion device”.
5. If the work mode is “Self-check with loop-back”.

STATUS
1 C_OTKL_BASU_05A DIP ON Check for the presence of “Switch
OFF of SEP2 +27V(0.5A)”. If it is
present, Switching OFF of power
proceeded.
6. Remove indication for “Switch-off of Amplifier conversion device”.

Confidential

TYPE STATUS
1 C_OTKL_UPU DIPz ON Check for the presence of “Switch OFF
of ACD”. If it is present, Switching
OFF of power supply signals should
not be proceeded.
2 C_WKL_UPU DOP OFF Remove indication for “Switch ON of
ACD”.
7. If the work mode is “Self-check with loop-back”.

TYPE STATUS
1 C_OTKL_UPU_05A DIP ON Check for the presence of “Switch
OFF of ACD +27V(0.5A)”. If it is
proceeded.
8. Remove signal “Connection M1” of SEP2.

TYPE STATUS
1 B_PDKL_M1 DOP OFF Remove signal “Connection M1”
2 C_PODKL_M1 DIP OFF Check for the presence of
“Connection M1”. If it is present,
3 C_PDKL_M1 If work mode is “Self-check with
loop-back” then Check for the
presence of “Connection M1”. If it is
proceeded.
SEP2 bus”.

Confidential
Button STOP
1. Check for the presence of attribute “Operation Enabled”. If not present then the
switch OFF process should not be proceeded
TYPE STATUS
1 C_RABOTA_IND DOP OFF Remove indication for “Operation
enabled”.
Switch OFF of TM-R

1. Check for the presence of attribute “Switch ON of TM”. If it is not present, switch
OFF process should not be proceeded.
2. Check for the presence of attribute “Switch ON of TM-R”. If it is not present, switch
OFF process should not be proceeded.
TYPE STATUS
1 C_OTKL_TM_R DOP OFF Command “Switch OFF of TM-R”.
2 C_WKL_TM_WIH DIP OFF Check for the presence of “Switch
ON of TM”. If it is present,
3 C_WKL_TM_R_WH DIP OFF Check for the presence of “Switch
ON of TM-R”. If it is present,
4 C_OTKL_TM_R DOP OFF “Switch OFF of TM-R”.
5 C_TM_R_WKL DOP OFF Remove indication for “Switch ON of
TM-R”.
6 C_TM_WKL_IND DOP OFF Remove indication for “Switch ON of
TM”.
TM-R”.

Confidential
Switch OFF of TM-I
1. Check for the presence of attribute “Switch ON of TM-I”. If it is not present, send
abnormal message “Switch OFF of TM-I” to PC.
2. Switch OFF TM-1 telemetry by following the steps given in below table.
STATUS
1 C_OTKL_TM_I DOP ON Command “Switch OFF of TM-I”
2 C_WKL_TM_I_WH DIP OFF Check for the presence of attribute
“Switch ON of TM”. If it is present,
3 C_OTKL_TM_I DOP OFF Remove command “Switch OFF of
TM-I”.
4 C_TM_I_WKL DOP OFF Remove indication for “Switch ON
of TM-I”.
TM-I”.
Switch ON of calibration WTI
1. Switch ON of calibration WTI
STATUS
1 C_KALIBR_BTI DOP ON Command “Switch ON of calibration
WTI”.
2. Send the power supply status to PC indicating the “Switch ON of calibration WTI”.
Switch OFF of calibration WTI

1. Check for the presence of attribute “Switch ON of calibration WTI”. If it is not
present, switch OFF process should not be proceeded.
2. Switch OFF calibration WTI following steps given in below table.
TYPE STATUS
1 C_OTKL_BTI DOP ON Command “Switch ON of calibration
WTI”.
2 C_WTI_WKL DIP ON Check for the presence of “Switch ON
of calibration WTI”. If it is present,
3 C_BTI_WKL DOP OFF Remove command “Switch ON of

Confidential

TYPE STATUS
calibration WTI”.
3. Send the power supply status to PC indicating the “Switch ON of calibration WTI”.
1. “On-board battery heated”

(a) Read the signal of SEP1.
STATUS
1 E_AMB_PROGR_WH DIP ON / OFF Signal “AMB is heated”.
(b) If Signal “AMB is heated” is present then set the indication of “AMB
heated” in Control Panel
S.No Signal Name Sig SIGNAL Description
Type STATU
S
1. C_AMB_PROGREW DOP ON Indication for “AMB is heated”
(c) If Signal “AMB is heated” is absent then remove the indication of “AMB
heated” in Control Panel
Type STATU
S
1. C_AMB_PROGREW DOP OFF Indication for “AMB is heated”
2. Initial of article
(a) Read the signal for “Initial of Article”

Confidential

Type STATU
S
1. C_ISHODNOE_OK DIP ON/OFF Signal “Initial of article”
(b) If Signal “Initial of Article” is present then set the indication of “Initial of
Article” in Control Panel
Type STATU
S
1. C_ISHODHOE_OK DOP ON Indication for “Initial of article”
(c) If Signal “Initial of Article” is absent then remove the indication of “Initial
of Article” in Control Panel
Type STATU
S
1. C_ISHODHOE_OK DOP OFF Indication for “Initial of article”
3. “Blocking of warhead simulator”

(a) Read the signal for “Unlocking of warhead”
Type STATU
S
1. C_RAZBLOK_BS_1 DIP ON/OFF Signal “Unlocking of warhead”
(b) If Signal “Unlocking of warhead” is present then set the indication of

“Unlocking of warhead” in Control Panel
Type STATU
S
1. C_RAZBLOK_BS DOP ON Indication for “Unlocking of
warhead”
(c) If Signal “Unlocking of warhead” is absent then remove the indication of

“Unlocking of warhead” in Control Panel
Type STATU
S
1. C_RAZBLOK_BS DOP OFF Indication for “Unlocking of
warhead”

Confidential
Output
The particular unit should be powered ON/OFF based on the ON/OFF Control buttons in
Panel computer.
3.1.4.2 REMOTE REQUEST SERVICES

Description
SEP3 will continuously check the request from panel computer and other SEP's. It will
process the request and send response to the respective system.
Input
NA
Processing
1. The SEP3 will send / receive request to / from Panel Computer only if,
(a) PC initiates the execution of Start-up test for SEP3.
(b) PC initiates the execution of test in SEP3.
(c) PC sends the user input to SEP3.
(d) PC can initiate, start, pause, continue, stop the test executing in SEP3.
(e) SEP3 sends the status of power supplies to PC.
(f) SEP3 sends the status (Normal / Not normal) of parameters to PC while
executing the test.
2. SEP3 will send / receive request from SEP1 only if,
(a) The DIO channel status of SEP1 is sent to other two SEP's once in every
second and whenever other SEP's needs it.
(b) SEP1 requests SEP3 to switch ON / OFF its DOP signal.
(c) SEP1 sends the emergency OFF to SEP3 if there is any variation in dangerous
signals.
(d) SEP3 sends the status of power supplies to SEP SEP1.
3. SEP3 can send / receive request from SEP2 only if,
(a) The DIO channel status of SEP2 is sent to other SEP's once in every second
and whenever other SEP's needs it.
(b) SEP2 sends the emergency OFF to SEP3, if temperature in instrument bay
exceeds the limit.
(c) SEP2 requests SEP3 to switch ON / OFF its DOP signal.
(d) SEP1(SC) sends response to 1553B command from SEP2 during 1553B self
check.
(e) SEP3 sends the status of power supplies to SEP2.

Confidential
3.1.4.3 STARTING TEST SEP3 (AP 300)

Description
This check will be executed automatically while entering into system. It checks the initial
condition of the Discrete signals.
Inputs
Thew input signals are given in below table.
Processing
1. The sequence given in below table will be used to verify the signal status.
S.NO. SIGNAL NAME SIGNAL CHECK DESCRIPTION
TYPE FOR
1 C_KN_WKL_SP DIP OFF Switch ON SP (+27 V КПА)
2 C_KN_WKL_NI DIP OFF Switch ON NI (+27 V КПА)
3 C_KN_WKL_BA. DIP OFF Switch ON BA
4 C_KN_WKL_BASU DIP OFF Switch ON SEP1CS (+27 V КПА)
5 C_KN_RABOTA_RAZ DIP OFF Operation РАЗР (+27 V КПА)
R
6 C_KN_WKL_TM DIP OFF Switch ON ТМ (+27 V КПА)
7 C_KN_WKL_TM_I_27 DIP OFF Switch ON ТМ-И (+27 V КПА)
8 C_KN_WKL_WTI DIP OFF Switch ON ВТИ (+27 V КПА)
9 C_KN_OTKL_SP DIP OFF Switch OFF СП
10 C_KN_OTKL_NI DIP OFF Switch OFF НИ
11 C_KN_OTKL_BA DIP OFF Switch OFF БА
12 C_KN_OTKL_BASU DIP OFF Switch OFF SEP1CS (+27 V КПА)
13 C_KN_STOP DIP OFF Stop (+27 V КПА)
14 C_KN_OTKL_TM DIP OFF Switch OFF ТМ (+27 V КПА)
15 C_KN_OTKL_TM_I_27 DIP OFF Switch OFF ТМ-И(+27 V КПА)
16 C_KN_OTKL_WTI DIP OFF Switch OFF ВТИ
17 C_KN_WKL_OB_INS DIP OFF Switch ON ОБ ИНС
18 - DIP - Tact() - No check
19 C_SIGNAL_SP1 DIP OFF signal СП1 (+27 V)(wrt. -27 V СП1)
20 C_SIGNAL_OHL_OK DIP OFF signal ОХЛ ОК (+27 V).
21 C_SIGNAL_DR_SOST DIP OFF signal ДР connect.(+27V)
IK
22 C_KN_OTKL_OB_INS DIP OFF Switch OFF ОБ ИНС
23 C_SIGNAL_KONTR_S DIP OFF Signal control connection ЭО (+27V)
TIK
24 C_SIGNAL_PLUS_SP DIP OFF signal +СП (+27V)

Confidential

TYPE FOR
25 C_SIGNAL_KONTR_S DIP OFF Signal control connection ОК (+27V)
TIK_OK
26 C_PRIZNAK_IR_05A DIP OFF attr ИР (+27В НИ) 0,5А
27 C_OTKL_BASU_05A DIP OFF switch OFF SEP1CS (+27V НИ)
0.5А
28 C_OTKL_UPU_05A DIP OFF switch OFF УПУ (+27V НИ) 0.5А
29 C_OTKL_INS_05A DIP OFF switch OFF INS (+27V НИ) 0.5А
30 C_PDKL_M1 DIP OFF connected М1(+27V НИ) 0.5А
31 C_REZERW_KM_BA_ DIP OFF reserve of command БА (+27V НИ)
1 0.25А
32 C_REZERW_KM_BA_ DIP OFF reserve of command БА (+27V
2 НИ)0.25А
33 C_OTKL_UM_01A DIP OFF switch off УМ (+27В) 0.1А
34 C_REZERW_KM_1 DIP OFF reserve
35 C_IMIT_ND_SRS DIP OFF simulation НД СРС
36 C_KM_IMIT_SWW DIP OFF Reserve of command simulation СВВ
37 C_KM_IMIT_SWK DIP OFF Reserve of command simulation СВК
38 C_KM_IMIT_SND DIP OFF Reserve of command simulation
СНД
39 C_PLUS_27V_SP DIP OFF +27V СП
40 C_WIHOD_RL_1 DIP OFF Output РЛ (exit РЛ )
41 C_OBOG_INS_NI DIP OFF INS warm up from GPS bus
42 C_KN_KALIBR_WTI DIP OFF Calibrate ВТИ
43 C_DB1_ATT1 DIP OFF 1 dB att.1
45 C_DB4_ATT1_1 DIP OFF 4 dB 1 att. 1
46 C_KN_OTKL_TM_I DIP OFF Reserve(button switch off ТМ-И)
52 C_WKL_IK1 DIP OFF Switch ON ИК1
53 C_WKL_GASHENIE_1 DIP OFF Switch ON ГШ1
54 C_WKL_GASHENIE_2 DIP OFF Switch ON ГШ2
55 C_WKL_US1 DIP OFF Switch ON УС1
56 C_WKL_US2 DIP OFF Switch ON УС2

Confidential

TYPE FOR
57 C_WKL_MOD DIP OFF Switch ON mod
58 C_AWTOMAT_REVIM DIP OFF automatic mode
59 C_PACHKA DIP OFF packet
60 C_WKL_IK1_1 DIP OFF Switch ON ИК1 (reserve)
61 C_WKL_LZ_2 DIP OFF Switch ON ЛЗ2
62 C_DB10_ATT3 DIP OFF 10 att. 3
63 C_DB20_ATT3 DIP OFF 20 att. 3
66 C_OTKL_KPA_KN DIP OFF Switch OFF КПА(button)
67 C_WKL_FSK DIP OFF Switch ON f ск
68 C_WKL_IZMPR DIP OFF ON meas. Devices (Switch ON
change of devices)
69 C_WKL_GEN_SH_P4 DIP OFF Switch ON ГШ ПЧ
70 C_REZERW_KM_3 DIP OFF Reserve
71 C_P8_ATT3 DIP OFF 8p att. 3
72 C_P9_ATT3 DIP OFF 9p att. 3
73 C_WKL_GASH_W DIP OFF Switch ON ГШ-В
74 C_WKL_GK DIP OFF Switch ON ГК
75 C_WKL_F_P4_Z DIP OFF Switch ON f пч-з
76 C_REZERW_1_IK_1 DIP OFF Reserve 1 ИК1
77 C_WKL_DOP DIP OFF Switch on doopler
78 C_PLUS_BA_B DIP OFF +БА(Б)(+27 V)
79 C_PLUS_27_V_NI DIP OFF “+27V НИ"
80 C_PLUS_27_V_BA DIP OFF "+27V БА"(А)
81 C_KONTR_STIK_KPA DIP ON Control connection КПА (27V)
82 C_WTI_WKL DIP OFF Switch ON ВТИ(inward signal)
83 C_RAZBLOK_SEP1_1 DIP OFF Unlock ЭО
84 C_ISHODNOE_OK DIP OFF Initiate ОК
85 C_RAZBLOK_BS_1 DIP OFF Unblock БС
86 - DIP - Tact(); - No check
88 C_PRZN_K310 DIP OFF Attribute К310
89 C_X2_SOSTIK DIP OFF Х2 connected
90 C_KNTR_OCP DIP OFF Control ОЦП.
91 C_AMB_PROGR DIP OFF АМБ warm up ("heated" )
92 C_KNTR_STIC_IK1 DIP ON Control connection ИК1

Confidential

TYPE FOR
93 C_KNTR_STIC_IK7 DIP ON Control connection ИК7
94 C_KNTR_STIC_IK8 DIP ON Control connection ИК8 C33
95 C_KNTR_STIC_BASU DIP OFF Check docking БАСУ
96 C_NEISPR_BCWM_W DIP OFF Fault OBC
H
97 C_ISH_BALL_TPS DIP OFF initiate bottle ТПС
98 C_PRZN_SK310 DIP OFF Attribute СК310
99 C_PRIZNAK_IR DIP OFF Attribute ИР
100 C_OTKL_BASU DIP OFF Switch OFF SEP1CS
101 C_OTKL_UPU DIP OFF Switch OFF УПУ
102 C_OTKL_INS DIP OFF Switch OFF ИНС
103 C_PODKL_M1 DIP OFF Connected М1
104 C_OTKL_3B_58 DIP OFF Reserve of command БА(Off3Б-58)
105 C_REZERW_KOMAN DIP OFF Reserve of command БА
D_BA_4
106 C_OTKL_UM DIP OFF Switch OFF УМ
107 C_WKL_TM_R_WH DIP OFF ON ТМ-Р-input
112 C_WKL_TM_I_WH DIP OFF Switch ON ТМ-И-inpu
113 C_WIHOD_RL DIP OFF Output РЛ
115 C_LC_136 DIP OFF Reserve
116 C_WKL_BASU_PLUS DIP OFF Switch ON БАСУ <<+>>
122 C_LC_143 DIP OFF

Confidential
2. Switch ON SP by enabling C_WKL_SP_MINUS discrete signal.

3. Switch ON NI by enabling C_WKL_NI discrete signal.
4. Switch OFF SP by disabling C_WKL_SP_MINUS discrete signal.
5. Switch OFF NI by disabling C_WKL_NI discrete signal.
6. Repeat Step 2 to Step 5 for three times without checking the result of the signals.
Output
The result of the checks shall be send to panel computer.
3.1.4.4 SELF CHECK SEP3 (AP 303)

Description
Inputs
Refer the below signal names.
Processing
The following steps will be followed to verify the signal status,
1. Read the status of C_IMIT_ND_SRS (simulation ND SRS) signal. If it is OFF, ON
the C_KW_WKL_GH1_IM (Acknowledge of switch ON of GH1 sim ) command &
wait 1125 ms and read again C_IMIT_ND_SRS signal status. If it TRUE then it is
success otherwise “Permission ON GH1 sim” is not OK.
2. Read the status of C_IMIT_ND_SWW (details not available) signal, if it is OFF, ON
the C_KW_WKL_GH2_IM (acknowledgement switch on GH2 simulator) command
& wait 1125 ms and read again C_IMIT_ND_SWW signal status. If it TRUE then it is
success otherwise “Permission ON GH2 sim” is not OK.
3. Read the status of C_IMIT_ND_SWK (details not available) signal, if it is OFF, ON

the C_KW_WKL_US1_IM (Acknowledge of switch ON of US1 sim) command & wait
1125 ms and read again C_IMIT_ND_SWK signal status. If it TRUE then it is
success otherwise “Permission ON US1 sim” is not OK.
4. Read the status of C_IMIT_ND_SND (details not available) signal, if it is OFF, ON

the C_KW_WKL_US2_IM (Acknowledge of switch ON of US2 sim) command & wait
1125 ms and read again C_IMIT_ND_SND signal status. If it TRUE then it is
success otherwise “Permission ON US2 sim” is not OK.

Confidential
S. COMMAND SIGNAL
NO.
NAME SIG. DESCRIPTION NAME TYPE DESCRIPTION
TYPE
1. C_KW_WK DOP Acknowledge C_IMIT_ND_S DIP Simulation of
L_GH1_IM switch ON of GH1 RS ND SRS
simulator.
2. C_KW_WK DOP Acknowledge C_IMIT_ND_S DIP (details not
L_GH2_IM switch ON of GH2 WW available)
simulator.
3. C_KW_WK DOP Acknowledge C_IMIT_ND_S DIP (details not
L_US1_IM switch ON of US1 WK available)
simulator.
4. C_KW_WK DOP Acknowledge of C_IMIT_ND_S DIP (details not
L_US2_IM switch ON of US2 ND available)
simulator.
5. The status of 22 signals will be verified as given in below table. If the signal status
is FALSE, corresponding signal will be not OK.
S.NO SIGNAL NAME SIGNAL TYPE DESCRIPTION

1 C_PRIZNAK_IR_05A DIP Attribute ИР (+27V НИ) 0,5А
2 C_OTKL_BASU_05A DIP Switch OFF of БАСУ (+27V НИ) 0.5А
3 C_OTKL_UPU_05A DIP Switch OFF of ИНС (+27V НИ) 0.5А
4 C_OTKL_INS_05A DIP Switch OFF of ИНС (+27V НИ) 0.5А
5 C_PDKL_M1 DIP Connection of М1(+27V НИ) 0.5А
6 C_REZERW_KM_BA_1 DIP Reserve command БА(+27V НИ) 0.25А
7 C_REZERW_KM_BA_2 DIP Reserve command БА (+27V НИ)
0.25А
8 C_OTKL_UM_01A DIP Switch OFF of УМ (+27V) 0,1А
9 C_REZERW_KM_1 DIP Reserved
10 C_WIXOD_RL_1 DIP Output РЛ
11 C_KN_KALIBR_WTI DIP Calibration of ВТИ
12 C_WTI_WKL DIP ВТИ SWITCH ON OF (input signal)
13 C_RAZBLOK_SEP1_1 DIP Unlocking of ЭО
14 C_ISHODNOE_OK DIP Initial of ОК
15 C_RAZBLOK_BS_1 DIP C_RAZBLOK_BS_1
16 C_PRZN_K310 DIP Attribute К310
17 C_X2_SOSTIK DIP Х2 connected
18 C_KNTR_OCP DIP Control ОЦП

Confidential
S.NO SIGNAL NAME SIGNAL TYPE DESCRIPTION

19 C_AMB_PROGR DIP АМБ "heated"
20 C_NEISPR_BCWM_WH DIP Fault OBC
21 C_ISH_BALL_TPS DIP Initial bottle ТПС
22 C_PRZN_SK310 DIP Attribute СК310
6. If any one of the signal fails, “P002“ status will Not OK.
7. Read the status of “SIGNAL” signal, if it is OFF, ON the corresponding
“COMMAND” and wait 1125 ms and read again “SIGNAL” signal status. If it TRUE
then it is success otherwise it is not OK.
8. Refer below table for “SIGNAL” & “COMMAND” details.
COMMAND SIGNAL
S.NO. DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION
NAME NAME
1 C_PRIZNAK_IR Attr ИР C_PRIZNAK_IR_05 attr ИР (+27В НИ)
A 0,5А
2 C_OTKL_BASU swicted C_OTKL_BASU_05 switch off SEP1CS
off.SEP1CS A (+27V НИ) 0.5А
3 C_OTKL_UPU switched off УПУ C_OTKL_UPU_05A switch off УПУ (+27V
НИ) 0.5А
4 C_OTKL_INS switched off ИНС C_OTKL_INS_05A switch off INS (+27V
НИ) 0.5А
5 C_PODKL_M1 Connected М1 C_PDKL_M1 connected М1(+27V
НИ) 0.5А
6 C_OTKL_3B_5 Reserve command C_REZERW_KM_B reserve of command
8 БА (switched off A_1 БА (+27V НИ) 0.25А
3Б-58)
7 C_REZERW_K Reserve command C_REZERW_KM_B reserve of command
OMAND_BA_4 БА A_2 БА (+27V НИ)0.25А
8 C_OTKL_UM Switched off УМ C_OTKL_UM_01A switch off УМ (+27В)
0.1А
9 C_REZERW_K Reserve C_REZERW_KM_1 reserved
M_BA_9
10 C_WIHOD_RL exit РЛ C_WIHOD_RL_1 exit РЛ
11 C_KALIBR_BTI Calibration ВТИ C_KN_KALIBR_WTI calibration ВТИ
12 C_LC_160 - C_WTI_WKL ВТИ switch on
(inward signal)
13 C_LC_161 - C_RAZBLOK_SEP1 Unlock ЭО
_1

Confidential
9. If any one of the signal fails, “P003“ status will be Not OK.
10. Read the status of “SIGNAL” signal, if it is OFF, ON the corresponding

“COMMAND” & wait 1125 ms and read again “SIGNAL” signal status. If it TRUE
then it is success otherwise it is not OK. Refer the below table for “SIGNAL”
“COMMAND” details.
Note : The commands will be issued from СИП БАСУ.

S.NO. COMMAND SIGNAL
NAME DESCRIPTION NAME DESCRIPTION
1. B_PRIZNAK_IR flag ИР C_PRIZNAK_IR Attr ИР
2. B_OTKL_INS sw. off ИНС C_OTKL_INS switched off ИНС
3. B_OTKL_BASU sw. off БАСУ C_OTKL_BASU switched off SEP1CS
4. B_OTKL_UPU sw. off УПУ C_OTKL_UPU switched off УПУ
5. B_PDKL_M1 conn. М1 C_PODKL_M1 Connected М1
6. B_OTKL_UM sw. off УМ C_OTKL_UM Switched off УМ
11. If any one of the signal fails, “P004“ status is Not OK.
Output
Signal status.

Confidential
3.1.4.5 CHECKING THE INDICATING DISPLAY IN CONTROL PANEL

Description
This requirement is used to perform visual inspection in indicating display in Control Panel.
In this check ON and OFF of all the LEDs will be verified
Inputs
The signals given in below table are used as input.
Processing
1. Initially set TRUE (LED ON) for the signals given in below table.
2. After 12.5 sec set FALSE (LED OFF) to the same signal.
S.NO SIGNAL NAME DESCRIPTION

1. C_OK_SOSTIK ОК connected (Indication panel)
2. C_KONTROL_OCP Control ОЦП (indication panel)
3. C_SAMOKONTROL Self check (indication panel)
4. C_RAZBLOK_BS Unblock БС (indication panel)
5. C_WKL_UM Switched on УМ (indication panel)
6. C_WKL_UPU Switch on УПУ (indication panel)
7. C_WKL_INS Switch on ИНС (indication panel)
8. C_TM_R_WKL ТМ-Р Switch on (indication panel)
9. C_BTI_WKL ВТИ switch on (indication panel)
10. C_OBOGREW heat up ИНС (indication panel)
11. C_TM_I_WKL ТМ-И switch on (indication panel)
12. C_OTKZ_SIP_BASU refuse СИП БАСУ (indication panel)
13. C_ISHODHOE_OK Initial ОК
Output
In control panel all LEDs should be ON initially and OFF after 12.5 seconds.

Confidential
3.1.4.6 1553B LOOP BACK CHECK

Description
This requirement will verify the 1553B data transfer functionality by receiving and loading
data into varies sub-address. The loaded data is read by controller and verified with the
transmitted data.
Input
NA
Processing
1. Configure channel(1) of SEP3 as Remote Terminal(1).
2. Receive the data transmitted by controller and load it into the corresponding
transmitting sub-address.
3. Repeat Step 1 to Step 2 for RT-Address(2 to 30)
4. Repeat the Step 1 to Step 3 for 1553B Channel(2,3,4)
Output
Result of 1553B loop back test.
3.1.4.7 DISCRETE I/O LOOP BACK CHECK

Description
The discrete outputs from SEP3 are looped back to the discrete input modules and verified
by using the external harness loop back cables.
Input
NA
Processing
1. Configure all the input channels.
2. Enable/Disable digital output.
3. Read the corresponding digital input.
4. Repeat Step 2 to Step 3 for all digital input channels.
Output

Confidential
3.1.4.8 DUT POWER BACK CHECK

Description
DUT power supplies are terminated at the COE connector end are looped back to the ADC
for the voltage measurement through the multiplexer module.
Input
NA
Processing
1. Configure the ADC channels.
2. Configure the Multiplexer module.
3. Select the power signal in multiplexer and connect to ADC.
4. Read the voltage from ADC.
5. Repeat Step 3 to Step 4 for all power signals.
Output

Confidential
3.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
The system shall respond to each user input. If the check will take more than a few
seconds, the user shall be warned of this, and given a progress indicator. If any
communication failure that will be updated to user. There are no other performance
requirements.
3.3 DESIGN CONSTRAINTS

Their is no design constraints in the software design.

Confidential
3.4 SOFTWARE SYSTEM ATTRIBUTES
3.4.1 RELIABILITY
The COE application software shall be able to run continuously for not less than twelve
hours.
3.4.2 AVAILABILITY
This software will be available in the system 24 hours a day. User will be able to run the
software at any time and if the required hardware is available then all functions of the
software can be performed.
3.4.3 SECURITY
The system will be protected from the anonymous users. The system will be provided with
a login feature, which will be password activated . Only the 'root' can install / update the
application software.
3.4.4 MAINTAINABILITY
All code shall be fully documented. Each function shall be commented with description of
functionality. All program files shall include comments concerning authorship and date of
last change. The code shall be modular to permit future modifications.
The software shall be designed to contain the following features for easy maintainability,
• Modularity
• Reusability
• Traceability
3.4.5 PORTABILITY
The software shall be developed based on the following attribute for easy portability,
• Modular design
• Design based on open standard functions like POSIX.

Confidential
3.5 EXTERNAL INTERFACE REQUIREMENTS

3.5.1 User Interfaces
• All interaction between the user and the system will be through a graphical user
interface (GUI) and Control panel of the system.
Graphical user Interface:

• All features will be accessed through standard components like buttons, text boxes,
dialog window, panels, menus and etc,.
• The user shall communicate with the system through a joystick and keyboard.
• Error messages will be displayed through message box and action log.
• The graphical User Interface shall be designed with help of QNX Photon microGUI.
Control Panel:
• Control panel comprises of Voltmeter, push button switches with indicators,
buzzer(to generate alarm) and LEDs.
• The control panel used for following:
➢ Controlling power to DUT & COE.
➢ Displaying status of signals from COE & DUT.
➢ Measurement of voltage supplied by PDU COE & DUT.
➢ Issuing simulation command to DUT.
➢ Raising alarm for the high temperature.
➢ The control panel is powered from PDU
3.5.2 HARDWARE INTERFACES

The following are the hard modules used in the each sub-system of COE.
Panel Computer:
SL. NO BOARD ID DESCRIPTION QTY
1 - Processor module 1
SEP1
2 DP-VME-4227 64 Chanel Low Thermal Relay Multiplexer Module 2
3 DP-VME-4230 48 CH Form 'C' Relay Module 3
16 Differential Channel 100KHz Isolated ADC
4 DP-VME-1443 1
Module

Confidential

DP-VME-3078 48 CH Digital Input & 48 CH Digital output Module 2
4 SPDT, 5A power relay can be mounted in the
5 - 1
SIA – Custom Module
SEP2 (SEP2)
16 Differential Channel 100KHz Isolated ADC
2 DP-VME-1443 1
Module
3 DP-VME-XXXX 64 Chanel Low Thermal Relay Multiplexer Module 2
4 DP-PMC-5775 64 CH TTL IO Module 1
5 DP-VME-3078 48 CH Digital Input & 48 CH Digital output Module 3
6 DP-VME-XXXX 48 CH Form 'C' Relay Module 2
7 DP-PMC-5535 2 CH of ACE 1553B BC/RT/MT Intelligent Module 2
Self Check (SEP3):

2 DP-VME-3078 48 CH Digital Input & 48 CH Digital output Module 3
3 DP-VME-XXXX 48 CH Form 'C' Relay Module 2
4 DP-PMC-5535 2 CH of ACE 1553B BC/RT/MT Intelligent Module 2
DP-VME-2109 32 Ch DAC, 4 CH ADC 1
3.5.3 SOFTWARE INTERFACES

The application is interfaced with the drivers of the corresponding hardware interfaces.
Driver library details are given below. Following are details of specific software that will be
interfaced with the system
S.NO SOFTWARE/ DRIVER NAME DESCRIPTION
1. QNX Operating System Core system software to interact with
hardware.
2. Ethernet Socket API To send and receive data on
Ethernet.
3. QNX Photon microGUI To design Graphical User Interface.
4. Relay Module Driver To access the Relay module of the

COE
5. Relay Multiplexer module To access the Relay Multiplexer
module of the COE
6. 1553B Module Driver To access the 1553B module of the
COE

Confidential
S.NO SOFTWARE/ DRIVER NAME DESCRIPTION

7. DIO Driver To access the DIO module of the
COE
8. Analog Input Module Driver To access the Analog Input module
of the COE
The communication between the processes is through global memory.
3.5.4 COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACES

The following communication interfaces are used in the COE
• Ethernet communication
• 1553B communication
3.5.4.1 ETHERNET COMMUNICATION
The communication between the COE subsystem is carried out using the Ethernet
communication. The following are the two techniques COE shall use from sharing
information between sub-systems.
1. Qnet (QNX native protocol) – For sharing files between sub systems
The following files shall be transfer between the sub systems,
• Passport data
• Programs to be loaded into on-board devices
2. TCP / IP – For message passing
The TCP/IP socket communication protocol to send receive the data through Ethernet. The
following communication shall be performed using Ethernet.
1. Communication between Panel computer and SEPs

• To initiate the startup test in each SEP.
• To send the user input information to the SEP's.
• To perform the execution of the selected check(s) in the respective SEP.
• the result of each check shall be send to panel computer from SEPs (like current
check number, step number and result of each step).
• When ever there is change in power supply status to be send to Panel
Computer from SEP3(CK).
• The temperature in the instrument bay has to be send from SEP2(SEP2) to PC.
• Panel Computer has to send the loading program details to SEP2 (SEP2).
• Stop the execution of programs in all SEP when there is any emergency (over
voltage, increase in temperature of IB).
2. Communication between SEPs

Confidential
• The DIO channel status of one SEP is send to other two SEP's whenever other
SEP need the updated status of DIO of other SEP.
• One SEP can requests another SEP to switch ON / OFF its DOP signal.
• SEP1(SEP1) send command to initiate 1553B transfer from SEP2(SEP2) and
SEP2(SEP2) has to send the result of exchange to SEP1(SEP1).
3.5.4.2 1553B COMMUNICATION

1. Loading of OS, programs to on-board devices.
2. Loading of passport data to missile.
3. To perform the seeker test.

Confidential
3.6 NON FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS

3.6.1 SITE DEPENDENCY
The following are system required for carryout the COE operation.
1. Sub-systems to be tested
2. Partial integrated or integrated article to be tested
3. Software required for loading into on-board devices
3.6.2 GENERAL DEVELOPMENT REQUIREMENTS

QNX Momentics IDE 4.7 to develop the application and photon Appbuilder to design the
GUI. Coding shall follow the C/C++ coding guidelines and conventions.
3.6.3 PERSONNEL RELATED REQUIREMENTS

The operator of the COE system should have basic computer operating skills with the
adequate knowledge in Missile operation and have knowledge in data used by missile.
Software development engineer shall be familiar with C, C++, Qnx Neutrino and 1553B
communication protocol.
3.6.4 TRAINING RELATED REQUIREMENTS

The user shall be trained to operate the user interface of COE application. Software
user manual shall be provided to operate the COE Software.
3.6.5 LOGISTICS RELATED REQUIREMENTS

The COE system is transported to customer site through container.
3.6.6 PACKAGING REQUIREMENTS

The system shall be packaged along with executable, dynamic linking libraries,
configuration files and all documentation shall be available for electronic transfer as a
single compressed file. The uncompressed set of files shall include a README file
containing a minimal guidance for installing and running the software. Procedure shall be
provided to update the SEP application from Panel Computer.

Confidential
4 REQUIREMENTS TRACEABILITY
REQUIREMENT ID IN DESCRIPTION SECTION IN URS (REF:
SRS BM/ECC/TSD/VER.1.0)
DP_COE_PC_REQ_01 User authentication to access the NA
DP_COE_PC_REQ_01 software
DP_COE_PC_REQ_02 To display the system initialization & 3.2.3

current configuration status.
DP_COE_PC_REQ_03 To display the power supply status 3.2.3
DP_COE_PC_REQ_04 To display the temperature status 3.2.3
DP_COE_PC_REQ_05 Enter into system – to perform 3.2.1

startup test and select the article
type
DP_COE_PC_REQ_06 To give additional information 3.2.1, 10.1.5.(ii)
DP_COE_PC_REQ_07 To select operation type 3.2.1
DP_COE_PC_REQ_07 Self Check 10.1.5.(i), 10.3.2

_01
DP_COE_PC_REQ_07 Type A Check 3.2.1, 3.2.2

_02
DP_COE_PC_REQ_07 Type B Check 3.2.1, 3.2.2

_03
DP_COE_PC_REQ_07 Control Operations 3.2.1, 3.2.2

_03_01
DP_COE_PC_REQ_07 Stand of the plant control CK311 3.2.1, 3.2.2

_03_02
DP_COE_PC_REQ_07 Inward Inspection stand (CBK / IGI 3.2.1, 3.2.2

_03_03 Stand)
DP_COE_PC_REQ_07 Loading of programs 3.2.1, 3.2.2

_03_04
DP_COE_PC_REQ_07 Loading passport data into article 3.2.1, 3.2.2

_03_05
DP_COE_PC_REQ_08 To select the mode 3.2.1, 3.2.2
DP_COE_PC_REQ_08 To execute checks in automatic 10.1.5.(iii)

_01 mode
DP_COE_PC_REQ_08 To execute checks in selective mode 10.1.5.(iii)

Confidential

_02 mode
DP_COE_PC_REQ_08 To execute checks in step mode 10.1.5.(iii)

_03
DP_COE_PC_REQ_09 To execute the checks 10.1.5.(iii & iv)
DP_COE_PC_REQ_10 To manage the reports 3.2.4
DP_COE_PC_REQ_10 To log the reports 3.2.4

_01
DP_COE_PC_REQ_10 To print the reports 3.2.4, 10.1.10

_02
SEP3 REQUIREMENTS
DP_COE_SEP3_REQ_ Switch ON/ OFF of power supplies 10.1.6
01
DP_COE_SEP3_REQ_ Processing of remote requests 10.1.9
02
DP_COE_SEP3_REQ_ Starting test SEP SC 10.1.5.(i)
03
DP_COE_SEP3_REQ_ Self check SEP SC 10.3.2
04
DP_COE_SEP3_REQ_ Checking the indicating display of 10.3.2
05 device IK8
DP_COE_SEP3_REQ_ 1553B loop-back check 10.3.2
06
DP_COE_SEP3_REQ_ Discrete I/O Loop back test 10.1.5.(i)
07
DP_COE_SEP3_REQ_ DUT Power Loop back test 10.1.5.(i)
08
SEP1 REQUIREMENTS
DP_COE_SEP1_REQ_ Monitor the dangerous signals is 9.e
01 performed in the period of 10 ms and
issue emergency off in case of any
potential variation
DP_COE_SEP1_REQ_ SEP1 shall respond to the remote 10.1.9

02 request received from Panel
Computer or from other SEP's and

Confidential

send response to the respective sub-
system
DP_COE_SEP1_REQ_ Monitoring and simulation of 9.e.ii

03 Warhead signals
DP_COE_SEP1_REQ_ Startup test for SEP1 10.1.5.(i), 10.3.2

04
SELF-CHECK
DP_COE_SEP1_REQ_ Checking of potential monitoring 10.3.2

05 circuit
DP_COE_SEP1_REQ_ Checking the correctness of 10.3.2

06 measurement bridge
DP_COE_SEP1_REQ_ Checking the function of dangerous 10.3.2

07 potentials monitoring
DP_COE_SEP1_REQ_ Checking the functionality of 40 KΩ 10.3.2

08 Measurement Bridge
DP_COE_SEP1_REQ_ Checking the functionality of 1.5 KΩ 10.3.2

09 Measurement Bridge
DP_COE_SEP1_REQ_ Checking the control circuits of SEP1 10.3.2

10
DP_COE_SEP1_REQ_ Checking the correctness of 10.3.2

11 warhead simulator
DP_COE_SEP1_REQ_ Discrete I/O Loop Back Check 10.3.2
12
TYPE B
DP_COE_SEP1_REQ_ Checking the insulation resistance 10.3.1.1

13 and supply circuits
DP_COE_SEP1_REQ_ Checking the pyro sources on 10.3.1.1

14 commands of СК341-43

15 commands of PTD-5М

16 commands of COE СК351.1

Confidential

DP_COE_SEP1_REQ_ Checking BZP on commands К310- 10.3.1.1
17 61МЭ
DP_COE_SEP1_REQ_ Checking of On-board Automation 10.3.1.1

18 Block
DP_COE_SEP1_REQ_ Checking of Pressure restoration 10.3.1.1

19 signaling device
DP_COE_SEP1_REQ_ Check of circuits of Warhead (BS) 10.3.1.1

20
DP_COE_SEP1_REQ_ Check of inclined launch (КПМРК2) 10.3.1.1

21
DP_COE_SEP1_REQ_ Checking of КПНС1 10.3.1.1

22
DP_COE_SEP1_REQ_ Check of КПМРК1 10.3.1.1

23

24
DP_COE_SEP1_REQ_ Checking the connection of AMB to 10.3.1.1

25 SEP1 bus
DP_COE_SEP1_REQ_ Checking the Launch Circuits on 10.3.1.1

26 command РС
DP_COE_SEP1_REQ_ Checking the insulation resistance, 10.3.1.1

27 initial condition of switching elements
and circuits of article
TYPE A
DP_COE_SEP1_REQ_ Checking the insulation resistance 10.3.1.1

28 and supply circuits

29 commands of СК341-43

30 commands of PTD-5М

31 commands of COE СК351.1

Confidential

DP_COE_SEP1_REQ_ Checking BZP on commands К310- 10.3.1.1
32 61МЭ
DP_COE_SEP1_REQ_ Checking of On-board Automation 10.3.1.1

33 Block
DP_COE_SEP1_REQ_ Checking of Pressure restoration 10.3.1.1

34 signaling device
DP_COE_SEP1_REQ_ Check of circuits of Warhead (BS) 10.3.1.1

35
DP_COE_SEP1_REQ_ Check of inclined launch (КПМРК2) 10.3.1.1

36

37
DP_COE_SEP1_REQ_ Check of КПМРК1 10.3.1.1

38

39
DP_COE_SEP1_REQ_ Checking the connection of AMB to 10.3.1.1

40 SEP1 bus
DP_COE_SEP1_REQ_ Checking the Launch Circuits on 10.3.1.1

41 command РС
DP_COE_SEP1_REQ_ Checking the insulation resistance, 10.3.1.1

42 initial condition of switching elements
and circuits of article
SEP2 REQUIREMENTS
DP_COE_SEP2_REQ_ Process the remote request received 10.1.9

01 from Panel Computer and other
SEP's (SEP1 and SC) and send
response to the respective system
DP_COE_SEP2_REQ_ Checking temperature in instrument 9.g

02 bay
DP_COE_SEP2_REQ_ Startup check for SEP2(SEP2) 10.1.5.(i), 10.3.2

03
SELF-CHECK

Confidential

DP_COE_SEP2_REQ_ Checking SEP SEP2 in mode of 10.3.2
04 exchange with SEP SC along
mainlines М1, М2,M3 and
M4
DP_COE_SEP2_REQ_ Checking the Fin Simulator Block 10.3.2
05
DP_COE_SEP2_REQ_ Checking the functionality of 10.3.2

06 Temperature Monitoring Circuit
DP_COE_SEP2_REQ_ Checking the device RF Seeker 10.3.2

07 Testing Complex (ИК1), ИК1С
DP_COE_SEP2_REQ_ Discrete I/O Loop Back Check 10.3.2

08
TYPE B CHECKS
DP_COE_SEP2_REQ_ Checking external commands of 10.3.1.2
09 device MIU(СК314-43)
DP_COE_SEP2_REQ_ Checking “OBC Faulty” command 10.3.1.2

10 issued by MIU(СК314-43)
DP_COE_SEP2_REQ_ Check the integrity of actuator 10.3.1.2

11 circuits
DP_COE_SEP2_REQ_ Checking actuator deflection as per 10.3.1.2

12 MIU signals
DP_COE_SEP2_REQ_ Checking RGP sensor device 10.3.1.2

13
DP_COE_SEP2_REQ_ Checking Radio Altimeter device 10.3.1.2

14
DP_COE_SEP2_REQ_ Checking Russian Telemetry device 10.3.1.2

15
DP_COE_SEP2_REQ_ Checking of device АСОНД-Ц 10.3.1.2

16 through M1 & M3 buses
DP_COE_SEP2_REQ_ INS integrated check 10.3.1.2

17
DP_COE_SEP2_REQ_ Checking INS 10.3.1.2

18

Confidential

DP_COE_SEP2_REQ_ Checking OBC 10.3.1.2
19
DP_COE_SEP2_REQ_ Checking GPS 10.3.1.2

20
DP_COE_SEP2_REQ_ Checking command receiving unit of 10.3.1.2

21 MIU
DP_COE_SEP2_REQ_ Checking PLP mode 10.3.1.2

22
DP_COE_SEP2_REQ_ Loading program in to OBC 10.3.1.3

23
DP_COE_SEP2_REQ_ Reading and check summing of the 10.3.1.3

24 executable programs in CK315-1
DP_COE_SEP2_REQ_ Loading Passport Data of “type B” 10.3.1.3

25 article in to OBC
DP_COE_SEP2_REQ_ Reading the Passport Data of the 10.3.1.3

26 “type B” article from OBC
DP_COE_SEP2_REQ_ Program loading in to the devices 10.3.1.3

27 К312-10В
DP_COE_SEP2_REQ_ Program loading in to the devices 10.3.1.3

28 К312-10A
DP_COE_SEP2_REQ_ Program for Counting and Check 10.3.1.3

29 summing of the executable Program
in K312-10B
DP_COE_SEP2_REQ_ Program for Counting and Check 10.3.1.3
30 summing of the executable Program
in K312-10B
DP_COE_SEP2_REQ_ Writing data and Program in to the 10.3.1.3
31 device CK314-1
DP_COE_SEP2_REQ_ Loading of program or almanac in to 10.3.1.3

32 the device K323-1
SEEKER
DP_COE_SEP2_REQ_ Check of antenna device K312 10.3.3
33
DP_COE_SEP2_REQ_ Check receiving channel of K312 10.3.3

Confidential

34
DP_COE_SEP2_REQ_ Check support signals, issued by 10.3.3
35 system К312
DP_COE_SEP2_REQ_ Check of transmitting device K312 10.3.3
36
DP_COE_SEP2_REQ_ Check of modes «О», «З» and «С» 10.3.3
37 of system К312
DP_COE_SEP2_REQ_ Check telemetry signals of system 10.3.3
38 К312
TYPE A CHECKS
DP_COE_SEP2_REQ_ Checking external command of 10.3.1.2
39 device MIU
DP_COE_SEP2_REQ_ Check the integrity of actuator 10.3.1.2
40 circuits
DP_COE_SEP2_REQ_ Checking actuator deflection as per 10.3.1.2
41 MIU signals
DP_COE_SEP2_REQ_ Checking RGP sensor device 10.3.1.2
42
DP_COE_SEP2_REQ_ Checking Radio Altimeter device 10.3.1.2
43
DP_COE_SEP2_REQ_ Checking Russian Telemetry device 10.3.1.2
44
DP_COE_SEP2_REQ_ INS integrated check 10.3.1.2
45
DP_COE_SEP2_REQ_ Checking command receiving unit of 10.3.1.2
46 MIU
DP_COE_SEP2_REQ_ Checking PLP mode 10.3.1.2
47
DP_COE_SEP2_REQ_ Loading “type A” article Passport 10.3.1.3
48 Data in to OBC
DP_COE_SEP2_REQ_ Reading “type A” article Passport 10.3.1.3
49 Data from OBC
DP_COE_SEP2_REQ_ Loading program in to OBC 10.3.1.3
50
DP_COE_SEP2_REQ_ Loading program in to device 10.3.1.3
51 Seeker(K312-10B)

Confidential

DP_COE_SEP2_REQ_ Loading program in to device 10.3.1.3
52 Seeker(K312-10A)
DP_COE_SEP2_REQ_ Executable program checksum 10.3.1.3
53 verification in OBC
54 verification in Seeker (K312-10B)
55 verification in Seeker(K312-10A)

Confidential
APPENDIX A: LIST OF CHECKS AND DESCRIPTION

The following are the list of test case in the existing system.
S.NO CHECK NUMBER CHECK DESCRIPTION
SELF CHECK
1. AP 300 Startup test SEP SC
2. AP 303 Selfcheck SEP SC
3. AP 319 Checking the indicating display of device ИК8
09/01/11
4. AP 301 Startup test SEP1
5. AP 304 Check the circuit diagram for checking potentials
6. AP 306 Checking the correctness of МIT
7. AP 307 Checking the circuit for checking potentials
8. AP 308 Checking the functionality in mode МIS – 40 KΩ
9. AP 309 Checking the functionality in mode МIS – 1.5 KΩ
10. AP 320 Checking control circuits of SEP SEP1
11. AP 323 Checking KPA BS
12. AP 1004 Checking the insulation resistance, supply circuits
13. AP 1030 Checking the pyro sources on commands of СК341-43
14. AP 1032 Checking the pyro sources on commands of ПВУ-5М
15. AP 1034 Checking the pyro sources on commands of КПА
СК351.1
16. AP 1035 Checking БЗП on commands К310-61МЭ
17. AP 1036 Checking of ББА(On-board Automation block)
18. AP 1037 Checking of СВД(Pressure restoration signaling device)
19. AP 1050 Check of circuits of БС
20. AP 1052 Check of КПМРК2(inclined launch)
21. AP 1054 Checking of КПНС1
22. AP 1060 Check of КПМРК1
24. AP 1064 Checking the connection of АМБ(Ampule Battery) to
БА(On-board Equipment)
25. AP 1066 Check СЦ(Launch Circuits) on command РС

Confidential

26. AP 1072 Checking the insulation resistance, initial condition of
27. AP 4 Checking the insulation resistance, supply circuits
28. AP 30 Checking the pyro sources on commands of СК341-43
29. AP 32 Checking the pyro sources on commands of ПВУ-5М
30. AP 34 Checking the pyro sources on commands of КПА
СК351.1
31. AP 35 Checking БЗП on commands К310-61МЭ
32. AP 36 Checking of ББА(On-board Automation block)
33. AP 37 Checking of СВД(Pressure restoration signaling device)
34. AP 50 Check of circuits of БС
35. AP 52 Check of КПМРК2(inclined launch)
37. AP 60 Check of КПМРК1
39. AP 64 Checking the connection of АМБ(Ampule Battery) to
БА(On-board Equipment)
40. AP 66 Check СЦ(Launch Circuits) on command РС
41. AP 72 Checking the insulation resistance, initial condition of
09/02/11
42. AP 302 Startup check for SEP2(SEP2)
43. AP 305 Self Check SEP SEP2
44. AP 315 Checking SEP SEP2 in mode of exchange with SEP SC

along mainlines М1, М2
45. AP 316 Checking the block Fin Simulator
46. AP 322 Checking the functionality of DIT
47. AP 324 Checking of device RF Seeker Testing Complex (ИК1),

ИК1С
48. AP 1010 Checking of block for sending commands by device
СК314-43
49. AP 1011 Checking time of sending command “Faulty” by device

Confidential

СК314-43
50. AP 1012 Checking the integrity of checking windings К316 and
circuits ПОС
51. AP 1014 Checking the deflection of РА(Fin Actuator) as per
signals of ПКН
52. AP 1016 Checking device К314-47
53. AP 1019 Checking complex К313 for НЭ2
54. AP 1020 Checking complex К313
55. AP 1024 Integrated check of ИНС(КЗ СИН)
56. AP 1025 Checking device СК314-1
57. AP 1026 Checking device СК315-1
58. AP 1046 Checking input circuits of commands of device СК314-43
59. AP 1202 Checking PLP mode
60. AP 1500 Loading program into device CK315-1
61. AP 1505 Reading and check summing of the executable programs

CK315-1
62. AP 1503 Loading passport data of the article СК310 into device
СК315-1
63. AP 1504 Reading passport data of article СК310 in KPA СК351.1
64. AP 1501 Program loading in to the devices К312-10В
65. AP 1502 Program loading in to the devices К312-10A
66. AP 1506 Program for Counting and Check summing of the

executable Program K312-10B
67. AP 1507 Program for Counting and Check summing of the
executable Program K312-10B
68. AP 1508 Writing data and Program in to the device CK314-1
69. AP 1509/1510 Loading of program or almanac in to the device K323-1
SEP2 - SEEKER
70. AP 1100 Check of antenna device K312
71. AP 1102 Check receiving channel of K312
72. AP 1110 Check support signals, issued by system К312
73. AP 1112 Check of transmitting device K312
74. AP 1130 Check of system К312

Confidential

75. AP 1140 Check of system К312
76. AP 1150 Check of modes «О», «З» and «С» of system К312
77. AP 1160 Check telemetry signals of system К312
78. AP 1161 Phasing of system К312
LIST OF CHECKS NEWLY ADDED:

1. AP 313 Checking of M2 bus
2. AP 310 Checking of reception and measuring of TM-signals
3. AP 317 Checking the simulation circuits of SEP2 commands
4. AP 321 Checking the communication circuits with the device ИК1
5. AP 325 Checking of devices ИК1, ИК1С
6. AP 326 Checking of commands issue and signals reception of
SEP SC
7. AP 327 Checking the measuring accuracy of voltage "5В"
8. AP 329 Checking the measuring accuracy of voltage "24В"
9. AP 372 Continuity check of circuits, being used in AP 72

10. AP 325 Checking of devices ИК1, ИК1С (In case of presence of
device ИК1 or ИК1С)
11. AP 330 Checking the formation accuracy of frequency "200Гц"
12. AP 1005 Checking of presence/absence of signal

"Liquid in TLC is absent"
13. AP 1200 Checking of K312 system during simulation of PLP mode
14. AP 1207 Checking of device К323-1
15. AP1509/1510 S/W loading in to the device К323-1 /Loading of almanac
in to device К323-1

Confidential
TABLE EXPRESS TRAIN - DIAGNOSTICS СК315-1
BIT NUMBER DESCRIPTION

0 NDP TEST Result
1 Test of RAM
2 Test of RAM of channel М1
3 Test of RAM of channel М2
4 Test of non volatile RAM (NVRAM)
5 Test of main ПКП
6 Test of second ПКП
PASSPORT DATA
S.NO DESIGNATION NAME OF PARAMETER UNITS RANGE
1 № art Factory number of - 10000 to
article 65535
2 αxр лев Position of mounting
place for device rad -π to π
СК314-1 with
respect to groove of
left flange
3 αyр Position of mounting rad -π to π
place for device
СК314-1 with
respect to axis ОY of
article
4 αzр Position of mounting rad -π to π
place for device
СК314-1 with
respect to axis ОZ of
article
5 αxр пр Position of mounting rad -π to π
place for device
СК314-1 with
respect to groove of
right flange
6 N Configuration of - -
article and type of
fuel
7 V SW version of device - -

Confidential
S.NO DESIGNATION NAME OF PARAMETER UNITS RANGE

СК315-1
I Change number in - -
SW version of device
СК315-1
8 Reserve - - -
9 Reserve - - -
10 КΣПД Check sum of - -
passport data
11to 32 Reserve - - -
33 to 64 - Line of symbols, - Unused symbols
designated number of are filled with
license of operating zeroes
system

Confidential
APPENDIX B: INSTRUCTION FOR EXECUTING CHECKS IN

SELF-CHECK WITH LOOP-BACK MODE
1. Repeated execution of checks АP 72 and АP 323 is possible only
after switch OFF of COE power.
2. During attestation of COE, and also during routine checks of COE, on
completion of above specified sequence of checks, additionally execute АP
330 in selective mode and АP 327, АP 329 in step by step mode.
3. Execution of AP 330, AP 327, AP 329 stipulates conducting of manual
operations according to the instructions displayed on screen of the device
ИК8 in the process of execution of checks.
4. During execution of AP 330, AP 327, AP 329, use measuring devices,
specified in “List of standardized equipment and devices for technical
maintenance”.

Confidential
APPENDIX C: INSTRUCTION FOR EXECUTING TYPE B

CHECKS IN AUTOMATIC MODE
1. Checking of К323 systems is ensured by execution of AP1027 of device
К323-1 and should be carried out while selecting the kind of work
"Control" and while entering the attribute “presence of GPS” in bookmark
10 in AI.
2. Execute AP 1005, AP 1011, AP 1019, AP 1022, AP 1025, AP 1026, AP
1027, AP1037 in “Selective” mode.
3. Do not execute AP 1012 while entering the attribute "ГС"(Hydro system) = 1
in AI.
4. Do not execute AP 1032, AP 1034, AP 1036, AP 1050, AP 1060, AP 1066
while entering the attribute "Исх. ДРР"(stimulation of fin sensor) = 1 in AI.
5. Execute AP 1022 while entering the attribute “Presence of TM = 1” in AI.
6. Execute AP 1004, AP 1005, AP 1035, AP 1037 according to the
instructions of test program & methodology СК310-000000PM-13
7. At the end of AP 1024, power of SEP2 automatically gets switched OFF and
message "SEP2 OFF" will appear on screen in zone "Power".
8. Execute the check AP 1024 in mode "А"(automatic) along with AP 1202.
9. Execute the check AP 1200 only in case of Type of operation "СВК" in mode
"В"(Selective mode).

Confidential

Yec1236 SDG SRS 1V01 Draft

Diunggah oleh

Informasi Dokumen

Deskripsi Asli:

Judul Asli

Hak Cipta

Format Tersedia

Bagikan dokumen Ini

Bagikan atau Tanam Dokumen

Opsi Berbagi

Apakah menurut Anda dokumen ini bermanfaat?

Apakah konten ini tidak pantas?

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

Yec1236 SDG SRS 1V01 Draft

Diunggah oleh

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

SDG/SRS/TP01/1.

SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS SPECIFICATION

Software Requirements Specification for Checkout

DOCUMENT REFERENCE YEC1236/SDG/SRS/1V01/DRAFT

VERSION NUMBER 1V01

VERSION DATE March 4, 2011

Name: Mr.Sathishkumar K, Mr. Suresh V S,

Copyright (2011) by Data Patterns

Issue 1.00 Confidential January 19, 2010

Software Requirements Specification March 04, 2010

Software Requirements Specification March 04, 2010

Software Requirements Specification March 04, 2010

Software Requirements Specification March 04, 2010

Software Requirements Specification March 04, 2010

Software Requirements Specification March 04, 2010

Software Requirements Specification March 04, 2010

1.4 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS

1.5 DOCUMENT OVERVIEW

Software Requirements Specification March 04, 2010

Figure 2.1: COE BLOCK DIAGRAM

Software Requirements Specification March 04, 2010

2.1.1 PANEL COMPUTER

2.1.2 SEP1 (ON - BOARD ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT)

2.1.3 SEP2 (ON-BOARD CONTROL SYSTEM)

Software Requirements Specification March 04, 2010

2.2 OPERATING ENVIRONMENT

Software Requirements Specification March 04, 2010

2.3 PRODUCT FUNCTIONS

Software Requirements Specification March 04, 2010

2.4 USER CLASSES AND CHARACTERISTICS

FUNCTIONS ROOT EXPERTS OPERATORS

Software Requirements Specification March 04, 2010

2.5 APPORTIONING OF REQUIREMENTS

Software Requirements Specification March 04, 2010

S. NO. SECTIONS REFERENCE

20 Section 3.1.3.54 EXECUTABLE PROGRAM CHECKSUM

Software Requirements Specification March 04, 2010

2.6 ASSUMPTIONS AND DEPENDENCIES

The following are the interlocks identified as dependencies,

Software Requirements Specification March 04, 2010

3.1.1 PANEL COMPUTER REQUIREMENTS

Software Requirements Specification March 04, 2010

S. NO IDENTIFICATION NUMBER REQUIREMENT

3.1.1.1 SOFTWARE AUTHENTICATION

Requirement ID: DP_COE_PC_REQ_01

Software Requirements Specification March 04, 2010

3.1.1.3 POWER SUPPLY STATUS

3.1.1.4 TEMPERATURE STATUS

Software Requirements Specification March 04, 2010

3.1.1.5 ENTRY INTO SYSTEM

Software Requirements Specification March 04, 2010

3.1.1.6 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION PROVIDED

Software Requirements Specification March 04, 2010

Software Requirements Specification March 04, 2010

3.1.1.6.1 BOOKMARK SEQUENCE FOR SELF CHECK

Software Requirements Specification March 04, 2010

3.1.1.6.2 BOOKMARK SEQUENCE FOR TYPE A

Software Requirements Specification March 04, 2010

3.1.1.7 OPERATIONAL TYPE SELECTION

Software Requirements Specification March 04, 2010

Requirement ID: DP_COE_PC_REQ_07_01

7. Checking the correctness of warhead simulator 323